X4 Ops and SVC PDF

Trailer & Rail Refrigeration
FUSIBLE CONDENSER
PLUG
RECEIVER
SV1 N/O
BYPASS
CHECK
VALVE
FILTER-DRIER
SV4
N/C
Operation and Service Manual

for
TM
X4 7300 & 7500

Trailer and Rail Refrigeration Units
62-11637 Rev F
Operation and Service Manual
for
TM
X4 7300 & 7500

Trailer and Rail Refrigeration Units
© Carrier Corporation, 2018 Printed in U. S. A. May 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTICE STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3 SPECIFIC R-452A REFRIGERANT WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1.4 SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
UNIT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 REFRIGERANT TYPES USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4 CONDENSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2.5 EVAPORATOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2.6 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.7 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.8 ENGINE DATA ............................................................. 2–18
2.9 COMPRESSOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2.11 COMPONENT RESISTANCE AND CURRENT DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2.12 SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2.13 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT - COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
2.14 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT - HEAT AND DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2 DISPLAY SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.3 STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.4 INSPECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.5 INTELLISET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.6 PRE-TRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.7 CHANGING SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.8 START-STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.9 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.10 DATA RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.11 MANUAL DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.12 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.13 ADVANCED USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.14 UNIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.15 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.16 VIEW HOUR METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.17 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.18 SLEEP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28
3.19 STOPPING THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3.20 DATATRAK (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
3.21 EMERGENCY BYPASS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3.22 REMOTE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
ENGINE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
i 62-11637
4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3 ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.4 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.6 START-STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.8 AUTOFRESH AIR EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.9 DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.10 USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.11 PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INTERFACE METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 TECHNICIAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 USB MEMORY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.4 TRU-TECH & TRU-VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
SERVICE ............................................................................. 8–1
8.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.3 PRETRIP INSPECTION- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.4 EXTERNAL SURFACE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.5 ENGINE AND ENGINE RELATED SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
8.6 POWER TRAIN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.7 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.8 COMPRESSOR AND UNLOADER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9.1 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9.2 ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9.3 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
10.1 HARNESS CONNECTOR WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.2 SPLICE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
10.3 WIRING SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
62-11637 ii
SECTION 1
Safety Precautions
1.1 Safety Precautions
! WARNING
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS: Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment can be
hazardous due to system pressures, rotating elements and electrical components. Only trained
& qualified service personnel should install, repair or service refrigeration equipment. When
working on refrigeration equipment, observe precautions in all literature including this manual,
the equipment tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may
apply. Follow safe work practices and utilize the appropriate protective equipment at all times.
Your Carrier Transicold refrigeration unit has been designed with the safety of the operator in mind. During normal
operation, all moving parts are fully enclosed to help prevent injury. During all pre-trip inspections, daily inspec-
tions, and problem troubleshooting, you may be exposed to moving parts. Please stay clear of all moving parts
when the unit is in operation and when the START/RUN-OFF switch (SROS) is in the START/RUN position.
NOTICE
Electronic modules MUST be handled with care to prevent accidental damage or degradation
from electrical static discharge (ESD), contamination or abuse. Before touching a module,
touch your body and/or conductive tool being used to the frame to discharge ESD safely. All
electronics should be handled carefully and only held by edges of any exposed board. Care
should be taken when inserting/extracting connectors and components to avoid exerting
excessive stress on the board which could fracture small components nearby, resulting in
future failure of the circuit.
NOTICE
Under no circumstances should a technician electrically probe the modules at any point, other
than the connector terminals where the harness attaches. Module components operate at
different voltage levels and at extremely low current levels. Improper use of voltmeters, jumper
wires, continuity testers, etc. could permanently damage the module.
Automatic Start-Stop
This refrigeration unit is equipped with Auto-Start in both Start-Stop and Continuous Operation. The unit may start
at any time. A buzzer will sound for five seconds before the unit is started. When performing any check of the refrig-
eration unit (e.g., visually checking belts, checking the oil), place unit in Inspect Mode and disconnect the starter
solenoid connector.
Engine Coolant
The engine is equipped with a pressurized cooling system including a pressurized coolant bottle. Under normal
operating conditions, the coolant in the engine and radiator is under high pressure and is very hot. Contact with hot
coolant can cause severe burns. Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant system. If the cap must be removed,
cover it with a rag and remove very slowly in order to release the pressure without spray.
Refrigerants
The refrigerant contained in the refrigeration system of this unit can cause frostbite, severe burns, or blindness
when in direct contact with the skin or eyes. For this reason (and because of legislation regarding the handling of
refrigerants) we recommend that you contact your nearest Carrier Transicold authorized repair facility whenever
service of the refrigerant system is required.
Battery
This unit may be equipped with a lead-acid type battery. The battery normally vents small amounts of flammable
hydrogen gas. Do not smoke when checking the battery. A battery explosion can cause serious physical harm and/
or blindness.
1–1 62-11637
1.2 Specific Warning, Caution, and Notice Statements
To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:
! DANGER
DANGER - warns against an immediate hazard which WILL result in severe personal injury or
death.
! WARNING
WARNING - warns against hazards or unsafe conditions which COULD result in severe
personal injury or death.
! CAUTION
CAUTION - warns against potential hazard or unsafe practices which could result in minor per-
sonal injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE - warns against potential product or property damage.
The following statements are specifically applicable to this refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual.
These recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equip-
ment covered herein.
! WARNING
Unit may start automatically at any time even if the switch is in the OFF position. Use proper
lockout/tagout procedures before inspection/servicing. All unit inspection/servicing by
properly trained personnel only.
! WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or any other starting aids be used to start the engine.
! WARNING
Do not toggle the START/RUN - OFF switch out of the OFF position when in PC Mode or the
unit will start.
! WARNING
Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant system; if the cap must be removed, do so very
slowly in order to release the pressure without spray.
! WARNING
Beware of moving belt and belt driven components.
62-11637 1–2
! WARNING
When working with belts, beware of pinch points.
! WARNING
Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant
compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to explosion.
! WARNING
Inspect battery cables for signs of wear, abrasion or damage at every pre-trip inspection and
replace if necessary. Also check battery cable routing to ensure that clamps are secure and
that cables are not pinched or chafing against any components.
! WARNING
Use the required protective eye wear and clothing when working with solvents.
! WARNING
! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do not use oxygen in or near a refrigerant system as an
explosion may occur. (Figure 8.44).
! WARNING
Do not unscrew service valve mounting capscrews all the way before breaking seal. Entrapped
pressure could result in injury.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew replacement compressor lifting eyelet/blankoff plate mounting capscrews all
the way before breaking seal. Entrapped pressure could result in injury.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew cylinder head mounting capscrews all the way before breaking seal.
Entrapped pressure could result in injury.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew enclosing tube nut all the way before breaking seal. Entrapped pressure could
result in injury.
1–3 62-11637
! WARNING
Do not unscrew unloader valve body mounting bolts all the way before breaking seal.
! WARNING
Only a refrigerant cylinder containing R404A or R4525A should be connected to this
refrigeration unit in order to pressurize the system. However, dry nitrogen may be used to
increase pressure. Any other gas or vapor will contaminate the system and require additional
removal and evacuation.
! CAUTION
Observe proper polarity when installing battery. Negative battery terminal must be grounded.
Reverse polarity will destroy the rectifier diodes in alternator. As a precautionary measure,
disconnect the negative and then the positive battery terminal when charging battery in unit.
! CAUTION
Service Mode MUST be used whenever removing refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak checking
or evacuating.
! CAUTION
Disconnect batteries before doing any electrical welding on unit or chassis to which unit is
attached (trailer, container, rail car, metal building, etc).
NOTICE
Under no circumstances should anyone attempt to repair sealed module internal components.
Should a problem develop with these components, contact your nearest Carrier Transicold
dealer for replacement.
NOTICE
Use Texaco Havoline extended life coolant or any other extended life coolant which is Dexcool
approved and has 5/150 (5 years / 150,000 miles) on the label.
NOTICE
Technician Mode should be canceled when work is complete. If Technician Mode is not
canceled, Technician Mode will be available for 60 minutes after the last key press without
requiring a code, even after placing the SROS in the OFF and then back in the RUN/STOP
position.
NOTICE
62-11637 1–4
NOTICE
NOTICE
Ensure that the clock you are using is accurate. Also, some customers are located in different
time zones from the repair location. If you know the owners desired location time, enter that
time. If you don’t, enter the current time at your location.
NOTICE
DO NOT leave the air intake circuit energized for the full 5 minutes if full amperage is shown, as
the intake air heater element life will be greatly shortened.
NOTICE
Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of inert gas brazing procedures is mandatory for all
Carrier Transicold refrigeration units; otherwise compressor failure will occur. For more
information Refer to Technical Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert Gas Brazing.
NOTICE
Running the engine for an extended period of time with the manual plunger up can cause a
priming pump failure.
NOTICE
Torque fuel level sensor mounting screws to 15 to 18 inch/lbs (1.7 to 2.0 Nm). DO NOT over
tighten, as little as 20 inch/pounds (2.3 Nm) will damage the sensor.
NOTICE
When changing oil filter, the new filter should be primed (partially filled) with clean oil if
possible. If the filter is not primed, the engine may operate for a period with no oil supplied to
the bearings.
NOTICE
Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself will damage
the cooling system. Always add pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water to radiator / engine.
Never exceed more than a 60% concentration of anti-freeze. Use a low silicate anti-freeze
meeting GM specifications GM 6038M for standard life coolant or use Texaco Havoline
extended life coolant or any other extended life coolant which is Dexcool approved and has 5/
150 (5 years / 150,000 miles) on the label.
1–5 62-11637
NOTICE
NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT ENGINE, however hot water can always be added to
a cold engine.
NOTICE
Do not vapor charge R404A. Only liquid charging through the liquid line service valve is
acceptable.
NOTICE
Ensure that thrust washer does not fall off dowel pins while installing oil pump.
NOTICE
An overcharge of oil will reduce system capacity and possibly cause internal compressor
damage.
NOTICE
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Polyol Ester Oil (POE). Buy quantities of one gallon or
less. When using this hygroscopic oil, immediately reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or
contamination will occur.
NOTICE
Extreme care must be taken to ensure the hose is immersed in the oil at all times. Otherwise air
and moisture will be drawn into the compressor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
When a module is replaced, software should be upgraded before switching the unit on. This
will ensure software compatibility of all modules.
NOTICE
Do not bend the copper tubing on the condenser coil when installing the new condenser. Bend
the unit tubing if tubes do not align correctly.
62-11637 1–6
1.3 SPECIFIC R-452A REFRIGERANT WARNING AND CAUTION
! WARNING
R-452A is an A1 non-flammable refrigerant blend; however certain of its constituents are
considered A2L mildly flammable.
For this reason, it is imperative that the system of a Vector unit utilizing R-452A refrigerant be
reclaim to a sufficient vacuum to ensure all residual refrigerant is removed from the system.
Follow the R-452A refrigerant reclaim / recovery procedure before performing any “Hot work”
including but not limited to brazing or welding on a unit that has been charged with R-452A, to
prevent flare up of residual A2L refrigerant constituents.
Refrigerant must be reclaimed until equipment gauge indicates 20 inHG (-0.6bar) of vacuum.
Refer to Section 8.7.5 Removing The R- 452A Refrigerant Charge
! CAUTION
As distinct of R404A refrigerant, R-452A has a temperature glide (specific properties) more
important and not negligible between vapor state and liquid state.
For a given temperature, the liquid state pressure value and the vapor state pressure value, of
the R-452A refrigerant are different.
Refer to Table 8–5 and Table 8–6 for Temperature pressure chart.
! CAUTION
Do not vapor charge R-404A or R-452A. Only liquid charging is acceptable.
! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.
! CAUTION
Do not direct water or steam into the generator openings. Do not allow any soap and water
solutions to enter the generator.
! CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone attempt to repair the Logic or Display boards. Should
a problem develop with these components, contact your nearest Carrier Transicold dealer for
replacement.
1–7 62-11637
1.4Safety Decals
62-11637 1–8
1–9 62-11637
62-11637 1–10
1–11 62-11637
62-11637 1–12
SECTION 2 - UNIT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2.2 REFRIGERANT TYPES USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4 CONDENSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.4.1 Engine ................................................................. 2–6
2.4.2 Engine Air System ........................................................ 2–6
2.4.3 Engine Controls .......................................................... 2–6
2.4.4 Alternator ............................................................... 2–7
2.4.5 Power Train ............................................................. 2–7
2.4.6 Unloaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2.4.7 Compressor ............................................................. 2–7
2.4.8 Compressor Switches, Transducers & Sensors ................................. 2–9
2.4.9 Condenser Coil ......................................................... 2–10
2.4.10 Heat Exchanger ......................................................... 2–10
2.4.11 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) ...................................... 2–10
2.4.12 Solenoid Valves ......................................................... 2–10
2.4.13 Filter Drier ............................................................. 2–10
2.4.14 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.4.15 AutoFresh Air Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5 EVAPORATOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.1 Evaporator Coil ......................................................... 2–11
2.5.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2.5.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) ................................ 2–11
2.5.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2.6 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS & COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2.6.1 Multiple Languages ...................................................... 2–12
2.6.2 Automatic Start-Stop ..................................................... 2–12
2.6.3 Special Features ........................................................ 2–12
2.6.4 Component Description And Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2.7 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.7.1 Light Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.7.2 Remote Switch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.7.3 Remote Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.7.4 Fuel Level Sensor ....................................................... 2–16
2.7.5 Fuel Heater ............................................................ 2–16
2.7.6 Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.7.7 Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.8 ENGINE DATA ............................................................. 2–17
2.9 COMPRESSOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.11 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.12 SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
2.13 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT - COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2.14 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT - HEAT & DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 2
UNIT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Introduction
! WARNING
This manual contains operating data, electrical data and service instructions for the refrigeration units listed in
Table 2–1.
Additional support manuals are listed in Table 2–2.
The unit model/serial number plate is located inside the unit on the frame as shown in Figure 2.1.
2.2 Refrigerant Types Used
! WARNING
The unit can be charged with R-404A or R- 452A. Do not mix R-404A and R-452A refrigerant. In
addition to the model number, a refrigerant sticker indicates the refrigerant type used by the
unit.
2.3 General Description

The units described in this manual are one-piece, self-contained, fully charged, pre-wired, refrigeration/heating
“nosemount” diesel powered units. The units are used on insulated refrigerated compartments to maintain cargo
temperatures within very close limits.
The APX Control System includes a manual switch, control modules, fuses, and associated wiring. The unit may
be equipped with an optional remote light bar which mounts separately on the front outside corner of the compart-
ment.
Temperature control is provided by the Carrier Transicold APX Control System (Refer to Section 2.6). Once the
system is set at the desired temperature, the unit will operate automatically to maintain the desired temperature
within very close limits. The APX Control System automatically selects high and low speed cooling or high and low
speed heating as necessary to maintain the desired temperature within the refrigerated compartment.
2–1 62-11637
Standard equipment includes an auto start-stop feature. This feature provides automatic cycling of the diesel
engine, which in turn offers an energy efficient alternative to continuous operation of the engine with control of tem-
perature by alternate cooling and heating of the supply air (evaporator outlet air).
The unit may be equipped with the AutoFreshTM Air Exchange which controls air quality and humidity for fresh pro-
duce.
The unit can be described as having three major sections:
• The condensing section (Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2), which includes the unidrive and power train (Figure
2.2).
• The evaporator section (Figure 2.3).
• The APX Control System (Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.7).
Table 2–1 Model Chart

Refrigerant
Refrigerant Charge
Model Compressor Engine Engine Speed
Type
LB KG
X4 7300 NDW136 R-404A 15 6.80
X4 7300 NDW176 R-452A 15 6.80 High 1800
05G 41cfm V2203L-DI-EF01e
X4 7500 NDW236 R-404A 16 7.26 Low 1350
X4 7500 NDW276 R-452A 16 7.26
Table 2–2 Additional Support Manuals

Manual Number Type of Manual
62-11369 Parts Look Up System (PLUS)
62-11644 Operator’s Manual
62-11052 05G Compressor Workshop Manual
62-11637 2–2
Figure 2.1 Front View - Refrigeration System Components
4 3 2 1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16,17
18,19
20
21 22 23 24 25
1. Condenser Coil and Sub-Cooler 14. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
2. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) 15. Discharge Service Valve and Strainer
3. Condenser Fan 16. High Pressure Switch (HPS - Located in the tee)
4. Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 17. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
(SV1) (CDP - Located in the elbow)
5. Defrost Air Switch (DAS) 18. Front Unloader Valve (UL1 - on front head)
6. Radiator 19. Rear Unloader Valve (UL2 - on back head)
7. Receiver 20. Compressor
8. Receiver Sight Glasses 21. Compressor Sight Glass
9. Filter Drier 22. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
10. Liquid Line Service Valve (CDT)
11. Hot Gas Solenoid Valve (SV4) 23. Suction Service Valve and Strainer
12. Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (SV2) 24. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)
13. Heat Exchanger 25. Model/Serial Number Nameplate
-----
2–3 62-11637
Figure 2.2 Front View - Engine, Control System and AutoFresh Components
2
33
32
3
4
31 5
30 6
7
29
28 8
9
27 10
11
12
24 22 20 18 16 14
26 25 23 21 19 17 15 13
1. Coolant Bottle 19. Engine Oil Fill and Dipstick

2. Clutch (CLH) 20. Rack Position Sensor (RPS)
3. Fuel Filter/Heater (FH) or Fuel Head Assembly 21. Engine Oil Drain
4. Exhaust 22. Starter (SS,SSC,SM)
5. Manual Plunger 23. Engine Preheater (EPH)
6. Bleed Valve 24. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
7. Alternator (ALT) (Behind Engine Preheater)
8. Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA) 25. Intake Air Temperature Sensor
9. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) (IAT - If Equipped)
10. Stepper Valve Module (SVM) 26. Battery (BTY)
11. Display Module (DM) 27. Power Control Module (PCM - Figure 2.7)
12. START/RUN-OFF Switch (SROS) 28. Main Microprocessor Module (MM)
13. USB Interface Port 29. Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Service Indicator and
Manifold Absolute Pressure Transducer
14. Suction Side Filter/Heater (If Equipped) (MAP - If Equipped)
15. Engine Control Unit (ENCU) 30. Lower Belt and Idler
16. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS) 31. Gearbox and Upper Belt
17. Engine Oil Filter 32. AutoFresh Air Exchange
18. Mechanical Fuel Pump 33. AutoFresh Air Exchange Solenoid (AFAS)
-----
62-11637 2–4
Figure 2.3 Evaporator Section - Grille Removed
1 2 3 5
4
16
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
MOUNT DTT AS SHOWN
TUBE SHEET
1. Evaporator Air Nozzle 9. Low Pressure Air Switch Fitting (location)

2. Evaporator Fan 10. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)
3. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) 11. Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT)
4. Low Pressure Defrost Air Switch Tubing (Clear) 12. Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT)
5. High Pressure Defrost Air Switch Tubing (Red) 13. EVXV Inlet Strainer Location
6. Evaporator Coil 14. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)
7. Return Air Temperature Sensor 2 (RAT2) and Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor
(located behind bracket, if equipped) (EVOT)
8. High Pressure Air Switch Fitting 15. Hot Gas Line
16. Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)
-----
2–5 62-11637
62-11637 2–6
2.4 Condensing Section
The condensing section (see Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2) consists of an engine-compressor drive (unidrive assem-
bly), power train (which drives the fans), AutoFresh Air Exchange, condenser fan, condenser, radiator, heat
exchanger, solenoid valves, defrost air switch, piping, wiring, and associated components.
The unidrive assembly (see Figure 2.2) includes the engine, compressor, alternator, air cleaner, coolant system,
fuel system, engine oil filter system and engine sensors.
The power train includes the drive belts, gear box, fanshaft and clutch.
2.4.1 Engine
The engine is a four cylinder diesel which gives excellent fuel economy. It drives the compressor directly through a
nylon dive gear and adapter. The adapter also includes a V-belt sheave which drives the power train. The engine
cooling system consists of the radiator (which is mounted with the condenser coil) and coolant overflow bottle. The
engine is equipped with:
• An engine preheater (EPH), which provides easy starting characteristics.
• Spin-on engine oil filter and a spin-on or suction side fuel filters for easier filter changes. The fuel filter may
also be equipped with a thermostatically controlled fuel heater.
• An alternator supplies electrical power for the APX Control System and for battery charging.
Refer to Section 2.8 for engine data.
2.4.2 Engine Air System

The air cleaner prolongs the life and performance of the engine by preventing dirt and grit from getting into the
engine and causing excessive wear on all operating parts. It is the responsibility of the operator to give the air
cleaner equipment regular and constant attention in accordance with the instructions. An air cleaner service indica-
tor is connected at the outlet. Its function is to indicate when the air cleaner filter element requires replacement.
(Refer to Section 8.5.10.)
The system may be fitted with an intake air temperature sensor (IAT) and a manifold absolute pressure transducer
(MAP). These sensors are installed when Carrier Transicold factory monitoring of the air system is required.
2.4.3 Engine Controls
2.4.3.1 Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA)

The FSA combines the fuel shutoff solenoid and speed control solenoid into one component. Fuel supply to the
injectors and engine speed is controlled by varying rod position in accordance with the signal from the control sys-
tem. In order to ease the load on the system, speed transition (high to low and low to high) is ramped up or down
over a 10 second period. The FSA is located on the front of the injection pump.
2.4.3.2 Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)

The ENSSN provides the APX Control System with information on the speed at which the engine is running. The
ENSSN is located in the gear case cover above the engine oil filter.
2.4.3.3 Rack Position Sensor (RPS)

The RPS provides the APX Control System with engine fuel rack (throttle) position information to be used to control
the engine and refrigeration system. The sensor is located on the injection pump.
2.4.3.4 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)

The ENOPS is normally open and closes on pressure rise to signal to the APX Control System the engine has suf-
ficient oil pressure for operation. There is a 15 second delay after the engine starts to allow the oil pressure to build
up before the APX Control System looks at the input from this switch. The switch is located in the oil filter mounting
assembly.
2.4.3.5 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)

The ENCT is a thermistor type sensor that provides the APX Control System with engine coolant temperature infor-
mation to be displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used to control the engine and refrigeration
system. The sensor is located on the flywheel end of the cylinder head near the #4 Injector.
2–7 62-11637
2.4.4 Alternator
Electrical power for the APX Control System and for battery charging is provided by the 12 VDC alternator.
2.4.4.1 Alternator Operation
! CAUTION
Reverse polarity will destroy the rectifier diodes in alternator. As a precautionary measure, dis-
connect the negative and then the positive battery terminal when charging battery in unit.
The alternator converts mechanical and magnetic The regulator is an electronic switching device. It
energy to alternating current (AC) and voltage, by the senses the system voltage level and switches the volt-
rotation of an electromagnetic field (rotor) inside a age applied to the field in order to maintain proper sys-
three-phase stator assembly. The alternating current tem voltage.
and voltage is changed to direct current and voltage by
passing AC energy through a three-phase, full-wave
rectifier system. Six silicon rectifier diodes are used.
2.4.4.2 Voltage Regulator Operation

The integral regulator is an all-electronic, transistorized Figure 2.4 Power Train
device. No mechanical contacts or relays are used to
perform the voltage regulation of the alternator system. Condenser Fan
The electronic circuitry should never require adjust- Evaporator Blower
ment and the solid state active elements used have
Fanshaft
proved reliable enough to warrant a sealed unit. The Clutch
Assembly
system is temperature compensated to permit the ideal
charging rate at all temperatures.
2.4.5 Power Train

Upper Belt
The power train (see Figure 2.4) is a belt drive system
that transfers power from the engine to the condenser
and evaporator fans. The system consists an upper Upper Idler
and lower belt, gear box, fan shaft and clutch. Lower Belt
Gear Box
Lower Idler
Unidrive
2.4.6 Unloaders
The compressor is equipped with unloaders as standard equipment. Unloaders are used as a compressor capacity
control to unload the cylinder banks during periods of reduced cooling loads. This provides closer temperature control
and reduces the power required to operate the compressor; thus reducing fuel consumption.
2.4.7 Compressor
The compressor assembly includes the refrigerant compressor, suction and discharge service valves, high pres-
sure switch, compressor discharge temperature sensor and the suction and discharge pressure transducers. The
compressor draws refrigerant gas from the evaporator and delivers it to the condenser at an increased temperature
and pressure. The pressure is such that refrigerant heat can be absorbed by the surrounding air at ambient tem-
peratures.
62-11637 2–8
2.4.7.1 Major Working Parts
• Solenoid and valve system
• Spring loaded piston type bypass valve
• Spring loaded discharge check valve (located on the valve plate)
Figure 2.5 Compressor Cylinder Head Unloaded
Solenoid Valve Stem

Valve Gas Bypass Port
Spring Guide
Spring Bypass Valve
Piston
Bleed Orifice
Cylinder Discharge Valve
Strainer
Discharge Manifold
Suction
Discharge Check Manifold
Valve Assembly
Valve Plate
Cylinder Suction Valve
2.4.7.2 Unloaded Operation

Pressure from the discharge manifold (Figure 2.5) passes through the strainer and bleed orifice to the back of the
bypass valve piston. Unless bled away, this pressure would tend to close the piston against the spring pressure
and load the cylinders in that head.
With the solenoid valve energized the solenoid valve stem will open the gas bypass port.
Discharge pressure will be bled to the suction manifold through the opened gas bypass port. A reduction in pressure
on the bypass piston valve will take place because the rate of bleed through the gas bypass port is greater than the
rate of bleed through the bleed orifice.
When the pressure behind the piston has been reduced sufficiently, the valve spring will force the piston back,
opening the gas bypass from the discharge manifold to the suction manifold.
Discharge pressure in the discharge manifold will close the discharge piston check valve assembly isolating the
compressor discharge manifold from the individual cylinder bank manifold.
The unloaded cylinder bank will continue to operate fully unloaded until the solenoid valve is de-energized and the
gas bypass port is closed.
2–9 62-11637
Figure 2.6 Compressor Cylinder Head Loaded
Valve Stem
Solenoid
Gas Bypass Port
Valve
Spring Guide
Spring Bypass Valve
Piston
Bleed Orifice
Strainer Cylinder Discharge Valve
Discharge Manifold
Suction
Manifold
Discharge Check
Valve Assembly
Valve Plate
Cylinder Suction Valve
2.4.7.3 Loaded Operation

With the solenoid valve (Figure 2.6) de-energized the solenoid valve stem will close the gas bypass port.
Pressure from the discharge manifold through the strainer and bleed orifice will build behind the piston. The
increased pressure will overcome the bypass valve spring tension and force the piston forward closing the gas
bypass from the discharge manifold to the suction manifold.
Cylinder discharge pressure will force the discharge check valve assembly open. Refrigerant gas will then flow into
the compressor discharge manifold.
The loaded cylinder bank will continue to operate fully loaded until the solenoid valve is energized and the gas
bypass port is opened.
2.4.8 Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors
2.4.8.1 Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (CDP)

The CDP provides a signal to the APX Control System equivalent to pressure leaving the compressor. The reading
is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. The CDP is
located on the compressor center head.
2.4.8.2 Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)
The CSP provides a signal to the APX Control System equivalent to pressure entering the compressor cylinders.
The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. The
CSP is located in the suction line, just above the suction service valve.
2.4.8.3 High Pressure Switch (HPS)
HPS is normally closed and opens on pressure rise to signal to the APX Control System to shut down the engine if
discharge pressure rises above switch setting. HPS is located on the compressor center head.
2.4.8.4 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT)
The CDT is a thermistor type sensor that provides a signal to the APX Control System equivalent to the tempera-
ture of the gas leaving the compressor. The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used
to control the refrigeration system. The CDT is located on the compressor center head.
62-11637 2–10
2.4.8.5 Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
The CST is a thermistor type sensor that provides a signal to the APX Control System equivalent to the tempera-
ture of the gas leaving the heat exchanger and entering the compressor.
The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. The
CST is located on the heat exchanger outlet to suction vibrasorber line.
2.4.9 Condenser Coil
The condenser coil is a microchannel type and acts as a heat exchanger in which the compressed refrigerant gas
is lowered in temperature and condensed into a liquid. A portion of the condenser coil is occupied by the subcooler,
which removes heat from the refrigerant liquid leaving the receiver. Air movement over the condenser/subcooler/
radiator is provided by a belt driven fan mounted in the condensing section.
2.4.10 Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger is the compact braze plate type and is installed in the main suction line and liquid line. The
suction gas is used to cool the warm liquid refrigerant within the heat exchanger. This results in greater system effi-
ciency. The heat exchanger is located below the condenser coil on the curb side.
2.4.11 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT)
The AAT is a thermistor type sensor that provides the APX Control System with condenser entering air temperature
information to be displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used to control the refrigeration system.
The AAT is located behind the front grill.
2.4.12 Solenoid Valves
Flow of refrigerant though the refrigeration system (refer to Section 2.13 and Section 2.14) is controlled by solenoid
valves. Solenoid valves are electronic valves that may be opened and closed (energized and de-energized) by the
APX Control System as required by the operating conditions. The solenoid valves include the Condenser Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve (SV1), Liquid Line solenoid Valve (SV2) and the Hot Gas Solenoid Valve (SV4), Figure 2.1.
2.4.13 Filter Drier
The Filter Drier is a cylindrical shell containing a drying agent and filter screen. It is installed in the liquid line and
functions to keep the system clean and remove moisture from the refrigerant.
2.4.14 Receiver
Liquid refrigerant from the condenser flows into the receiver. The receiver serves as a liquid reservoir when there
are surges due to load changes in the system; as a storage space when pumping down the system and as a liquid
seal against the entrance of refrigerant gas into the liquid line.
The receiver is provided with two bullseye sight glasses, for the observation of liquid level and moisture content,
and a fusible plug.
2.4.15 AutoFresh Air Exchange
As perishable products respire, they consume oxygen (O2) and give off carbon dioxide (CO2). This will eventually
cause the atmosphere within a refrigerated compartment to have higher levels of CO2 and lower levels of O2. This
may adversely affect the shelf life of some sensitive perishable products. When transporting these products, it may
be desirable to maintain normal atmospheric conditions (prevent the build up of CO2 and the depletion of O2) by
using fresh air exchange, in addition to accurate temperature control. The AutoFresh Air Exchange (Figure 2.2)
controls the amount of fresh air entering the refrigerated compartment without the need for manual intervention
while in transit. AutoFresh Air Exchange can also be used to lower the humidity level within a refrigerated compart-
ment if the ambient air has a lower humidity level.
AutoFresh Air Exchange is a factory-installed option, as it requires a modified evaporator pod. It is located at the
upper curb side door. When air is being exchanged, two air ports open. The upper port allows fresh ambient air to
enter while stale air exits through the lower port.
2.5 Evaporator Section
The evaporator (Figure 2.3) fits into a rectangular opening in the upper portion of the front wall of the refrigerated
compartment. When installed, the evaporator section is located inside the compartment, and the condensing sec-
tion is outside.
The evaporator assembly consists of an evaporator coil, evaporator fan, evaporator expansion valve, evaporator
outlet pressure transducer, evaporator outlet temperature sensor, defrost termination temperature sensor, supply
temperature sensor and return air temperature sensor.
2–11 62-11637
2.5.1 Evaporator Coil
The evaporator is a tube in fin type. The operation of the compressor maintains a reduced pressure within the coil.
At this reduced pressure, the liquid refrigerant evaporates at a temperature sufficiently low enough to absorb heat
from the air.
Heating is accomplished by circulating hot gas directly from the compressor discharge to the evaporator coil. Sole-
noid valves control the refrigerant flow to operate the heating/cooling system.
Automatic evaporator coil defrosting is initiated by either the defrost air switch (DAS - which senses the pressure
drop across the coil) or by the APX Control System defrost timer. During defrost the system is in the Heat Mode,
and the clutch is de-energized to stop the evaporator fan.
2.5.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)

The EVXV is an automatic device which controls the flow of liquid to the evaporator according to changes in super-
heat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator. The expansion valve maintains a relatively constant degree of super-
heat in the gas leaving the evaporator regardless of suction pressure. The valve has a dual function - automatic
expansion control and prevention of liquid return to the compressor. The valve is located in the liquid line at the
entrance to the distributor.
2.5.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)

The CSMV opens and closes as required for capacity control of the refrigeration cooling cycle. CSMV is located in
the suction line, in the evaporator assembly.
2.5.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors
2.5.4.1 Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)

The EVOP provides the APX Control System with evaporator outlet pressure information to be displayed, recorded
in the DataLink data recorder and used to determine the required position of the evaporator expansion valve. The
EVOP is located in the suction line near the evaporator expansion valve.
2.5.4.2 Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT)

The EVOT provides the APX Control System with evaporator outlet temperature information to be displayed,
recorded in the DataLink data recorder and used to determine the required position of the EVXV. The EVOT is a
thermistor type sensor located on the suction line near the evaporator expansion valve.
2.5.4.3 Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT)

The DTT is a thermistor type sensor located on the center tube sheet of the evaporator coil. DTT provides the APX
Control System with evaporator temperature information to be displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder
and used to determine termination of defrost.
2.5.4.4 Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT / RAT2)

RAT and RAT2 (if equipped) are thermistor type temperature probes which provide the APX Control System infor-
mation on the temperature of the air entering the evaporator section. The readings are displayed, recorded in the
DataLink data recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. RAT is located on a bracket behind the center
of the return air grille. RAT2 is located next to the High Pressure Air Switch Fitting.
2.5.4.5 Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT)

The SAT is a thermistor type temperature control probe which provides the APX Control System with information
on the temperature of air leaving the evaporator section. The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data
recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. It is located in the supply air outlet housing.
62-11637 2–12
2.6 System Operating Controls and Components
Temperature control is provided by the Carrier Transicold APX™ Control System. Once the system is set at the
desired temperature, the unit will operate automatically to maintain the desired temperature within very close limits.
2.6.1 Multiple Languages

Messages in the MessageCenter can be displayed in English or Spanish. Refer to Section 3.12 for more informa-
tion on language selection.
2.6.2 Automatic Start-Stop

Standard equipment includes an auto start-stop feature. This feature provides automatic cycling of the diesel
engine, which in turn offers an energy efficient alternative to continuous operation of the engine with control of tem-
perature accomplished by alternate cooling and heating of the supply air (evaporator outlet air).
2.6.3 Special Features

The following additional special features are incorporated into the Carrier Transicold APX Control System:
• An easy to read MessageCenter which clearly displays all required information
• Unit Data and Advanced User selectable Functional Parameters
• Programmable Maintenance Hour Meters
• Bright LED Alarm Light.
• Fully Automated Pre-Trip
• Automated self-test
• DataLink data recorder (uses APX Control System date and time)
• Trip Start to record date/time of trip in DataLink data recorder memory
• USB communication for downloading data, upgrading operational software, and Configuration set up
• Automatic Engine Starting
• Functional Parameter locks
• Alarms are stored for future reference
• “ATM style” menu system (which reduces keystrokes)
• “Dashboard” display screens which display up to five data points simultaneously
• Backlit “Carrier Blue” silicone keypad makes operation easy for drivers
2.6.4 Component Description And Location

The APX Control System is an automotive style, decentralized, modular system w
ith CAN bus (Controller Area Network) connectivity. Hardware associated with the APX Control System includes
the power control module (PCM - item 27, Figure 2.2), main microprocessor module (MM - item 28), stepper valve
module (SVM - item 10). engine control unit (ENCU - Item 15) and display module (DM - item 11).
NOTICE
2–13 62-11637
Figure 2.7 Power Control Module (PCM)
1
18
2
F8 17
F1 K1
16
3 F10 15
F3 F5 F11
K2 F12 14
4
5 F14
6 K3
7
8
F7
13
9
10 12
11
F6 (10 amp) located at the AutoFresh Exchange solenoid harness connector.
1. Fuse (F5=30 amp), Power Enable Relay 10. Battery Negative Connection (T2)
2. Fuse (F1=5 amp), Main Microprocessor/Buzzer 11. Fuse (F6), AutoFresh Air Exchange
Power 12. Alternator Output Connection (T3)
3. Fuse (F3=5 amp), Stepper Valve/Engine Con- 13. Engine Preheater Power Connection (T4)
trol Unit Power 14. Fuse (F14 = 15 amp), Fuel Heater
4. Relay, Power Enable 15. Fuse (F12 = 5 amp), Satellite Comm. Power
5. Relay, Fuel Heater 16. Fuse (F11 = 5 amp), Light Bar
6. Buzzer (B) 17. Fuse (F10 = 20 amp), Relay Power
7. Relay, AutoFresh Air Exchanger 18. Fuse (F8* = 5 amp), Fuel Level Sensor*
8. Fuse (F7 = 80 amp) Main Power *With EES installed F8=10 amp for FLS and
9. Battery Positive Connection (T1) EES
-----
2.6.4.1 Power Control Module
The Power Control Module (PCM - see Figure 2.7) distributes power from the battery to system components, when
starting, and then from the alternator to system components and to the battery (for charging) once the unit has
started.
The PCM houses system relays, fuses and the current transformer (CT). The current transformer provides a read-
ing of the total 12 VDC system current draw (amps) to the main microprocessor at terminal 2MM12 (see schematic
diagram, Section 10)
2.6.4.2 Main Microprocessor Module
The main microprocessor module (MM) houses the main system microprocessor, is totally self-contained, and does
not contain any serviceable components.
2.6.4.3 SVM Module
The stepper valve module (SVM) houses the microprocessor that controls the operation of the stepper valves;
CSMV and EVXV. The SVM communicates with the APX Control System through the CAN network and also sends
information on the position of the door switch and remote switch to be displayed as required and recorded in the
DataLink data recorder. The module is totally self-contained and does not contain any serviceable components.
62-11637 2–14
2.6.4.4 Microprocessor Status LED
Microprocessor activity within the main microprocessor or SVM Module can be determined by observing the status
LED, located just to the right of the module bar code. The LED indicates the following:
• Solid Green = Unit OK but Communication Sync Lost
• Flashing Green = Normal Operation / Communication Sync OK
• Flashing Red/Green = Sending/Receiving Communication
• Flashing Red = Unit Failure but Communication Sync OK
• Solid Red = Internal Failure or Loss of Software
• NO LED = No Power
Figure 2.8 Display Module
5 6
START/STOP DIESEL COOL
34.3
4
3
34 8 7
BOX TEMPERATURE oF SETPOINT oF

STATUS OK
11 10 9
1. Display Screen 7. Arrow Keys

2. MENU key 8. “=” (Select) Key
3. DEFROST key 9. START/RUN-OFF Switch
4. START/STOP - CONTINUOUS Key 10. Soft Keys
5. Alarm LED 11. USB Interface Port
6. Alarm Key
-----
2.6.4.5 Engine Control Unit (ENCU)

The ENCU (Figure 2.2) is a microprocessor based unit which controls the operation of the engine. The ENCU
communicates with the APX Control System through the CAN network and sends information on engine speed, oil
pressure and coolant temperature to the APX Control System to be displayed in the Advanced User Unit Data and
recorded in the DataLink data recorder. The ENCU also communicates with the main microprocessor (MM) to con-
trol overall system balance. The ENCU is mounted on the frame near the front of the engine.
2–15 62-11637
2.6.4.6 Display Module (DM) - See Figure 2.8
Display - The APX Control System displays the refrigerated compartment temperature to the left, and current set-
point to the right. Configurations are available to display the setpoint in either whole numbers or with tenths of a
degree. The temperature description is followed by a letter indicating degrees Fahrenheit (F) or Centigrade (C).
Message Center - Messages generated by the APX Control System are displayed in the MessageCenter.
Details of the messages are described in Section 6.
START/RUN-OFF Switch (SROS) - When placed in the START/RUN position, this switch provides power to start
the unit. The main microprocessor performs a self-test. Then setpoint and compartment temperatures are dis-
played. To stop the unit, place the SROS in the OFF position.
2.6.4.7 Display Module Keys - See Figure 2.8.

• ALARM - The ALARM key allows viewing of the alarms stored in the system.
• UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW - These keys allow scrolling through the selections presented.
• EQUAL (ENTER) - The EQUAL key is used to confirm a selection and lock it into memory.
• START-STOP/CONTINUOUS - Pressing this key toggles between Start-Stop and Continuous Operation.
• DEFROST - Used to manually initiate a defrost cycle when the required conditions are met.
• MENU - Pressing the MENU key displays the various soft keys in the MessageCenter. The selections
offered are dependent on the operator’s status: Driver, Advanced User or Technician. Refer to Section 3 for
Driver and Advance User mode and Section 5 for Technician mode menu selection descriptions.
• USB Interface Port - Used for installing software updates, options, configurations, functional parameters
and downloading of data from the Data Link data recorder.
2.7 Options
2.7.1 Light Bar Figure 2.9 Light Bar
The Light Bar is an external indicator light which can be

seen in the driver’s rear view mirror from the cab of the
tractor.
The green LED indicates “STATUS OK”. AMBER
The amber LED indicates “CHECK UNIT”. The amber
light is illuminated when the APX Control System illumi-
nates the alarm light. Alarms can be read on the dis-
GREEN
play.
2.7.2 Remote Switch(es)

The unit is provisioned to connect a door switch (DS) and/or a remote switch (REMS1) directly to the APX Control
System at the SVM.
• Two types of switches may be used:
1. A switch with contacts that are open when the door is open or the remote switch is activated.
2. A switch with contacts that are closed when the door is open or the remote switch is activated.
• Four configurations are available:
1. Activate an alarm only while the switch is activated.
2. Activate an alarm and shut the unit down while the switch is activated. The unit will remain shut down for a
minimum of three minutes under this setting.
3. Activate the alarm and bring the engine into low speed while the switch is activated.
4. Record the switch activation in the DataLink data recorder.
• If configured to shut the unit down or bring the engine to low speed, an additional choice will be available. The
additional choice allows the unit to be set so that the configured action will always take place OR the configured
action will only take place when the ambient temperature is below a certain temperature. For example, if the
62-11637 2–16
shutdown/low speed temperature choice is set to 77°F (25°C) the unit will only shutdown/go to low speed if the
ambient temperature is below 77°F (25°C).
• Additionally, a Functional Parameter “override” setting will be available when the switch is configured to shut
the unit down. The Functional Parameter may be set to “YES” or “NO”. If the Parameter is set to “NO” the
configured action will not be overridden. If the Parameter is set to “YES”, the alarm will be activated but the
unit will not shutdown.
2.7.3 Remote Temperature Sensors

The unit is provisioned to connect one or two remote temperature sensors directly to the APX Control System.
The system may be configured to display the sensor reading in the Unit Data and to record the sensor reading in
the DataLink data recorder. A user specified name may be configured for each sensor. This name will be displayed,
rather than the default Remote Sensor #1 or Remote Sensor #2, name in the unit data list.
2.7.4 Fuel Level Sensor

An optional fuel level sensor (Figure 8.10) supplies an input signal to the APX Control System based on the per-
cent of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Alarm 00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING will be activated when fuel level
reaches 15%, and (if configured to do so) will shut the engine down when fuel level reaches 10%. The alarm is
automatically cleared when the fuel level is brought above 25%. The fuel tank level is displayed in Unit Data.
2.7.5 Fuel Heater

The optional fuel heater (Figure 2.2) applies heat to fuel in the fuel filter. Heating the fuel dissolves/prevents paraf-
fin wax crystals (and ice) that form when diesel fuel is chilled thus enabling the water separator to work more effi-
ciently and to prevent the filter from plugging with wax and/or ice crystals.
When the ambient air sensor is reading 68°F (20°C) or lower, the APX Control System will enable this circuit. The
circuit is disabled when the ambient air sensor reading rises to 77°F (25°C). Also, the heater is fitted with an inter-
nal temperature switch which will close on a temperature fall to energize the heater element at temperatures below
45°F (7.2°C), and open on a temperature rise to de-energize the heater element at 75°F (23.9°C).
2.7.6 Electric Fuel Pump

The optional electric fuel pump (Figure 8.8) is mounted at the fuel tank and assists the engine mounted mechani-
cal pump in transferring fuel from the fuel tank to the engine. The electric fuel pump is activated by the APX Control
System whenever the engine is operating.
2.7.7 Remote Panel

The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control panel. The remote panel, which is very similar to the main
control panel, displays compartment setpoint, compartment temperature and operating modes (heat, cool or
defrost).
The setpoint may be modified, and the unit may be started and stopped using the remote panel.
This compact remote panel can be mounted to suit the individual operator’s preferences - on the front bulkhead, or
in the compartment (including in the wall itself). Remote panel keys, soft keys, and alarm indicators are in the same
locations as the main APX Control System display module.
2–17 62-11637
2.8 Engine Data
Unit Specification
Engine Model V2203L-DI-EB4-CTD-2 (Base Part Number 26-00132)
Rated Power 24.7 hp (18.5 KW) @1800 rpm
Displacement 135 in3 (2.2 liters)
No. Cylinders 4
NOTE: Refer to Table 2–1 for engine speed settings
Weight 439 lbs (199 kg)
Coolant Capacity 2.4 U.S. gallons (9 liters) - 50/50 mix - never to exceed 60/40.
NOTICE
Use Texaco Havoline extended life coolant or any other extended life
coolant which is Dexcool approved and has 5/150 (5 years / 150,000
miles) on the label.
Thermostat Starts to open 177 to 182°F (81 to 83°C). Fully open at 203°F (95°C).
Fuel System
Fuel Winter: Diesel No. 1
Summer: Diesel No. 2 (Maximum 5% Bio-Diesel is also allowed)
Fuel Heater Temperature Close on a temperature fall @ 45°F (7.2°C)
Switch Open on a temperature rise @ 75°F (24°C)
Firing Order 1-3-4-2
Engine Preheater (EPH) 42 amps at 12 VDC, resistance approximately 0.3 Ohms
Lubrication System
Engine Oil Pressure 40 to 62 psig (2.8 To 4.2 Bar) - Engine in high speed
Engine Oil Pressure Safety Closes, on pressure rise, at 18 psig (1.22 Bar)
Switch (ENOPS) Opens, on pressure fall, at 12 psig (0.82 Bar)
Oil Capacity with Filter 15 quarts (14.2 liters)
Engine Oil Viscosity: API CG or If Outdoor Temp below 32°F (0°C), use 10W30 or Mobil Delvac 1 (5W 40)
better OR Mobil Delvac 1 If Outdoor Temp above 32°F (0°C), use 10W30 or Mobil Delvac 1 (5W 40) or 15W 40.
Engine Oil Change Intervals Refer to Section 8.2 for information on service intervals.
Battery 12 volt nominal - 90 amp hour capacity cold cranking amps = 425 DIN, 500 IEC,
725 BCI
2.9 Compressor Data
Unit Specification
Compressor Model 05G
Type Semi-hermetic reciprocating
Number of Cylinders 6
Number of Unloaders 2
Weight 137 lbs (62 kg)
Compressor Oil Capacity 5.5 pints (2.8 liters)
Approved Compressor Oil Mobil Arctic EAL 68
62-11637 2–18
2.10 Refrigeration System Data
Unit Specification
Defrost Air Switch (DAS) Initiates Defrost: 1.40 ±07 inch (35 ± 1.8 mm) WG
Defrost Timer 1.5h, 3h, 6h, or 12 hours
Fusible Plug Melting Point 430°F (221°C)
High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens, on pressure rise, at: 465 ± 10 psig (32 ± 0.7 bar)
Closes, on pressure fall, at: 350 ± 10 psig (24 ± 0.7 bar)
Unit Weight, Less Battery X4 7300 = 1685 lbs (764 kg), X4 7300R = 1690 lbs (767 kg)
X4 7500 = 1690 lbs (767 kg), X4 7500R = 1695 lbs (769 kg)
Battery 50 pounds (23 kg)
Fan Clutch Air Gap 0.011 to 0.085 inch (0.28 to 2.2 mm)
Refrigerant Charge Refer to Table 2–1
Gearbox Oil Mobil Delvac 75-90W: 15oz (0.44 liters)
Fanshaft Oil Mobil SHC 630: 2.8oz (0.08 liters)
2.11 Component Resistance and Current Draw

Component Ohms Amps
AutoFresh Air Exchange Relay (AFAR) 97 Ohms between pins 1 and 2
AutoFresh Air Exchange (AFAS) Pull in - 0.36 Ohms ± 10% Pull in - 29 Amps
Hold - 14.4 Ohms ± 10% Hold - 0.83 Amps
Clutch (CLH) 2.5 ± 0.2 Ohms 3.0 to 5.0 Amps
Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1) 7.8 ± 0.3 Ohms 0.7 to 2.0 Amps
Engine Preheater (EPH) 0.3 to 0.5 Ohms 38 - 46 Amps
Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) 22 mAmps Max
Fuel Heater (FH) - Standard 0.96 Ohms ± 10% 12.5 amps ± 10%
Fuel Heater (FH) - Suction Side 1.3 Ohms ± 10% 10.7 amps ± 10%
Fuel Heater Relay (FHR) and
90 Ohms between pins 85 and 86
Power Enable Relay (PER)
Fuel Pump (FP) 11.5 Ohms ± 10% 1.4 Amps @ 16 VDC
Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA) 2.8 Ohms ± 10% @68°F (20°C) 4 Amps Max
Liquid Line (SV2) and
10.6 ± 0.3 Ohms 0.75 to 2.0 Amps
Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid Valve
Starter Motor (SM) Less than 1 Ohm but more than 0 270 - 380 amps
Unloader Solenoid Valve (UL1 and UL2) 9.6 ± 0.8 Ohms 1.0 to 2.0 Amps
2.12 Safety Devices

The system is protected from high pressure conditions which may occur when exposed to very high temperatures
by a fusible plug mounted in the receiver. Under very high temperature conditions (refer to Section 2.10) the plug
will melt, releasing the refrigerant pressure.
System components are protected from damage caused by unsafe operating conditions by automatic shut-down of
the unit when such conditions occur. This is accomplished by the safety device listed in the following table and the
fuses shown in Figure 2.7.
Unsafe Conditions Safety Device Device Setting

Excessive operating pressure High Pressure Switch (HPS) Section 2.10
2–19 62-11637
2.13 Refrigeration Circuit - Cooling
When cooling, (See Figure 2.10) the unit operates as a vapor compression refrigeration system. The main compo-
nents of the system are:
• Reciprocating compressor
• Air-cooled condenser
• Evaporator expansion valve
• Direct expansion evaporator
1. The compressor raises the pressure and the 6. The liquid then flows to the evaporator expan-
temperature of the refrigerant and forces it sion valve which reduces the pressure of the liq-
through the discharge check valve into the con- uid and meters the flow of liquid refrigerant to
denser channels. The condenser fan circulates the evaporator to obtain maximum use of the
surrounding air over the outside of the channels. evaporator heat transfer surface.
The channels have fins designed to improve the
transfer of heat from the refrigerant gas to the 7. The refrigerant pressure drop caused by the
air. This removal of heat causes the refrigerant expansion valve is accompanied by a drop in
to condense. Liquid refrigerant leaves the con- temperature so the low pressure, low tempera-
denser and flows through the condenser pres- ture fluid that flows into the evaporator tubes is
sure control solenoid (SV1) to the receiver. colder than the air that is circulated over the
tubes by the evaporator fan. The evaporator
2. The receiver stores the additional charge neces- tubes have aluminum fins to increase heat
sary for low ambient operation. The receiver is transfer; therefore heat is removed from the air
equipped with a fusible plug which melts on circulated over the evaporator. This cold air is
occurrence of very high temperature to relieve circulated throughout the refrigerated compart-
the refrigerant pressure. ment to maintain the cargo at the desired tem-
perature.
3. The refrigerant leaves the receiver and flows
through the liquid line service valve to the sub- 8. The transfer of heat from the air to the low tem-
cooler. The subcooler occupies a portion of the perature liquid refrigerant causes the liquid to
main condensing coil surface and gives off fur- vaporize.
ther heat to the passing air.
9. This low temperature, low pressure vapor
4. The refrigerant then flows through a filter drier passes through the compressor suction modula-
where a screen and absorbent keep the refriger- tion valve (CSMV) and heat exchanger and then
ant clean and dry. r e t u r n s t o t h e c o m p r e s s o r. I n t h e h e a t
exchanger the refrigerant absorbs more heat
5. The refrigerant then flows through the liquid line from the high pressure/high temperature liquid.
solenoid valve (SV2) to the suction line heat
exchanger. In the heat exchanger the liquid is 10. The CSMV controls the compressor suction
further reduced in temperature by giving off pressure thereby matching the compressor
some of its heat to the suction gas. capacity to the load.
62-11637 2–20
Figure 2.10 Refrigeration Circuit - Cooling
Condensor
Fusible
Plug SV1, N/O Saturated Mixture
Bypass
Check Reciever
Valve
Subcooler
MM
Liquid Line
Service Valve Heat
Exchanger EVXV
EVOT EVOP
CSMV
Evaporator
Filter
Drier
SV4,
N/C
SV2, N/C
CSP CST Drain Pan Distributor
Vibrasorber Vibrasorber
High Pressure Vapor
Discharge
High Pressure Liquid
Check
Valve Saturated Mixture
Super Heated Vapor
Compressor
2–21 62-11637
2.14 Refrigerant Circuit - Heat and Defrost
When vapor refrigerant is compressed to a high pressure and temperature in a reciprocating compressor, the
mechanical energy necessary to operate the compressor is transferred to the gas as it is being compressed. This
energy is referred to as the “heat of compression” and is used as the source of heat during the heating cycle.
When the system calls for heating (see Figure 2.11):
• the normally closed hot gas solenoid valve (SV4) is energized (opened)
• the normally open condenser pressure control solenoid valve (SV1) is energized (closed)
• the normally closed liquid line solenoid valve (SV2) is de-energized (closed)
Flow of hot discharge gas from the compressor enters the evaporator.
The refrigerant is warmer than the air that is circulated over the tubes by the evaporator fan. The evaporator tubes
have aluminum fins to increase heat transfer; therefore heat is transferred to the air circulated over the evaporator.
This warm air is circulated throughout the refrigerated compartment to maintain the cargo at the desired tempera-
ture.
When additional heating capacity is required, the normally closed Liquid Line Solenoid valve (SV2) is energized
(opened) to allow additional refrigerant to be metered into the hot gas cycle (through the evaporator expansion
valve). Refrigerant will be forced from the receiver (even though SV1 is closed) by the hot gas bypass line which
functions to raise the receiver pressure above evaporator pressure.
If the discharge pressure rises to 350 psig (23.8 bar) when in defrost or 390 psig (26.5 bar) when in heating, SV1
will be de-energized momentarily to lower the discharge pressure.
62-11637 2–22
Figure 2.11 Refrigeration Circuit - Heat and Defrost
Condensor
Fusible
Plug SV1, N/O
Bypass
Check Reciever
Valve
Subcooler
MM
Liquid Line
Service Valve Heat
Exchanger EVXV
EVOT EVOP
CSMV
Evaporator
Filter
Drier
SV4,
N/C
SV2, N/C
CSP CST Drain Pan Distributor
Vibrasorber Vibrasorber
High Pressure Vapor
Discharge
High Pressure Liquid
Check
Valve Saturated Mixture
Super Heated Vapor
Additional Refrigerant Path
(When SV2 is opened)
Compressor
2–23 62-11637
62-11637 2–24
SECTION 3 - OPERATION
3.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3.2 DISPLAY SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.3 STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.4 INSPECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.5 INTELLISET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.6 PRE-TRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.7 CHANGING SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.8 START-STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.9 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.10 DATA RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.10.1 APX Control System Information ............................................ 3–14
3.10.2 Data Recording ......................................................... 3–14
3.10.3 Data Downloading ....................................................... 3–15
3.10.4 DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3.11 MANUAL DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.12 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.13 ADVANCED USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.14 UNIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.15 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.16 VIEW HOUR METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.17 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.18 SLEEP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28
3.19 STOPPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3.20 DATATRAK (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
3.21 EMERGENCY BYPASS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3.22 REMOTE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 3
Operation
3.1 Display
! WARNING
Figure 3.1 Display Module
5 6
34.3
4
3
34 9 7
BOX TEMPERATURE oF SETPOINT oF

STATUS OK
11 10 9
1. Display Screen 7. Arrow Keys

3. DEFROST key 9. START/RUN-OFF Switch
5. Alarm LED 11. USB Interface Port
6. Alarm Key
-----
3–1 62-11637
3.2 Display Screens
34.3
1
3
2
oF
34
BOX TEMPERATURE SETPOINT oF 4
STATUS OK
Default Screen
Viewing Menu Soft Key
Selections
5 Press Menu Key to Scroll
INTELLISET PRETRIP HOUR UNIT

METER DATA
6
Typical Menu Screen
SAMPLE SCREEN (1 OF 3)
DISPLAYED ITEM #1 10
7 DISPLAYED ITEM #2
DISPLAYED ITEM #3
8 END OF LIST
BACK EXIT
1. Status Bar
2. Box Temperature
3. Setpoint
4. Message Center
5. Operator Message Panel
6. Soft Key Descriptions
7. Highlight - White letters on black background
8. BACK key - Used to return to previous screen
9. EXIT key - Used to return to the default screen
10. The position of the highlighted item and total number of items in the list is displayed in the status bar. Up to
five items may be displayed at one time. Press the ▼ key to view additional items, or the ▲ key to scroll
back up the list. “END OF LIST” will be displayed after the last item in the list.
62-11637 3–2
3.3 Starting
! WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or any other starting aids be used to start the engine.
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
STATUS OK
34
SETPOINT oF
1. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position.
2. The system will display the Carrier Transicold logo, display the default screen, present language selection
and the hour meter readings (if configured to do so) along with a test flash of the alarm light and light bar
amber LED’s. The system will then perform a start sequence, energize the buzzer, and then start the unit
automatically.
3. If there is an alarm present, the alarm message will be displayed in the MessageCenter and the alarm LED
will flash for 5 seconds. If one or more shutdown alarms are present, the alarm(s) must be cleared before
the unit will start.
4. Observe the MessageCenter. If the word “ACTIVE” or “MODIFIED” is displayed at the right, the unit is
equipped with IntelliSet settings, refer to Section 3.5.
5. If the display does not illuminate:

• Check the battery voltage. A booster battery may be needed.
• Check for blown fuse(s).
• Verify the harness connector at the back of the display module and all other module connectors are
securely attached.
3–3 62-11637
3.4 Inspect Mode
• Inspect mode provides an additional layer of safety for operators and technicians. Inspect mode should
be used during all pre-trip inspections of the unit.
• Inspect mode is a user activated feature that forces the unit to shutdown and remain in shutdown regard-
less of operating state.
• After unit inspection, Inspect mode must be manually disabled, at which point the unit will resume stan-
dard operation.
• Inspect mode is not a substitute for proper Lockout/Tagout procedures, which are always required when
servicing the unit.
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE
INSPECT
oF
34
SETPOINT oF
EXIT
MODE
3.4.1 Enter Inspect Mode
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) press the MENU key
until INSPECT MODE is displayed.
2. Press the INSPECT MODE soft key, the unit will shut down.
While the unit is in Inspect mode the ALARM light will flash, and the display will indicate that unit operation,
including temperature control, has been disabled.
NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL
OPERATIONS DISABLED
Press EXIT to return to normal

operation
EXIT
3.4.2 Exit Inspect Mode

While the unit is in Inspect mode, the EXIT soft key will be available, all other keys and functions will be locked out.
Press the EXIT soft key to disable Inspect mode, the unit will resume standard operation.
62-11637 3–4
3.5 IntelliSet
Products carried or stored in a refrigerated compartment require a multitude of refrigeration unit settings that must
be checked and if required, reset each time a new product is loaded. The APX Control System offers the settings
necessary to meet these requirements. IntelliSet is a feature that allows pre-selection and naming of the necessary
settings for over 40 different products. The operator may then call up the settings by simply selecting the assigned
IntelliSet name.
For example: A load of apples may require setting the APX Control System for continuous operation at 35°F
(1.7°C) with a defrost every three hours, while a load of cheese may require the same operation with setpoints
ranging from 35°F to 42°F (1.7°C to 5.6°C) and a load of ice cream requires Start-Stop operation at -22°F (-30°C)
with defrost at 12 hour intervals. The settings required for each product may be entered into the APX Control
System and then locked so they cannot be changed. In the case of the load of cheese, the range of setpoints may
be locked, leaving the operator the ability to change the setpoint within the locked range.
When a load of apples is going to be picked up, the operator simply selects “APPLES” from the IntelliSet menu; for
cheese, “CHEESE” is selected; for ice cream, “ICE CREAM” is selected. With each selection, the APX Control
System automatically re-programs the settings to provide the best temperature control, fuel economy, and
performance for that particular product.
NOTES
• The above settings are examples of possible settings. Factory IntelliSets are available from your authorized
Carrier Transicold Truck/Trailer dealer.
• An IntelliSet may be pre-programmed as “IntelliSleep” which allows Sleep mode to be entered by simply
changing to that IntelliSet.
• Range Protect may be applied to as many IntelliSets as desired. Range Protect is designed to prevent
freezing or overheating of non-sensitive cargo by locking the unit in Start-Stop Operation when the
compartment temperature is in the preset range (default range is 35 to 70°F, 1.6 to 21.1°C). Range Protect
offers increased fuel savings over normal Start-Stop Operation.

Selections 1
Press Menu Key to Scroll

METER DATA
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC mode and the
default screen displayed, press the “=” key. If the screen shown just above step 3 below is displayed, pro-
ceed to step 3. Otherwise, proceed to step 2.
2. Press the MENU key until INTELLISET is displayed. Then, press the INTELLISET soft key to display the
IntelliSet screen.
3. The IntelliSet screen will display with a 10-second timeout and five of the available IntelliSets listed. The
IntelliSet that is currently selected will have the word “Active” or “Modified” to the right. There may be more
than five IntelliSets available, as displayed in parenthesis on the first line. For example, in the provided illus-
tration there are seven IntelliSets available and the second IntelliSet is highlighted.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of available IntelliSets. To change to another IntelliSet, high-
light the desired IntelliSet and press the “=” key. The highlighted IntelliSet will become active and an “INTEL-
LISET CHANGED” message will display.
3–5 62-11637
5. Press the EXIT soft key to return to the default display.
4
INTELLISETS (2 OF 7)
INTELLISET OFF
BANANA ACTIVE
FLOWERS
LETTUCE
CHEESE 4
BACK EXIT
NOTES
• If setpoint change is allowed, refer to Section 3.7 for setpoint change instruction.
• If it is desirable to have this machine go directly to the IntelliSet screen on a press of the “=” key, set the
“ENABLE INTELLISET AT = KEY” Configuration to “YES”. Refer to Section 5.2.3.
62-11637 3–6
3.6 Pre-Trip
Pre-Trip is a set of tests run by the APX Control System to check unit operation. It is recommended that a Pre-Trip
is run prior to loading the refrigerated compartment. It will indicate a failure if one is detected.
TIP
A Pre-Trip can be started at any box temperature. If Pre-Trip is started while the unit is in a Start-Stop
off cycle the unit will start during the course of the test. If the unit is running when Pre-Trip is started, it
will shutdown for the first three tests.
TIP
If “CAN NOT START PRE-TRIP” is displayed in the MessageCenter, check to see if the unit is in PC
mode (Refer to Section 5.3.2) or Defrost mode, or check the alarm list (Section 3.15) for active shut-
down alarms.
NOTE
Pre-Trip will run until completed, unless an alarm occurs that causes Pre-Trip to be aborted. Only
alarms that will result in other erroneous alarms or will affect future Pre-Trip tests will abort Pre-Trip.
Once Pre-Trip is started: If the unit is running, the APX Control System will shut the unit down for the initial tests,
then start it again as it proceeds through the tests.
NOTE
Before completing Pre-Trip, the APX Control System looks at the status of alarms and if certain alarms
are active (for example: Low Fuel Warning, Check Engine Oil Level, Check Coolant Temperature),
Pre-Trip will display “FAILED”, indicating that the unit is not ready to be sent out for a load, but that the
alarm list should be checked and all present alarm situations corrected.

Selections
1
METER DATA
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position), press the MENU key
until PRETRIP is displayed.
2. Press the PRETRIP soft key to display the Pre-Trip Menu screen.
3. The Pre-Trip Menu screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the
available selections. With the desired selection highlighted, press the “=” key.
3 PRETRIP MENU PRETRIP STATUS

START PRETRIP PRETRIP TYPE: COOL - AMBIENT 75oF
VIEW RESULTS OF LAST PRETRIP TEST 2 OF 10 - CURRENT TEST
SV1
CURRENT DRAW - 2 AMPS
23%
BACK EXIT UNIT TEST STOP
DATA RESULTS PRETRIP
3–7 62-11637
4. If “Start Pre-Trip” is selected, Pre-Trip will begin and the Pre-Trip Status screen will be displayed. Immediately
following Pre-Trip OR if “View Results of Last Pre-Trip” is selected the Pre-Trip Summary Screen will be dis-
played.
NOTE
At any time during Pre-Trip, the UNIT DATA soft key may be pressed to allow the user to view the Unit
Data screen (refer to Section 3.14). To return to Pre-Trip from the Unit Data screen, press the BACK soft
key.
NOTE
During Pre-Trip the ALARM light will illuminate to indicate there is no temperature control.
5. During Pre-Trip Test 1, verify that the buzzer is energized, the amber light on the light bar is illuminated (if
equipped) and the AutoFresh air port opens and closes (if equipped).
6. The remainder of the Pre-Trip tests will run automatically and take 7 to 15 minutes. The percent of Pre-Trip
that has been completed is displayed in the status bar under the test description information.
7. “PRETRIP PASS”, “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST ##” or “PRETRIP FAILED AND COMPLETE” will be displayed
at the end of the testing. The “PASS” message will display until a key is pressed. The Pretrip test “FAIL”
results message will display until the alarms are cleared.
TIP
To end Pretrip at any time, press the STOP PRETRIP soft key.
PRETRIP SUMMARY
PRETRIP TYPE: COOL - AMBIENT 75oF
START TIME - (DATE) (TIME)
END TIME - (DATE) (TIME)
PRETRIP COMPLETE (OR FAIL NOTICE)
VIEW TEST BACK EXIT 9

ALARMS RESULTS
8. Press the VIEW ALARMS key to move to the Alarm Screen (refer to Section 3.15) and review any alarms
activated during the test.
9. The TEST RESULTS soft key may be pressed at any time during Pre-Trip to view results of any test that has
been completed. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the results.
PRETRIP TEST RESULTS (1 OF 16)

TEST 1: DISPLAY PASSED
TEST 2: ELECTRICAL CURRENT PASSED
TEST 3: SENSORS FAILED
TEST 4: SPEED PASSED
BACK EXIT
Test 1 - Display Test - The APX Control System activates the buzzer. Also, the amber light on the light bar is illu-
minated (if equipped) and the AutoFresh air port opens and closes (if equipped). This test will last 5 seconds. This
portion of the Pre-Trip requires that the operator determines PASS or FAIL. Anything that fails during this test
should be repaired at the conclusion of the Pre-Trip cycle. Pre-Trip will continue regardless of the outcome of this
test.
Test 2 - 12VDC Electrical Component Amperage Check - Test 2 will check the amperage (current) draw of the
following components:
• Battery Amp Draw (All Components Turned Off). • Clutch (CLH)
• AutoFresh Air Exchange Relay (AFAR) if equipped • Front Unloader Solenoid (UL1)
62-11637 3–8
• Rear Unloader Solenoid (UL2) • SV4
• SV1 • Preheat Circuit (EPH)
• SV2 • Fuel/speed actuator (FSA)
Each component will be individually checked for proper current draw. An alarm will be activated for any component
not drawing amperage in the expected range. If equipped the AutoFresh air port opens and closes in Test #2.
Test 3 - Temperature Sensor Check - Check the condition of all of the system temperature sensors. Test 3 will
last approximately 5 seconds. If a problem is detected with any of the sensors, the corresponding alarm will be acti-
vated.
Test 4 - Warm Up - The engine is started automatically and the ambient air sensor is read.
If the ambient temperature is above +32°F (0°C), the unit will operate in the “Cool Pre-Trip” mode. If the ambient
temperature is at or below +32°F (0°C), the unit will operate in the “Heat Pre-Trip” mode.
In the Cool Pre-Trip mode, the unit will operate in two cylinder Low Speed Cool. The compressor suction and dis-
charge pressures will be tested. Appropriate alarms will be displayed if any problem is detected. Test 4 in Cool Pre-
Trip will last approximately 60 seconds.
In the Heat Pre-Trip mode, the unit will operate in four cylinder Low Speed Heat. The APX Control System will
check for a rise in compressor discharge pressure, fan clutch operation and SV1 operation. Appropriate alarms will
be displayed if a problem is detected. Test 4 in Heat Pre-Trip may last up to 12 minutes depending on ambient,
compartment temperature and unit condition. During periods when discharge pressure is being read, SV2 may
pulse.
Test 5 - UL2 (Rear) Unloader - With the unit still running the same as it was in Test 4, the operation of unloader
UL2 is tested. If suction and discharge pressures do not change as expected when UL2 is energized and de-ener-
gized, alarm P00191 CHECK UL2 will be displayed. Test 5 will last about 20 seconds.
Test 6 - UL1 (Front) Unloader - With the unit still running the same as it was in Test 5, the operation of UL1 is
tested. If suction and discharge pressures do not change as expected when UL1 is energized and de-energized,
alarm P00178 CHECK UL1 will be displayed. Test 6 will last about 20 seconds.
Test 7 - Engine Low Speed - The APX Control System verifies that engine is in the low speed range. If the engine
is not operating in the low speed range, alarm P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM will be activated.
Test 8 - Engine High Speed - The engine switches to high speed. The APX Control System verifies that engine is
in the high speed range. If the engine is not operating in the high speed range, alarm P00175 CHECK HIGH
SPEED RPM will be activated.
Test 9 - Engine Low Speed 2 - The engine switches back to low speed. The APX Control System verifies that
engine returns to the low speed range within 10 seconds. If not, alarm P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM will be
activated.
Test 10 - Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) - This test is run to ensure that the CSMV is opening and closing
properly. If suction pressure doesn’t change as expected with CSMV closed, then alarm P00180 CHECK SUC-
TION MOD VALVE will be displayed.
Test 11 - EVXV - This test is an operational check of the EVXV. If evaporator outlet pressure doesn’t change as
expected with the EVXV closed then alarm P00177 CHECK EXV (EVXV) SUPERHEAT will be displayed.
Test 12 - SV1 - The test continues with the unit running in two cylinder low speed cool, SV1 is energized and de-
energized. If the valve does not operate correctly, alarm P00182 CHECK SV1 VALVE will be displayed. This test
may last up to three minutes.
Test 13 - Check SV4
NOTE
If ambient temperature is above 100°F (37.8°C) this test will not be performed.
With the unit running in two cylinder, low speed heat, SV4 will be energized and de-energized. If the valve does not
operate correctly, alarm P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE will be displayed. This test may last up to eight minutes.
Test 14 - Low Side Pump Down - With the unit running in two cylinder low speed, SV2 and SV4 will be closed to
pump the low side of the unit down. If the system cannot obtain the required suction pressure, alarm P00165 CAN-
NOT PUMP DOWN will be displayed.
3–9 62-11637
Test 15 - Pressure Hold Check - The unit will shutdown, and check for pressure equalization between the high
and low sides. If any leakage is detected, alarm P00202 HIGH SIDE LEAK will be displayed. This test will last one
minute.
Test 16 - Discharge Check Valve - With the unit off, the discharge check valve is checked for leakage. If any leak-
age is detected, alarm P00203 CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE will be displayed. This test will last 40 seconds.
Test 17 - Check for Other Alarms - The alarm list is checked for any non-pre-trip alarms that may have occurred
during the Pre-Trip test. If any operational alarms occurred, Pre-Trip will show FAIL, and the technician will need to
review the alarm list and take necessary and appropriate action to clear them. This test will last about five seconds.
Pre-Trip Termination - When the Pre-Trip cycle is completed, the unit will return to normal temperature control
operation. “PRETRIP PASS” will be displayed until the operator presses the EXIT key. In the event that the Pre-Trip
test activates an alarm(s), either “PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETE” (if the entire Pre-Trip cycle was completed), or
“PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX”, (if the Pre-Trip cycle was aborted by an alarm before it was completed) will be dis-
played.
62-11637 3–10
3.7 Changing Setpoint
2
34 .3 34
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
STATUS OK
SETPOINT oF
1
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC mode and the
default screen displayed (press the Back soft key if required).
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to bring the displayed setpoint to the desired value.
TIP
The setpoint will change one degree with each press and release of an arrow key or the setpoint will
scroll if the key is pressed and held.
3. Press the “=” key to save the new setpoint. The MessageCenter will display “SETPOINT CHANGED” for 5
seconds.
4. If the “=” key is not pressed the setpoint screen will flash, the MessageCenter will display “SETPOINT NOT
CHANGED” and then return to original setpoint.
By default, setpoints of -22°F to +90°F (-30°C to +32°C) may be entered using the display mounted keys. The APX
Control System always retains the last entered setpoint in memory. The setpoint will change 1° (one full degree)
OR 0.1° (one tenth of a degree - if configured to do so) for each press and release of the ▲ or ▼ key.
NOTE
The APX Control System may be configured with a minimum and/or maximum setpoint other than the
default values listed above. “MAX SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED” or “MIN SETPOINT HAS BEEN
REACHED” will display in the MessageCenter when either of these conditions is reached.
Setpoint may be changed any time the START/RUN - OFF switch is in the START/RUN position, or when the unit
is in PC mode EXCEPT when:
• Viewing the Alarm List, Data List or Functional Parameters OR
• When the unit is in Pre-Trip OR
• When the unit is in Sleep mode.
Pressing the = key will cause the new displayed setpoint value to become active and “SETPOINT CHANGED” will
be displayed. If the new value is not entered, after 5 seconds of no display mounted key activity, the entire display
and Light Bar will flash and the buzzer will be energized for 15 seconds (with “SETPOINT NOT CHANGED” dis-
played) and then revert back to the last entered setpoint. All other keys are active at this time and if pressed while
the display is flashing, will stop the flashing, and perform the requested function.
TIP
The setpoint may be changed quickly by pressing and holding the ▲ or ▼ key until the desired set-
point is reached. The longer the key is held, the faster the setting will change.
3–11 62-11637
3.8 Start-Stop Operation
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
34
SETPOINT oF
START/STOP MODE SELECTED
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC mode press
the START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key until “START/STOP” is highlighted.
2. The message “START/STOP MODE SELECTED” will be displayed in the MessageCenter for 10 seconds.
3. The operation indication in the status bar will no longer be highlighted. The unit is now in Start-Stop Operation.
Start-Stop is provided to reduce fuel consumption. This feature allows full automatic control of the engine by moni-
toring refrigerated compartment temperature, battery charging amps and engine coolant temperature. The main
function of Start-Stop Operation is to turn off the engine near setpoint to provide an efficient temperature control
system and to initiate a restart sequence after certain conditions are met.
The APX Control System may be configured with Start-Stop operation tied to setpoint ranges for either frozen or
perishable loads. The Start-Stop/Continuous key is locked out if “START-STOP LOCKED” displays in the Mes-
sageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Start-Stop Operation or “CONTINUOUS LOCKED” displays
in the MessageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Continuous Run Operation. Refer to Section
5.2.3 for Configuration information.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts alarm 00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE will be activated.
While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit shutdown
three consecutive times without running a minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns alarm 00030 FAILED TO
RUN MINIMUM TIME will be activated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the unit has run for 15 minutes.
Refer to Section 4.6 for more detailed information on Start-Stop Operation.
62-11637 3–12
3.9 Continuous Operation
CONTINUOUS DIESEL COOL
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
34
SETPOINT oF
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED
the START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key until “CONTINUOUS” is displayed & highlighted.
2. The message “CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED” will be displayed in the MessageCenter for 10 sec-
onds.
3. The operation indication in the status bar will no longer be highlighted. The unit is now in Continuous Oper-
ation.
In Continuous Operation, the unit will not shutdown except in response to a shutdown alarm. Refer to Section 4.7
for more detailed information on Continuous Operation.
The APX Control System may be configured with continuous operation tied to setpoint ranges for either frozen or per-
ishable loads. The START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key is locked out if “CONTINUOUS LOCKED” displays in the Mes-
sageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Continuous Operation or “START-STOP LOCKED” displays in
the MessageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Start-Stop Operation. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for more
information on Configurations.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts alarm 00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE will be activated.
While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit shutdown
three consecutive times without running a minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns alarm 00030 FAILED TO
RUN MINIMUM TIME will be activated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the unit has run for 15 minutes.
3–13 62-11637
3.10 Data Recorder
The APX Control System contains a built-in DataLink data recorder with 3 megabytes of memory. The recorded
data can be downloaded from the DataLink data recorder using a Data Transfer USB memory device.
The DataLink data recorder reads the same input information as the APX Control System (Functional Parameters,
Configurations, and Unit Data) at all times. The DataLink data recorder records events as they occur, such as set-
point changes and defrost initiation and termination, and also records all data values including temperature sen-
sors and pressure transducers in either averaged or snapshot format at selected intervals
The following intervals are available for sensor recording:
• 2 Minutes • 30 Minutes
• 5 Minutes • 1 Hour
• 10 Minutes • 2 Hours
• 15 Minutes • 4 Hours
3.10.1 APX Control System Information
The APX Control System information that may be recorded is as follows:
• DataLink data recorder time clock date / time • Controller (main microprocessor) Serial Number
• Setpoint • Controller (main microprocessor) Software
• DataLink data recorder settings Revision
(Logging Intervals, Events and Sensors) • Pre-Trip Start/End
• Trailer (asset or car) ID • Functional Parameters
• Unit Serial Number • System Configurations
• Unit Model Number • Current System Operating Mode
3.10.2 Data Recording
The DataLink data recorder data comes from four general categories of information:
1. APX Control System Information as described in the preceding Section 3.10.1.
2. Sensor Data
This information is recorded at pre-determined intervals as a snapshot of the sensor at the time of the recording, or
an average of the sensor readings since the last recording based on 1 minute increments. The user can determine
which sensor(s) will be recorded, whether snapshot or averaged readings are preferred and at what time intervals.
(Snapshot readings are also taken at the beginning and end of defrost and at the time of a shutdown alarm.)
All of the sensors and transducers that may be read under Unit Data (refer to Table 3–1) may be included or
excluded from the recordings.
3. Event Occurrences
This information is any additional data that is recorded on a “when it occurs” basis. Events are recorded by the
recorder as they occur. An Event is defined as something that happens and may include:
• Setpoint change • Control mode
• Defrost cycle start/Defrost cycle end • Door and remote switch activations.
• START/RUN - OFF switch on (START/RUN • Hour meter readings - Hour meters are recorded
position) at midnight or the first time of day the START/
• Pre-Trip start RUN- OFF switch is toggled from the OFF posi-
tion. There will be no hour meter readings when
• Pre-Trip end the switch is in the OFF position.
• Unit mode
4. User Area Data

The User or Service Technician may enter a comment into the DataLink data recorder using the TRU-Tech pro-
gram.
62-11637 3–14
3.10.3 Data Downloading
The data within the DataLink data recorder can be downloaded using a Data Transfer USB memory device (refer to
Section 5.3.1).
3.10.4 DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up

The DataLink data recorder records data the entire time the START/RUN - OFF switch is in the START/RUN posi-
tion. A Configuration exists which allows the user to select whether an additional 8 hours of sensor data be
recorded after the switch is placed in the OFF position, or to stop recording at the same time the switch is placed in
the OFF position. The unit is factory set to record the additional 8 hour so the temperatures will be recorded during
the unloading, fueling or other times when it may be necessary to turn the unit off. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.)

Selections
LANGUAGE DATA EXIT

1 RECORDER
the MENU key until DATA RECORDER is displayed.
2. Press the DATA RECORDER soft key to display the sub menus.
DATA RECORDER
MARK TRIP START
PRINT TO SCREEN
PRINT TO PRINTER
SCREEN SETUP
PRINTER SETUP
BACK EXIT
3. The Data Recorder screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the
available sub menus. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, press the “=” key to enter the menu.
3–15 62-11637
Mark Trip Start
Trip Start places the present time and date as a stamp in the data recorder memory to allow easy review
of the data from the last trip, and to allow downloading data from a specific trip. A trip begins at a Trip
Start and ends at the next Trip Start. To enter a Trip Start: with MARK TRIP START highlighted, press
the “=” key. If trip start is acknowledged by the data recorder, “TRIP START ENTERED” will be displayed
for 5 seconds and then the display will revert back to the normal display. In the unlikely situation that the
data recorder is not functioning properly “CANNOT ENTER TRIP START” will flash and then the display
will revert back to the Data Recorder menu.
Print to Screen
PRINT TO SCREEN displays a graphical representation of the recorded data. To display the data: with
PRINT TO SCREEN highlighted, press the “=” key. NOTE: If configured to do so, the system will prompt
for entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1)
SETPOINT
75
Collecting Data, Please Wait 60
RAT
UP KEY = NEXT DAY 45 SP

DOWN KEY = PREVIOUS DAY 30
EQUAL KEY = EVENT TOGGLE
SAT
15
EXIT EXIT
Time & Date
Once the graphical display is presented, press the ▲ or ▼ keys to move through the recorded data, day by
day. The data is presented with the left horizontal axis as 00:00 (midnight) with 24 dividing lines represent-
ing the hours of the day.
Press the “=” key to toggle the event codes on or off. When viewing events with the event codes ON, the
following acronyms will be displayed:
c = Door close o = Door open

d = Defrost start p = Power up
e = Defrost end r = Real time clock range
f = Power down t = Trip Start
62-11637 3–16
3.11 Manual Defrost
START/STOP DIESEL DEFROST
1 DEFROST 34
SETPOINT oF
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) press the MANUAL
DEFROST key.
NOTE
This procedure may be demonstrated in PC mode but the unit will not actually enter defrost.
2. If the conditions for defrost are met, the status bar and the Box Temperature display will change to the word
“DEFROST”. The MessageCenter will display “DEFROST CYCLE STARTED” for 10 seconds. At the com-
pletion of any defrost cycle, the MessageCenter will return to the default display.
3. If the conditions for defrost are not met, the MessageCenter will display “CANNOT START DEFROST
CYCLE” for 5 seconds. This message will be activated when:
• The box temperature is too warm. Defrost may be entered when the defrost termination temperature sen-
sor (DTT) is below 40°F (4.4°C) or the supply air temperature sensor (SAT) is below 45°F (7.2°C) OR
• The engine has not run at least 15 seconds after starting OR
• The unit is in PC mode OR
• The unit is in Pre-Trip OR
• There is an active shutdown Alarm.
Defrost may also be initiated automatically at preset intervals by the system defrost timer or by the defrost air
switch.
Defrost mode terminates when both the DTT and SAT rise higher than 55°F (12.8°C). Should the defrost cycle not
end after a maximum of 45 minutes the defrost cycle will be terminated automatically and alarm 00054 DEFROST
NOT COMPLETE will be activated.
If the alarm is activated, the system will wait 1.5 hours of unit running time before attempting an automatic defrost
cycle. Pressing the manual defrost key will override this mode and start a defrost cycle.
TIP
The Manual Defrost key can be used at any time to start a Defrost Cycle as long as the preceding con-
ditions are met.
NOTE
Refer to Section 4.9 for more detailed information on DEFROST.
3–17 62-11637
3.12 Language Selection

Selections
LANGUAGE DATA EXIT

1 RECORDER
NOTE
Language Selection may not be available on early software revisions.
the MENU key until LANGUAGE is displayed.
2. Press the LANGUAGE soft key to display the language screen.
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH ENGLISH
ESPANO SPANISH
BACK EXIT
3. The language screen will display with a 10 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the avail-
able selections.
4. With the desired language highlighted, press the “=” key. The highlighted language will become active and
“LANGUAGE CHANGED” will be displayed.
62-11637 3–18
3.13 Advanced User
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
STATUS OK
34
SETPOINT oF
2
NOTES:
• As shipped from the factory, the system will operate in Driver mode. In Driver mode, some data and
menu items covered in this publication will not be available.
• The system may be configured to operate in Advanced User mode. If configured to operate in Advanced
User mode, that additional data and those menu items will be available at all times.
If the System is not configured to operate in Advanced User mode, the mode may be entered as follows:
and then release the two outside soft keys simultaneously. (NOTE: The system will not respond.)
2. Then, press the “=” key within 5 seconds. The operator message panel will display the acknowledgment
message.
34.3Advanced User Mode

Enabled
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
STATUS OK
34
SETPOINT oF
3. The Advanced User menus will be available for 60 minutes or until the START/RUN-OFF switch is placed in
the OFF position.
4. The system can be toggled between Driver mode and Advanced User mode by pressing and then releasing
the two outside soft keys simultaneously, and then pressing the “=” key.
When toggling from Advanced User mode to Driver mode, “DRIVERS MODE ENABLED” will display for
5 seconds.
When toggling from Driver mode to Advanced User mode, “ADVANCE USER MODE ENABLED” will
display for 5 seconds.
3–19 62-11637
3.14 Unit Data

Selections
1
METER DATA 2
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC mode, press
the MENU key until the UNIT DATA soft key is displayed.
2. Press the UNIT DATA soft key to open the UNIT DATA screen.
UNIT DATA ENGINE

REFRIGERATION SENSORS
UNIT DATA LISTING REMOTE SENSORS
END OF LIST REFRIGERATION SYSTEM MENU
SYSTEM INFORMATION*
INSTALLED OPTIONS*
BACK EXIT
3. The Unit Data screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the avail-
able unit data sub menus. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, press the “=” key to view the data.
4. The selected sub-menu data will display; for example, the REFRIGERATION SENSORS sub-menu may
include:
REFRIGERATION SENSORS (1 OF 5)
AMBIENT AIR TEMP: 75.0oF
RETURN AIR TEMP: 38.0oF
SUPPLY AIR TEMP: 37.0oF
DELTA T: -1.0oF
DEFROST TERM TEMP: 39.0oF
LOCK BACK EXIT
SCREEN
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the sub-menu data list.

6. To lock the current display press the LOCK SCREEN soft key. The screen will highlight (white lettering on a
black background) to indicate it is locked and the soft key will change to UNLOCK SCREEN.
7. Press the UNLOCK SCREEN soft key to unlock the screen or press the ▲ or ▼ key to unlock the screen
and scroll through the sub-menu data selections. Press the BACK key to return to the sub-menu selection
screen or the EXIT key to return to the default screen.
UNIT DATA LIST
ENGINE INSTALLED OPTIONS* SYSTEM INFORMATION*
Fuel Level Datatrack* Date*
Battery: O.K. Datatrack Advanced* Time*
Amp Draw (DC) Intelliset* Trailer/Asset/Car ID*
Engine Coolant Temperature Unit Serial #*
Engine Speed REFRFRIGERATION SYSTEM Unit Model #*
Engine Fuel Load Discharge Pressure* Micro Software Revision*
Compressor Discharge Temp* Display Software Revision*
REFRIGERATION SENSORS Suction Pressure Remote Display Rev*
Ambient Air Temp Suction Line Temp* Main Micro Serial #*
Return Air Temp Evaporator Pressure*
Supply Air Temp Evaporator Outlet Temperature* REMOTE SENSORS (Optional)
Delta-t Suction Mod Valve* Remote Sensor 1
Defrost Term Temp Expansion Valve* Remote Sensor 2
Remote Sensor 3
* Data marked with an asterisk will display in the Advanced User Mode only.
62-11637 3–20
Table 3–1 Unit Data
Data Definition
Engine
This is only displayed when the optional sensor is installed and config-
FUEL LEVEL
ured YES. Displays % of fuel in tank.
BATTERY Battery voltage
AMP DRAW Battery charging or discharging amps
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP Engine coolant temperature
ENGINE SPEED Engine revolutions per minute
ENGINE LOAD Engine Rack (Throttle) Position (% open)
Refrigeration Sensors
AMBIENT AIR TEMP Ambient (air entering condenser) temperature
RETURN AIR TEMP Return (air entering evaporator) temperature
SUPPLY AIR TEMP Supply (air leaving evaporator) temperature
Supply air temperature minus return air temperature (A negative value
DELTA-T
indicates cooling and a positive value indicates heating.)
DEFROST TERM TEMP Defrost termination temperature
Remote Sensors
This is the temperature at remote Temperature Sensor 1 or 2. (These
REMOTE SENSOR (1-2-3)
sensors are optional, and may not be applicable to this unit.)
Refrigeration System
DISCHARGE PRESSURE Refrigerant pressure leaving the compressor
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMP Refrigerant temperature leaving the compressor
SUCTION PRESSURE Refrigerant pressure entering the compressor
SUCTION LINE TEMP Refrigerant temperature entering the compressor
EVAPORATOR PRESSURE Refrigerant pressure leaving the evaporator
EVAPORATOR OUTLET TEMP Refrigerant temperature leaving the evaporator
SUCTION MOD VALVE % open of CSMV
EXPANSION VALVE % open of EVXV
System Information
DATE This is the current Date and Time that the system is using. This may be
different than your actual time, depending on the time zone and day-
light-saving time selections made by the owner of the unit.
TIME NOTE: The system uses a 24-hour clock. Hours 00 to 11 are AM and
hours 12 to 23 are PM.
TRAILER ID # Trailer ID (as entered by the user)
UNIT SERIAL # Unit serial number
UNIT MODEL # Unit model number (model number entered in Configuration)
MICRO SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of software that is operating the main microprocessor module
DISPLAY SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of software that is operating the display module
REMOTE SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of software that is operating the Remote Display (if installed)
MAIN MICROPROCESSOR SERIAL # Serial Number of the main microprocessor module
Installed Options (Will display if one or more options are installed)
INTELLISET If displayed, the IntelliSet option is installed.
DATATRAK If displayed, the DataTrak option is installed.
3–21 62-11637
3.15 View Active Alarms
2 ACTIVE ALARMS (2 OF 5)
A00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
A00022 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
A00028 CHECK REFRIG SYSTEM
3
CLEAR BACK
ALARMS
the ALARM key.
2. If there are active alarms, the alarm number will be displayed preceded by the letter “A” (Active alarm).
• If the alarm list is viewed in Driver mode, alarm descriptions will only display when the ALARM
DESCRIPTIONS Functional Parameter is set to YES. (Table 3–2)
• When viewing the alarm list in Advanced User mode or Technician mode the alarm description will
display, following the alarm number.
• Next to the ACTIVE ALARMS screen name in the status bar, information on the total number of alarms
and the position in the list of the highlighted alarm is provided. (In the preceding illustration there are 5
alarms and the second alarm is highlighted.)
• The last alarm that occurred will be the first alarm displayed and so on.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of alarms.
4. To clear the alarms, press the CLEAR ALARMS soft key. The display will provide an “ACTIVE ALARMS
CLEARED” message to confirm the alarms have cleared.
5. If there are no active alarms, the display will provide a “NO ACTIVE ALARMS” message and then return to
the default display after 5 seconds.
-----
Alarms are stored in the Alarm List in the main microprocessor. Stored alarms may be viewed in the MessageCenter.
For a complete list of alarms, alarm descriptions, and troubleshooting recommendations refer to Section 7.3.
TIP
Another way to clear active alarms is to turn the APX Control System OFF and then back on using the
START/RUN - OFF switch
TIP
The inactive alarm list may only be viewed while in Technician mode, refer to Section 5.2.2. Only
qualified refrigeration technicians should access the inactive alarm list. It is not intended for the use of
Drivers or Advanced Users.
62-11637 3–22
3.16 View Hour Meters

Selections
1
METER DATA 2
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC mode, press
the MENU key until the HOUR METER soft key is displayed.
2. Press the HOUR METER soft key to open the hour meters screen.
3. The hour meter screen will display with a 15 second timeout.
STANDARD HOUR METERS (3 OF 4)

ENGINE HOURS 1050 HOURS
SWITCH ON HOURS 1400 HOURS
STANDBY HOURS 438 HOURS
TOTAL RUN HOURS 1488 HOURS
END OF LIST
LOCK BACK EXIT
SCREEN
3–23 62-11637
3.17 Functional Parameters

Selections
1
LANGUAGE DATA FUNCTIONS EXIT
RECORDER 2
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC mode, and in
Advanced User mode, press the MENU key until the FUNCTIONS soft key is displayed.
2. Press the FUNCTIONS soft key to display the sub-menus as in Sample Screen A. Press the ▼ key until the
desired sub-menu is highlighted, as in Sample Screen B. Then press the “=” key to display the settings. The
highlight will move to the current setting, as in Sample Screen C.
FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS (1 OF 5) FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS (1 OF 3) FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS (1 OF 3)

ECONOMY SETTINGS FUNCTION 1 SELECTION FUNCTION 1 SELECTION
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS FUNCTION 2 SELECTION FUNCTION 2 SELECTION
START STOP SETTINGS FUNCTION 3 SELECTION FUNCTION 3 SELECTION
OVERRIDE SETTINGS
VIEWING PREFERENCES
END OF LIST END OF LIST END OF LIST
BACK EXIT BACK EXIT BACK EXIT
Sample Screen A Sample Screen B Sample Screen C

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the selections until the desired setting is highlighted. Press the “=”
key to save the setting to memory.
4. Continue as above to set additional Functions as required. Refer to Table 3–2 for additional information on
Functional Parameters.
Table 3–2 Functional Parameters
Function Parameter Description
Selections
NOTES:
• Selections in BOLD are the default settings.
• Any Function displayed with an asterisk (*) has been locked using the TRU-Tech program and cannot
be changed using the display mounted keys.
Economy Settings
FUEL SAVER (ECO) NO NO = When in Continuous Operation, control for maximum
MODE YES temperature protection.
YES = When in Continuous Operation, control for maximum
fuel economy.
LOW SPEED 0 MINS TO 255MINS (in Select the length of time the unit is to remain in low speed af-
DELAY S/S 1 minute increments) ter starting, before transitioning to high speed, when in Start-
10 MIN Stop Operation.
62-11637 3–24
Selections
LOW SPEED 0 MINS TO 255MINS (in Select the length of time the unit is to remain in low speed af-
DELAY CONT: 1 minute increments) ter starting, before transitioning to high speed, when in Con-
0 MIN tinuous Operation.
AIR FLOW NORMAL NORMAL = allows the engine to cycle from High Speed to
HIGH Low Speed, based on compartment temperature.
HIGH = Some products generate a considerable amount of
heat (due to respiration) during transportation. This frequently
occurs with produce. The HIGH selection is used for these
loads, if continuous high air flow is required to keep the entire
load at a constant temperature. The engine will remain in High
Speed when High is selected.
NOTE: HIGH AIR FLOW is not active with setpoints below
+10.4°F (-12.0°C).
DEFROST TIMER 1.5 HRS The defrost timer will automatically put the unit into the defrost
SET FOR 3 HRS cycle at the interval selected if DTT is below 40°F (4.4°C) or
the SAT is below 45°F (7.2°C).
6 HRS
Shorter times are generally used for warm, humid products
12 HRS like produce.
Longer times can be used for dry and frozen products.
NOTE: The defrost timer is active only when DTT is below
40°F and the unit is running.
FRESH PROTECT OFF OFF = FreshProtect is turned off.
A, B, C, D, E A through E each place an individual flexible limit on how far
below setpoint the supply air temperature can drop when in
Continuous Operation with a setpoint above 32°F (0°C).
Refer to Section Section 4.10.1 for more information on
FreshProtect.
TEMP CONTROL RETURN AIR The evaporator has both a Return Air Sensor and a Supply Air
SUPPLY AIR Sensor.
RETURN AIR 2 RETURN AIR = With this setting the unit will operate so that
the return air (air entering the evaporator) will be controlled to
setpoint. Return air temperature is generally considered to be
a good sampling of the actual product temperature.
SUPPLY AIR = The unit will operate so that the supply air (air
leaving the evaporator) will be controlled to setpoint
whenever the setpoint is in the perishable range (greater than
10.4°F (-12°C). When the setpoint is in the frozen range the
unit will control the return air as described in the RETURN AIR
selection.
RETURN AIR 2 = For units equipped with RAT2, the unit will
control temperature based on the return air entering the
evaporator at the location of RAT2.
OUT OF RANGE Metric English The value entered here is the number of degrees away from
ALARM OFF OFF setpoint the temperature may drift before it is considered
“Out-Of-Range” and the configured alarm or alarm and
2°C 4°F shutdown action will be activated.
3°C 5°F Refer to alarm 00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE for more
4°C 7°F information.
3–25 62-11637
Selections
AUTOFRESH AIR CLOSED CLOSED = AutoFresh Air Exchange assembly will be closed.
OPEN = Assembly will be open if the engine is running and
OPEN the setpoint is greater than 28.0°F (-2.22°C).
CFM CONTROL CFM CONTROL = Assembly will be cycled open and closed
over a 20 minute time period. The length of time the assembly
is opened or closed is based on the Auto Fresh Air Control
Functional Parameter.
The CFM CONTROL will only be active if the engine is run-
ning and the setpoint is greater than 28.0°F (-2.22°C).
AUTOFRESH AIR 5 to 50 CFM (in 5 CFM When CFM Control is selected, this setting is used to set the
CONTROL increments) amount of air to be exchanged during each 20 minute cycle.
25 CFM
PERISH SENSITIVE ON OFF = Supply air temperature will be limited to the colder tem-
PRODUCT OFF perature of 32°F (0°C) or set point less the SUPPLY AIR LIM-
IT CONFIGURATION VALUE.
ON = Supply air temperature will be limited to set point less
the Supply air Limit Configuration value.
Refer to Section 4.10.1 for information on Perishable Sensi-
tive Product and Supply Air Configuration interaction.
START-STOP Settings
(Time and temperature values that control Start-Stop Operations)
The system may be configured so that:
1. The same settings apply to any setpoint = “Together” OR
2. The settings are different between setpoints in perishable range and frozen range = “Separate”.
• If “Together” is configured, there will be six settings with only the sixth applicable to just frozen range.
• If “Separate” is configured there will be eleven settings five labeled perishable and six labeled frozen.
MINIMUM RUN 4 MINS This determines the Minimum Run Time for perishable/frozen
TIME TO setpoints in Start-Stop Operation.
60 MINS (in 1 minute

increments)
MINIMUM OFF 10 to 90 MINS (in 1 This determines the Minimum Off Time for perishable/frozen
TIME minute increments) setpoints in Start-Stop Operation.
30 MINS
RESTART 5 to 18°F (0.28 to 10°C) Following the Minimum Off Time, if a compartment tempera-
TEMPERATURE (in 0.5° increments) ture drifts this far above or below setpoint in Perishable
5.4°F (3°C) Range or above setpoint in Frozen Range, the unit will restart.
OVERRIDE 3.6 to 18°F (2 to 10°C) Sets the override temperature for the Minimum Off Time por-
TEMPERATURE (in 0.5° increments) tion of the Auto Start-Stop Off Cycle. During Minimum Off
3.6°F (2.0°C) Time, if the refrigerated compartment temperature drift this far
above or below setpoint in Perishable Range, or above set-
point in Frozen Range, the unit will override the Minimum Off
Time and restart.
62-11637 3–26
Selections
MAXIMUM OFF TIME OFF OFF - There is no maximum off time.
10 MINS to 255 MINS When a minute value is selected, this is the longest amount
(in 1 minute increments) of time the unit will remain off during an Auto Start/Stop Off
Cycle (in Perishable or Frozen). When this time expires, the
unit will restart and run for the Minimum Run Time, regardless
of any temperature change inside the compartment.
FROZEN SHUTDOWN 0°F to 1.1°F This only applies to Frozen Setpoints in Start-Stop operation.
OFFSET (0°C to 0.6°C) This offset is the number of degrees below setpoint that the
(in 0.1° increments) unit will run before cycling off. This will allow for a lower aver-
age compartment temperature when considering temperature
rises during off cycles.
SLEEP MODE For complete instructions on entering and setting parameters for Sleep mode refer to
Section 3.18.
Overrides
OVERRIDE NO If the switches are all configured “Switch Not Installed”, this
REMOTE SWITCH YES parameter will not display.
1 SHUTDOWN NO = The system will respond to the switch as configured.
(REMS1)
YES = The configured action on activation of the switch will
AND be overridden and the action will be alarm only. The purpose
of this setting to temporarily override the Configuration setting
OVERRIDE DOOR in situations where shutdown or speed change is not desired.
SWITCH
SHUTDOWN (DS)
Viewing Preferences
DISPLAY °F Temperatures will display in either Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius
TEMPERATURE IN °C (°C). (for North American Units, this function may be locked)
DISPLAY PSIG Pressure will display in either psig or (bar).

PRESSURE IN BAR (for North American Units, this function may be locked)
DATE FORMAT MM/DD/YYYY Date will display in either US (MM/DD/YYYY) or

DD/MM/YYYY European (DD/MM/YYYY) format.
ALARM YES YES = In Driver mode, the alarm code and alarm description
DESCRIPTIONS NO will be displayed.
NO = In Driver mode, only the alarm code will be displayed.
CONTRAST 0 TO 63 (in single Higher numbers increase the contrast of the display screen.
digit increments)
35
3–27 62-11637
3.18 Sleep Mode

Selections
1
LANGUAGE DATA FUNCTIONS EXIT
RECORDER 2
1. To place the unit in Sleep mode, enter the Advanced User Functional parameter screen as described in
Section 3.17.
2. Press the FUNCTIONS soft key to display the Functional Parameter Screen.
3. Press the ▼ key until the START-STOP SETTINGS sub-menu is highlighted and then press the “=” key to
enter the menu.
FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS (3 OF 5)
ECONOMY SETTINGS
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS
START STOP SETTINGS
OVERRIDE SETTINGS
VIEWING PREFERENCES
END OF LIST
BACK EXIT
4. Press the ▼ key until the Functional Parameter “SLEEP MODE SETTINGS” is highlighted. Press the “=”
key.
5. Press either the ▲ or ▼ key until “ON” is highlighted. Press the “=” key to save the setting to memory, the
unit is now in Sleep mode.
6. Additional Functional Parameter sub menu selections for “wake up time” and “run pretrip at wake” will now
be available and may be saved to memory following the key stroke sequence in the preceding step. Refer to
the following for information on these settings.
To Exit Sleep Mode
• Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position, then back to the START/RUN position.
• Sleep mode is generally used in cold ambients when the unit will be off for an extended period of time
with no product inside the refrigerated compartment. Many times units are difficult to start due to a dis-
charged battery, thickened engine oil, etc. after time in cold ambient.
• There is NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL in Sleep mode and it should never be used if the compartment
contains perishable or frozen products.
• In Sleep mode the unit will “Wake Up” periodically and start the engine to keep the battery charged and
the engine warm.
62-11637 3–28
Additional Sub-Menus:
1. “WAKE UP TIME” may be set to ON or OFF, the default setting is OFF.
a. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to OFF the unit will remain in Sleep mode until it is taken out manually (refer
to the preceding “TO EXIT SLEEP MODE” instruction).
b. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to ON the “SET WAKEUP TIME” menu will become available.
Pressing the = key will allow the user to select the date and time the unit is to automatically wake up. The wake up
time must be at least one hour and no more than eight days from the time the clock is set. The following information
can be entered:
• Month (1 to 12).
• Day (1 to 31).
• Year (2009 to 2099).
• Hour (0 to 23).
• Minute (0 to 59).
NOTE
The system uses a 24-hour clock. Hours 00 to 11 are AM and hours 12 to 23 are PM.
2. “RUN PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” may be set to YES or NO, the default setting is NO.
a. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to NO the unit will wake up at the designated time and control to
setpoint.
b. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to YES. the unit will wake up at the designated time, automati-
cally run Pre-Trip and then control to setpoint. “PRETRIP PASS/FAIL” will remain in the MessageCenter
until it is manually cleared by pressing any key.
If Sleep mode is selected when the unit is not running during a Start-Stop Off Cycle, any remaining Minimum Off
Time will be ignored, and the engine will start. It will run for four minutes (minimum), until the engine coolant tem-
perature is above 95°F (35°C), the battery is charged (“OK” is displayed in the battery unit data reading) and
charging amps are less than the configured setting.
When the unit is running while in Sleep mode, “SLEEP WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL” will flash in the Mes-
sageCenter.
If the unit is already running when Sleep mode is selected, it will continue to run until the conditions described
above are met.
While the unit is cycled off in Sleep mode, “SLEEP MODE, OFF/ON TO WAKE” will be displayed in the Mes-
sageCenter. The display backlight will turn off after 5 minutes.
While in Sleep mode, Unit Data and Alarm Lists may be viewed, and Functional Parameters may be viewed and
changed as necessary. However, Start-Stop/Continuous Run selections and setpoint can not be changed. Manual
Defrost and Pre-Trip can be initiated.
The unit will restart when engine coolant temperature drops below the configured restart temperature value or if the
battery voltage drops below the configured battery restart value.
NOTE
In the event that the Engine Coolant Temperature sensor fails, Sleep mode will operate as follows:
• In ambients above 32°F (0°C), the unit will run as above, and will monitor battery voltage and charging amps
only (according to the Configuration setting).
• In ambients below 32°F (0°C), the unit will run for 20 minutes minimum run time, then restart every 60 min-
utes (maximum off time). Battery voltage and amperage will be monitored normally.
3–29 62-11637
3.19 Stopping the Unit
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
STATUS OK
34
SETPOINT oF
SROS
To stop the unit, place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. The unit will shutdown immediately while
the system completes a shutdown sequence and then the display will go blank. The engine will stop and the dis-
play will turn off.
NOTES:
• The system will close the compressor suction modulation valve (CSMV) and evaporator expansion valve
(EVXV) to 0% open before turning off.
• Due to internal processing, turning the START/RUN - OFF switch OFF then back to the START/RUN posi-
tion will result in a 4 to 50 second delay between the display going off and coming back on again.
62-11637 3–30
3.20 DataTrak (Option)
DataTrak allows remote communication with the APX Control System (cellular, satellite, etc).
One Way Communication providers can request data from the System and transmit it via their equipment to
another location. This is typically done via the Internet to any destination in the world.
! WARNING
lockout/tagout procedures before inspection/servicing. All unit inspection/servicing by prop-
erly trained personnel only.
Two-way Communication providers can also send commands via their equipment to the APX Control System to
start or stop the unit, change settings and the way the System is operating the unit.
DataTrak is an optional feature. The DataTrak option is generally factory installed, however it can be installed in the
field by inserting a DataTrak option USB memory device into the USB interface port and following the on-screen
instructions.
The DataTrak Option installation can be confirmed by scrolling through the Advanced User Unit Data (refer to Sec-
tion 3.14). DataTrak will be listed under the Installed Options heading if it is installed.
Once DataTrak is installed, the APX Control System must be configured for the provider that will be connecting to it
(refer to Section 5.2.3). The Satellite Com Configuration can be set for “Qualcomm” or “Other”. If the provider is
“Qualcomm” and the original Qualcomm TrailerTracs system is being used then the “Qualcomm” selection must be
made. If the provider is Qualcomm and the newer TrailerTracs T2 system is being used or another communications
provider is used, the “Other” selection must be made.
Carrier Transicold has worked with approved communication providers with recommended installation locations,
and wiring connections to Carrier units. Instructions for installing this equipment is supplied by each individual pro-
vider, and not by Carrier Transicold. Communications electrical harnesses are available from Carrier Transicold
Performance Parts Group (PPG).
3–31 62-11637
3.21 Emergency Bypass Mode
In the event of an alarm caused by a failure of the display module, the unit will go into shutdown. In order to
temporarily bypass this shutdown state, Emergency Bypass mode can be activated.
Once Emergency Bypass mode has been activated, the unit will operate normally for 24 hours, a countdown timer
will be shown on the display. This 24-hour window of operation will keep the load safe and provide enough time to
contact the nearest Carrier Transicold Service Center for repair of the unit.
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE
INSPECT
oF
BYPASS
34
SETPOINT oF
EXIT
MODE MODE
Enter Emergency Bypass Mode:
1. When the unit is in a shutdown state due to the display module alarm, press the MENU key until BYPASS
MODE is displayed.
2. Press the BYPASS MODE soft key, the unit will resume operation until Emergency Bypass mode is disabled,
or after 24 hours of unit operation in Emergency Bypass mode.
Exit Emergency Bypass Mode:
3. Press the MENU key until the EXIT BYPASS soft key is displayed.
4. Press the EXIT BYPASS soft key, the unit will shut down. Once Emergency Bypass mode is turned off, it
cannot be restarted and the unit will remain in shutdown until it is repaired.
After repairs have been made and the display module alarm has been cleared, the unit will operate normally and
Emergency Bypass mode will no longer be available.
62-11637 3–32
3.22 Remote Panel
The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control panel. The remote panel, which is very similar to the display
module, displays compartment setpoints, compartment temperatures and operating modes (heat, cool or defrost).
The setpoint may be modified and the unit may be started and stopped using the remote panel. This compact remote
panel can be mounted to suit the individual operator’s preferences - on the front bulkhead, or in the compartment
(even in the wall itself). Remote Panel keys, soft keys and alarm indicators are in the same locations as the main APX
display module.
4 5
3 7
2 6

2. DEFROST key 7. Arrow Keys
4. Alarm LED 9. Display
5. Alarm Key
-----
The Remote Panel can be used to:
• Turn the Refrigeration System On and Off - The Remote Panel does not remove power from the APX
Control System. In order to shut down the APX Control System, place the SROS in the OFF position.
• Check compartment temperatures
• Check and change setpoints
• Initiate manual defrost
• Check mode of operation
• Initiate Pre-Trip
The Remote Panel cannot be used to:
• Enter Advance User and Technician modes
• Access any USB Functions; USB menus, PC Mode, Print
The Remote Panel does not have the following features:
• There is no USB port on the remote panel
• There is no START/RUN-OFF switch at the remote panel. Remote Panel unit On/Off is controlled by the
“UNIT ON/OFF” soft key (replaces the Engine Hours soft key in the main display)
3–33 62-11637
The following unit functions are controlled the same as the main display:
• Display compartment temperatures - Section 3.2
• Display the current mode of operation for each compartment - Section 3.2
• Intelliset selection - Section 3.5
• Initiate Pre-Trip - Section 3.6
• Initiate Manual Defrost/Defrost Indication - Section 3.11
• Control display indication lock - Section 3.14
Turning the Unit ON/OFF Using the Remote Panel:
The unit can be shutdown using either the remote panel or the START/RUN-OFF switch on the Main Panel. The
remote panel cannot operate if the START/RUN-OFF switch is in the OFF position.
In order to prevent a constant drain on the battery, the remote panel illuminates when the START/RUN-OFF switch
is turned on, but the remote panel will turn off after 30 minutes of inactivity. To turn the remote panel back on, sim-
ply press any button on the remote panel. The remote panel will turn off again after 30 minutes of inactivity.
1. On the remote panel press and release the “MENU” key until the “UNIT ON/OFF” soft key is displayed.
NOTE
The “UNIT ON/OFF” soft key on the remote panel takes the place of the “ENGINE HOURS” soft key in
the main display.
2. To turn the unit ON, press the “UNIT ON/OFF” soft key. The remote display will read “UNIT ON”
3. To turn the unit OFF, press the “UNIT ON/OFF” soft key. The remote display will read “UNIT SHUT DOWN
BY REMOTE PANEL”
62-11637 3–34
SECTION 4 - ENGINE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3 ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.3.1 Engine Start-Up Sequence ................................................. 4–2
4.3.2 Transition To High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.1 Pull Down/Pull-Up ........................................................ 4–3
4.4.2 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.3 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.4 UltraFresh Temperature Control ............................................. 4–4
4.4.5 UltraFreeze Temperature Control ............................................ 4–5
4.4.6 Defrost ................................................................. 4–5
4.4.7 Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.5.1 Temperature Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.5.2 Perishable And Frozen Setpoint Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.6 START-STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.6.1 Start-Stop Configuration ................................................... 4–6
4.6.2 Stop Parameters ......................................................... 4–7
4.6.3 Re-Start Parameters ...................................................... 4–7
4.6.4 Start-Stop Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.8 AUTOFRESH AIR EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.9 DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.9.1 Defrost Initiation And Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.9.2 Normal Defrost Operation, Ambient Air Temperature less than 80°F (26.7°C) ......... 4–11
4.9.3 Normal Defrost Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.9.4 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence ....................................... 4–12
4.9.5 High Ambient Defrost Operation ............................................ 4–12
4.9.6 High Ambient Defrost Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.10 USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.10.1 FreshProtectTM Supply Air Control .......................................... 4–13
4.10.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.10.3 ProductShield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.10.4 Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.11 PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.11.1 Cargo Protect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.11.2 Engine Speed Overrides .................................................. 4–18
4.11.3 Unloader Control Overrides ................................................ 4–19
4.11.4 CSMV Control Overrides .................................................. 4–20
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 4
Engine and Temperature Control
NOTES
1. If the unit is in an alarm condition, the control system alarm response may override the following unit
operation descriptions. If an alarm is displayed in the MessageCenter, refer to the specific alarm description
in Section 9 for “Unit Control” descriptions.
2. With the complex control interactions in use with the APX Control System there are many user selected and
preprogrammed software overrides which may change the operation of the unit. Refer to Section 4.10 &
Section 4.11 for complete descriptions of these features.
4.1 Introduction
This section describes operation of the unit when in Start-Stop Operation and Continuous Operation.
For descriptions and flow diagrams of the refrigerant system component interaction while in cooling and heating,
refer to Section 2.13 & Section 2.14.
4.2 Sequence of Operation - Electrical
Electrical schematic is located in Section 10
With the battery connected, power is available from the battery through fuse F7:
• and fuse F1 to the module logic circuit at main microprocessor module (MM) terminal 1MM-6, through the
stepper valve module (from 1MM-8 to 1SMV-6) and to the display module (from 1SVM-8 to DM-10),
• and fuse F3, PCM-34 and SP-6 to SVM at 2SVM-22 (for operation of the valves),
• and through SP-6 to the engine control unit (ENCU) at ENCU-22.
Potential power is also established for the starter solenoid contactor (SSC) normally open contacts, the engine
preheat transistor (EPHT), fuel heater relay (FHR) normally open contacts, AutoFresh Air relay (AFAR) normally
open contacts, power enable relay (PER) normally open contacts (through fuse F5), the buzzer (B - through fuse
F1) and the START/RUN - OFF switch (SROS).
Once the module logic circuit is powered, the modules begin to communicate over the controlled area network
(CAN).
The “HI” CAN connectivity is established from the main microprocessor (1MM-2) through SP-1 to the stepper valve
module (1SVM-5) and from the stepper valve module (1SVM-2) to the display module (DM-2). The connectivity
also continues from SP-1 to the engine control unit (ENCU-23).
The “LO” CAN connectivity is established from the main microprocessor (1MM-4) through SP-4 to the stepper
valve module (1SVM-7) and from the stepper valve module (1SVM-4) to the display module (DM-6). The
connectivity also continues from SP-4 to the engine control unit (ENCU-24).
To start the unit, SROS is placed in the START/RUN position. Power flows from SROS through the J1 jumper and
high pressure switch (HPS) to the power enable relay (PER) coil. Confirmation of power circuits are established
from splice point SP-9 back to the main microprocessor at 2MM-35 and SP-5 to 3MM-16. If either of these circuits
is broken, the appropriate alarm will be activated.
If conditions are correct for operation, the main microprocessor will energize PER by providing ground through
PCM16 from 3MM18. Energizing PER closes its normally open contacts to provide power:
• through fuse F10 to the main microprocessor at 3MM-34 & 3MM-23.
• through fuse F12 for satellite communication (SATPWR).
• through fuse F11 for the light bar (LB) green LED’s.
• Potential power is also established through fuse F10 for the AFAR coil & FHR coil, and through fuse F8 for
the fuel level sensor (FLS).
During operation the main microprocessor will complete the potential circuits, by supplying ground, energizing or
de-energize the required components.
Once the SROS is placed in the START/RUN position, the compressor suction modulating valve (CSMV) and
evaporator expansion valve (EVXV) will open to a predetermined position, to equalize system pressure, and then
close (minimum allowed % open) before the unit starts.
NOTE
The unit will not restart for at least 30 seconds following a shutdown.
4–1 62-11637
4.3 Engine Control
Engine control consists of engine start-up and speed control.
4.3.1 Engine Start-Up Sequence
On command to perform a Start-up the main microprocessor will supply power from 3MM-10 to the fuel pump (FP)
and from 3MM-9 to ENCU-44. This signals the ENCU that engine operation is required. The control system will then
enter the engine start sequence. During the start sequence the engine is operated in low speed. Following start, the
refrigeration system will then operate in the mode(s) required for temperature control.
The engine start sequence consists of periods of time with the engine preheater (EPH - power from 3MM-14
through PCM -27 to EPHT) and starter (SM - power from 3MM-12 to SS, closing the SSC contacts) energized and
de-energized for up to three start attempts (Figure 4.1). Pre-heat time varies in duration based on engine coolant
temperature (see Table 4–1).
Figure 4.1 Auto Start Sequence If alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR is
active, the ambient temperature sensor will be used. If
both alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR
ENGINE 0 - 180
Seconds
and 00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR are active
RUNNING
following start the control system assumes a temperature of less than
(preheat) 32°F (0°C) for the preheat timing.
3 to 10 CRANK During the last five seconds of preheat OR for 5 sec-
Seconds (with preheat) onds before a start attempt, if no preheat is required,
SECOND the buzzer (B) is energized; then the starter solenoid
5 SEC. BUZZER AND contactor (SSC) will be energized for a maximum of ten
0 to 30 THIRD seconds while the engine condition is checked during
Seconds PREHEAT ATTEMPTS the cranking period.
(If required) The engine is considered to be running, and the start
sequence will be stopped, when engine speed is
15 Seconds greater than 1000 rpm and the engine oil pressure
STOP switch (ENOPS) is closed.
ENGINE 0 - 180 During the second and third attempts, the control sys-
RUNNING Seconds tem will monitor additional inputs.
(preheat) following start • When the engine speed reading is less than 1000
rpm, ambient temperature is above 32°F (0°C)
3 to 10 CRANK and the ENOPS is closed, alarm 00130 CHECK
Seconds (with preheat)
ENGINE RPM SENSOR will be activated and the
engine will be considered running.
5 SEC. BUZZER FIRST
0 to 30 ATTEMPT • When the engine speed reading is less than 1000
Seconds PREHEAT rpm, ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
(If required) the ENOPS is closed and DC current is more
than 2 amps, alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM
SENSOR will be activated and the engine will be
considered running.
Table 4–1 Engine Preheat Time Once the engine is considered running, the control sys-
tem will keep the preheater energized for an additional
Engine Coolant Heat Time in Seconds
0 to 180 seconds of Post Heat, depending on engine
Temperature Preheat Post Heat coolant temperature (refer to Table 4–1).
Less than 33°F (1.0°C) 30 180 During the start sequence the control system monitors
engine speed while cranking. If engine speed drops
33°F to 51°F (1.0°C to below 50 rpm for three seconds the starter solenoid
20 120
11°C) contactor will be de-energized and alarm 00035
CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT will be activated.
51°F to 78°F (11°C to 26°C) 10 60
If the unit fails to start after three attempts, alarm 00031
Greater than 78°F (26°C) 0 0 0 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE will be activated.
If the unit is equipped with a fuel heater, the control
system will monitor ambient temperature. If ambient is
below 77°F (25°C) the fuel heater relay (FHR) will be
energized. Energizing FHR closes its normally open
contacts to supply power from fuse F14, through the
fuel heater temperature switch (FHTS) to the heater.
Refer to Section 2.8 for FHTS settings.
62-11637 4–2
4.3.2 Transition To High Speed
After a successful start, the control system may call for the engine to transition to high speed. When high speed is
required, the main microprocessor will provide a signal through the CAN system to the ENCU, calling for the speed
change. Three factors control this transition.
1. Transition may be delayed if a time value is entered in the HIGH SPEED DELAY Configuration. The delay
may be set to 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default setting is 1 minute.
2. If the engine is started when the coolant temperature is 79°F (26°C) or below it will remain in low speed until
the coolant temperature reaches 79°F (26°C) or it has operated for a minimum of 15 seconds. Once the
coolant temperature reaches 79°F (26°C) the engine may transition to high speed.
3. Transition will be based on the need for temperature control. Generally, the engine will operate in high
speed when the unit is in Pulldown or Pull-Up Mode (full capacity required) and in low speed when less than
full capacity is required.
4.4 Modes of Operation

Once the engine is started, the system will operate in Start-Stop or Continuous Operation energizing and de-ener-
gizing the following components:
• SV1 - Energized (closed) through main microprocessor terminal 3MM-1.
• SV2 - Energized (opened) through main microprocessor terminal 3MM-2.
• SV4 - Energized (opened) through main microprocessor terminal 3MM-3.
• SPEED - Transition to high speed when main microprocessor provides a signal through the CAN system to
the ENCU.
• CLUTCH - Energized (engaged) through main microprocessor terminal 3MM-11.
• UL1 - Energized (unloaded) through main microprocessor terminal 3MM-6.
• UL2 - Energized (unloaded) through main microprocessor terminal 3MM-8.
• CSMV - Opened and closed by the Stepper Valve Module (SVM) through module terminals 2SVM-2, 2SVM-
3, 2SVM-4 & 2SM-5.
• EVXV - Opened and closed by the Stepper Valve Module (SVM) through module terminals 2SVM-6, 2SVM-
7, 2SVM-8, 2SVM-9 & 2SVM-10.
4.4.1 Pull Down/Pull-Up

When in Pulldown or Pull-up, the refrigeration system will operate with the compressor loaded (six cylinders) and in
high speed.
Pulldown/Pull-Up will be entered:
• following a Start-Up.
• following a setpoint change.
• following an operational change (Start-Stop Operation vs Continuous Operation).
• following a defrost termination.
• following a pretrip termination.
• when in a Start-Stop ON Cycle and all other Stop Parameters have been met except the compartment tem-
perature Stop Parameter.
Pulldown/Pull-Up will end when one of the following occurs:
• when the control system is calling for low speed.
• when in Start-Stop Operation and the compartment temperature Stop Parameter has been satisfied while
one or more of the other Stop Parameters has not.
• when in continuous operation and the control system has calculated pulldown or pull-up is to end.
4–3 62-11637
4.4.2 Cooling
In the Cool Mode, the control system will operate the unit controls as follows (refer to Section 2.13):
SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine
Speed
Open Open Closed See Note 1
Clutch UL1 & UL2 CSMV EVXV
Output
Engage See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 3
NOTES
1. The selected temperature control sensor determines if the unit is running high or low speed.
2. The control system monitors the suction pressure & ambient temperature and calculates the system load. If
required, the system will unload cylinders and modulate the CSMV to keep the load within required limits.
Refer to Section 4.11.3 and Section 4.11.4.
3. Modulated to control superheat.
4.4.3 Heating
When in Heat Mode, the control system will operate the unit controls as follows (refer to Section 2.14):
• SV4 - SV4 is open.
• CSMV/EVXV - CSMV & EVXV are 100% open.
• Clutch - The clutch is engaged.
• SV1 - SV1 is closed. If discharge pressure rises to 390psig (26.5 bar), SV1 will open for 1 second and con-
tinue to cycle as often as every 30 seconds to reduce the pressure to less than 390psig (26.5 bar).
• Engine Speed - When in Start-Stop Operation the engine will remain in high speed to raise the control tem-
perature as quickly as possible. When in Continuous Operation the engine will be in high speed when con-
trol temperature is greater than 3.6°F (2°C) below set point and will remain in high speed until the control
temperature is raised to 3.2°F (1.8°C) below setpoint.
• Unloaders - When in Start-Stop Operation the compressor will remain fully loaded to raise the control tem-
perature as quickly as possible. When in Continuous Operation the compressor will be fully loaded when
control temperature is greater than 2.7°F (1.5°C) below set point. UL1 & UL2 will unload when the control
temperature is raised to 2.3°F (1.3°C) below setpoint.
• SV2 - SV2 is closed. When conditions allow, additional heating capacity is obtained by opening SV2 to allow
additional refrigerant to be metered into the hot gas cycle (through the evaporator expansion valve). This
flow is established (even though SV1 is closed) by the hot gas bypass line which functions to raise the
receiver pressure.
As the system operates in the Heat Mode with SV2 closed, discharge pressure tends to decrease. As the system
operates in the Heat Mode with SV2 open discharge pressure tends to increase. Control of the valve is dependent
on discharge pressure and ambient temperature. The valve is opened (on a discharge pressure fall) at 200 PSIG
(13.6 bar), the valve is closed (on a discharge pressure rise) at 300 PSIG (20.4 bar).
When the ambient temperature is below 50°F (10°C) SV2 will be opened when discharge pressure decreases to
the opening pressure and remain open until discharge pressure rises to the close pressure.
When the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C) SV2 will be pulsed, open for one second and then closed for
10 seconds. During the 10 second closed period the system pressures will be allowed to balance out due to the
additional refrigerant in the hot gas cycle. The pulse will continue, one second open and ten seconds closed, until
discharge pressure increases to the close pressure.
4.4.4 UltraFresh Temperature Control
UltraFresh 3 is an advanced method of temperature control for both Perishable and Frozen ranges. It produces a
reduced capacity state by throttling the CSMV and pulsing the refrigerant control solenoid valves.
UltraFresh uses both the supply and return air sensors to control compartment temperature.
The sensor selected in the TEMP CONTROL Functional Parameter is the probe that will be used to determine
when the temperature is at setpoint.
Reduced capacity is produced between heating and cooling by a set of modes known as Cool Pulsed Mode, Heat
Pulsed Mode and Null Pulsed Mode. These modes are not constant operating modes, they operate for a few sec-
onds at a time. During null, the heat and cool valves are opened simultaneously to reduce either the heating or
cooling capacity. In these modes (Refer to the following charts), the unit will pulse between cool and null, or heat
and Null in 10 second increments. The capacity is varied by adjusting the pulse rate.
62-11637 4–4
4.4.4.1 Cool Pulsed Mode
SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine
Speed
Open Open Closed Low
Clutch CSMV/
UL1 & UL2
Output EVXV
Engage Unload See Note
NOTE: For CSMV/EVXV control, see following step d.
4.4.4.2 Null Pulsed Mode
SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine
Speed
Open Open Open Low
Clutch CSMV/
UL1 & UL2
Output EVXV
4.4.4.3 Heat Pulsed Mode

SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine
Speed
Closed Closed Open Low
Clutch CSMV/
UL1 & UL2
Output EVXV
UltraFresh will modify the length of each mode in 10 second cycles. That is, if the unit is in Cool Pulse Mode, the
unit may run in cool for up to nine seconds, then null for one second, if the Control Temperature is away from set-
point. As the Control Temperature comes closer to setpoint, the length of cool pulse time will decrease, and the
amount of null time will increase. However, the combination of the two will always equal 10 seconds. The same is
true for the Heat Pulse Mode.
4.4.4.4 UltraFresh 3 CSMV/EVXV Control

The CSMV will automatically go to 30% when Ultra Fresh 3 is entered. The CSMV will usually control between
30% and 4% depending on the controlling probe temperature and suction pressure. However, it can go above 30%
for short periods of time. For example, high ambients and low setpoints may cause the CSMV to open higher than
30%. The EVXV will be modulated to control superheat when in cooling and 100% open in heating.
4.4.5 UltraFreeze Temperature Control

For frozen setpoints, a modified temperature control will be used to keep the unit from over cooling and driving the
box temperature far below setpoint. UltraFreeze operates similar to UltraFresh and acts to control the compartment
temperature from exceeding 3° F (1.6° C) below setpoint When UltraFreeze is active it is normal to hear the refrig-
erant solenoid valves energize and de-energize every few seconds. UltraFreeze is always active in Continuous
Operation, should the unit be required to continue to run after the box temperature is satisfied in Start-Stop Opera-
tion - due to either low battery condition or low engine coolant temperature - the UltraFreeze logic will control to the
3° F (1.6° C) below setpoint offset until all conditions for an off cycle are met and the unit cycles off.
4.4.6 Defrost
Refer to Section 4.9 for a description of defrost.
4.4.7 Overrides
With the complex control interactions in use with the APX Control System there are many user selected and pre-
programmed software overrides and Configuration settings which may change the operation of the unit. Refer to
Section 4.10 & Section 4.11 for complete descriptions of these features.
4–5 62-11637
4.5 Temperature Control
4.5.1 Temperature Determination

The APX Control System monitors temperature readings from supply and return temperature sensors to determine
the mode of operation required to maintain compartment temperature based on the setpoint.
The sensor used for temperature control is dependent on the selection made in the TEMP CONTROL Functional
Parameter.
• If the selection is RETURN AIR the return air sensor (RAT) will be used, for any setpoint.
• If the selection is SUPPLY AIR the APX Control System will switch to the supply air sensor (SAT) when oper-
ating with a perishable setpoint (refer to Section 4.5.2 for more information on frozen and perishable set-
points) and the return air sensor will be used for frozen setpoints.
4.5.2 Perishable And Frozen Setpoint Ranges

There are two ranges defined for setpoint.
• Perishable = setpoints above +10.4°F (-12°C).
• Frozen = setpoints at or below +10.4°F (-12°C).
4.6 Start-Stop Operation

Start-Stop is provided to reduce fuel or power consumption. This feature allows full automatic control of the unit by
monitoring compartment temperature, battery condition and engine coolant temperature.
The main function of Start-Stop Operation is to shutdown the engine after certain conditions are met (to provide an effi-
cient temperature control system) and to initiate a restart sequence after certain conditions are met. The Start-Stop/
Continuous key is pressed to select between Continuous and Start-Stop Operation. The mode of operation will be indi-
cated in the status bar.
NOTE
The control system may be locked so that the unit will always operate in Start-Stop whenever the set-
point is within a specific range. Refer to Range Lock (Section 4.10.2) for additional information.
4.6.1 Start-Stop Configuration

Start-Stop Operation is dependent on both Configuration and Functional Parameter settings. The first setting to be
considered is the START-STOP PARAMETERS Configuration. This setting determines control actions when in
Perishable or Frozen Range. Available settings are TOGETHER and SEPARATE.
• When SEPARATE is selected the control actions will be different, depending on whether the setpoint is in
Perishable Range or in Frozen Range (refer to Section 4.5.2).
• When TOGETHER is chosen, the same control actions apply to any setpoint.
If TOGETHER is selected, then the following Functional Parameter values will be available for use:
• MINIMUM RUN TIME • OVERRIDE TEMP
• MINIMUM OFF TIME • MAXIMUM OFF TIME
• RESTART TEMPERATURE • FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
If SEPARATE is selected, then the following Functional Parameter values will be available for use:
• PERISHABLE MINIMUM RUN TIME • FROZEN MINIMUM OFF TIME
• PERISHABLE MINIMUM OFF TIME • FROZEN RESTART TEMPERATURE
• PERISHABLE RESTART TEMPERATURE • FROZEN OVERRIDE TEMP
• PERISHABLE OVERRIDE TEMP • FROZEN MAXIMUM OFF TIME
• PERISHABLE MAXIMUM OFF TIME • FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
• FROZEN MINIMUM RUN TIME
62-11637 4–6
NOTE
In the event that this Configuration was set to SEPARATE and the eleven Functional Parameters for
Perishable and Frozen have been set and then the Configuration is changed from SEPARATE to
TOGETHER, the Perishable settings will be used.
4.6.2 Stop Parameters

Whenever the unit starts in Start-Stop Operation, it will remain in the Start-Stop ON cycle until all five of the follow-
ing criteria have been satisfied:
1. Unit has run for the selected Minimum Run Time
The MINIMUM RUN TIME is selected in the Functional Parameters. The purpose of MINIMUM RUN TIME is to
force the unit to run long enough to completely circulate the air inside the compartment, and to ensure that the
product temperature is at setpoint. This value may be set from 4 to 60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The factory
default setting is 4 minutes.
2. Engine coolant temperature has warmed
Each time the unit is started it must continue to run until the coolant temperature rises to 95°F (35°C) to ensure it
has fully warmed up before shutdown is allowed.
3. Battery is fully charged - Voltage
A good battery is defined as having 13.4 VDC at 77°F (25°C). The control system will calculate the equivalent volt-
age based on the ambient temperature and shutdown will be allowed when battery voltage is at or above the calcu-
lated value.
4. Battery is fully charged - Amperage
The control system will calculate the average current draw over a 20 second period. Once this average drops
below the selected value, shutdown will be allowed. The CURRENT FOR S/S SHUTOFF is selected in the Config-
urations. The value may be set from 1 to 10 amps in 0.5 amp intervals. The factory default setting is 7 amps.
5. Compartment temperature
In Start-Stop Operation the refrigeration system will operate in Pulldown or Pull-Up Mode in order to reach the shut-
down condition as quickly as possible.
Shutdown will be allowed when the compartment temperature is within 0.5°F (0.3°C) of setpoint, for operation in
Perishable Range. In Frozen Range, shutdown will be allowed when the compartment temperature is within 0.5°F
minus the FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET (0.3°C minus the FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET) of setpoint.
The FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET Functional Parameter may be set from 0 to 3.6°F (0 to 2°C) in 0.5° incre-
ments. The factory default setting is 0°F (0°C).
4.6.3 Re-Start Parameters

While the unit is in a Start-Stop OFF Cycle, restart will be initiated when one of the following conditions occurs:
NOTE
In Start-Stop Operation when the setpoint is in frozen range (below +10.4°F = -12°C), the unit will not
restart when the temperature is below setpoint except as indicated in the following.
1. Engine coolant temperature drops below selected Configuration value

The control system will monitor coolant temperature. If coolant temperature drops below the ENGINE TEMPERA-
TURE FOR RESTART Configuration value the engine will be started. The Configuration value may be set from 10
to 32°F (-12.2 to 0°C) in 0.5° increments. The factory default setting is 32°F (0°C).
If this is the only reason operation is required, the unit will operate as if it is in Continuous Operation until the
requirement has been met.
2. Battery voltage falls below selected Configuration value
The control system will monitor battery voltage. If battery voltage is at or below the VOLTAGE FOR START-STOP
RESTART Configuration value the engine will be started. The value may be set from 12.0 to 12.8 volts. The factory
default setting is 12.2 volts.
4–7 62-11637
3. Maximum Off Time has expired
In some ambient conditions there are times when the unit may remain in a Start-Stop Off cycle for extended periods
of time. To ensure that the entire load stays within the normal restart temperature range, the MAXIMUM OFF TIME
Functional Parameter may be used to force the unit to restart to circulate air in the compartment. This will ensure
there are no hot spots and the temperature sensor reading accurately reflects product temperature. The parameter
value may be set to 0 minutes or from 10 to 225 minutes in 1 minute intervals.
If the MAXIMUM OFF TIME is 0 minutes, there is no maximum off time for Start-Stop and the unit will remain off.
The factory default setting is 0 minutes.
4. Minimum Off Time has expired
The MINIMUM OFF TIME Functional Parameter allows the unit to remain off for extended periods of time, maxi-
mizing fuel/power economy. The unit may not be restarted until the MINIMUM OFF TIME has expired and the com-
partment temperature is greater than the PERISHABLE RESTART TEMPERATURE value selected in the
Functional Parameters away from setpoint. In Frozen Range, restart is allowed when the compartment tempera-
ture is calculated to be greater than 0.5°F above setpoint. The MINIUMUM OFF TIME parameter value may be set
from 10 to 90 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The factory default setting is 20 minutes. The RESTART TEMPERA-
TURE value may be set from 0.5 to 18°F (0.28 to 10°C) in 0.5° increments. The factory default is 3.6°F (2°C).
5. Compartment temperature has exceeded the Override Functional Parameter value
During MINIMUM OFF TIME the control system continually monitors the refrigerated compartment temperature and
the override functional parameter value. During the Minimum Off Time, if the refrigerated compartment temperature
drifts this far above or below setpoint in Perishable Range, or above setpoint in Frozen Range, the unit will override the
Minimum Off Time, and restart. The value may be set from 0.5 to 18°F (0.28 to 10°C) in 0.5° increments. The factory
default setting is 5.5°F (3°C).
Whenever the unit restarts, temperature control will be in the Pulldown or Pull-Up Mode (refer to Section 4.4.1).
4.6.4 Start-Stop Operating Sequence

The operating sequence for Start-Stop Operation under the default Configuration and Functional Parameter set-
tings is provided in Figure 4.2.
62-11637 4–8
Figure 4.2 Start-Stop Default Operating Sequence
FALLING
CSMV CONTROL
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH POINT Pull Down
+3.6 F (+2.0 C )
+0.5 F (+0.3 C )
Setpoint Start-Stop Setpoint

CSMV - 0%
Off Cycle
-0.5 F (+0.3 C )
-3.6 F (-2.0 C )
CSMV - 100%
Pull-Up
RISING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH POINT
Switch Point = Controlling Temperature - Setpoint

+ results are above setpoint, - results are below setpoint
*Switch points are the same for Perishable Range and Frozen Range
except in Frozen Range heating is not allowed.
4.7 Continuous Operation

In Continuous Operation, the unit will only shutdown in response to a shutdown alarm. Temperature control in the
compartment will operate under Pulldown, Pull-Up, Cooling, Heating and Ultra Fresh.
Continuous Operation is normally used for fresh produce and other sensitive product loads. The Start-Stop/ Contin-
uous key is pressed to switch between Continuous Operation and Start-Stop Operation. The mode of operation will
be indicated in the status bar.
NOTE
The control system may be locked so that the unit will always operate in Start-Stop or in Continuous
whenever the setpoint is within a specific range. Refer to Range Lock (Section 4.10.2) for additional
information.
In Continuous Operation, Pulldown or Pull-up will continue until the proper temperature has been reached. The
temperature calculation determines the average temperature using the formula:
(SAT -RAT) / 2 = Calculated Average Temperature
When the Control Temperature is within the calculated average temperature of set point, Pulldown or Pull-up ends.
Once Pulldown or Pull-up ends the system will operate in accordance with Table 4–2 & Figure 4.3.
The operating sequence for Continuous Operation under the default Configuration and Functional Parameter set-
tings is provided in Figure 4.3.
4–9 62-11637
Table 4–2 Continuous Operation Modes
SETPOINT ALLOWED OPERATION
32°F (0.0°C) and above UltraFresh with FreshProtect (if Configured*)
Below 32°F (0.0°C) & Above 10.4°F (-12°C) UltraFresh (FreshProtect Not Applicable)
Less than 10.4°F (-12°C) Cooling (only) with UltraFreeze
* Refer to Section 4.10.1 for information on FreshProtect.
Figure 4.3 Continuous Default Operating Sequence
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE Pull Down
SWITCH POINT
+3.6 F ( +2.0 C )
+3.2 F (+1.8 C )
Low Speed
CSMV CONTROL
6 Cylinder Cool +2.7 F (+1.5 C )

+2.3 F (+1.3 C )
Low Speed
2 Cylinder Cool
+1.5 F (+0.8 C )
Setpoint UltraFresh Setpoint
-1.5 F (-0.8 C)
-1.8 F (-1.0 C)
Low Speed
2 Cylinder Heat*
-2.3 F (-1.3 C )
CSMV -
-2.7 F (-1.5 C ) Low Speed

100%
6 Cylinder Heat* -3.2 F (-1.8 C )

-3.6 F (-2.0 C )
Pull-Up* RISING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH POINT
Switch Point = Controlling Temperature - Setpoint
+ results are above setpoint, - results are below setpoint
*Switch points are the same for Perishable Range and Frozen Range
except in Frozen Range heating is not allowed.
4.8 AutoFresh Air Exchange

AutoFresh Air Exchange is a factory installed option that allows control of the atmospheric conditions within the refrig-
erated compartment. When air is being exchanged, two air ports open. The upper port allows fresh ambient air to
enter while stale air exits through the lower port. Exchange is available with setpoints above 28°F (-2.2°C). It is
always closed when in defrost or in a Start-Stop OFF cycle regardless of Configuration or Functional Parameter set-
tings.
Operation is dependent on two Configurations and one or two Functional Parameters. When AutoFresh Air is
installed at the factory, the AUTO FRESH AIR Configuration is set to INSTALLED. The control point at which it
becomes active is set in the Configurations. The AUTO FRESH AIR DELAY Configuration may be set to SETPOINT
or a time value of 0 to 48 hours. If set to SETPOINT, control will begin when the temperature is 1.5°F (0.8°C) away
from setpoint. If a time value is entered, it will become active after the time has expired and the system is no longer in
Pulldown or Pull-up even if the control temperature has not reached 1.5°F (0.8°C) away from setpoint.
62-11637 4–10
The first parameter is the AUTOFRESH AIR Functional Parameter. It may be set to CLOSED, OPEN or CFM CON-
TROL. When set to CLOSED, AutoFresh Air is not operational. When set to OPEN, the ports will always be open
with setpoints above 28°F (-2.2°C).
When set to CFM CONTROL the AUTOFRESH AIR CONTROL Functional Parameter becomes available. The
Parameter may be set form 5 to 50 CFM in 5 CFM increments. Under CFM CONTROL, AutoFresh Air will operate on
a 20 minute cycle. During the cycle the ports will open until the required CFM has been exchanged and then close for
the remainder of the cycle.
4.9 Defrost
Defrost is an independent cycle overriding cooling and heating functions in order to de-ice the evaporator. When
the unit enters defrost the MessageCenter will display DEFROST CYCLE STARTED for the first 10 seconds and
then display the default message for the remainder of the cycle. DEFROST is displayed in the Operator Message
Panel, along with the setpoint while the unit is in Defrost. Defrost is allowed when the DTT is less than 40.0°F
(4.4°C) or the SAT is less than 45.0°F (7.2°C), unless the alarms for both DTT and SAT are activated, then defrost
can be initiated when the RAT is less than 45.0°F (7.2°C).
4.9.1 Defrost Initiation And Start

Defrost can be initiated by pressing the MANUAL DEFROST key or automatically by the control system. Control
system initiation is based on coil condition or expiration of the defrost timer.
4.9.1.1 Defrost based on coil condition

Defrost based on coil condition will be initiated when blockage is sufficient to cause an air pressure differential
across the coil great enough to close the contacts of the defrost air switch (DAS).
TIP
Ice is not the only thing that will cause the air differential to increase across the evaporator coil. Shrink
wrap, paper, plastic bags, and other such items when caught in the return air stream and pulled up
against the evaporator coil or the return air grille can also cause the DAS contacts to close.
4.9.1.2 Defrost based on time

Time interval between defrosts is selected in the Functional Parameters. The parameter value may be set to 1.5, 3,
6, or 12 hours (factory default setting is 6 hours.)
NOTE
The defrost timer will not count when the unit is in defrost, a Start/Stop off cycle, or the DTT is greater
than 40.0°F (4.4°C).
NOTE
The unit will operate in high speed in Defrost Mode except during pump down in high ambient defrost.
4.9.2 Normal Defrost Operation, Ambient Air Temperature less than 80°F (26.7°C)
Engine
SV1 SV2 SV4
Speed
Note 3 Note 1 Open High
Clutch
UL1 & UL2 CSMV
Output
Engage Note 2 Load 100% Open
When the ambient air temperature is greater than 35°F (1.7°C) compressor discharge pressure will be monitored
during the defrost cycle.
NOTES
1. When in defrost, control of SV2 is the same as in Heat Mode. Refer to Section 4.4.3.
2. When Ambient Air Temperature is greater than 35°F (1.7°C) at the beginning of the defrost cycle and dis-
charge pressure rises to 340 psig (23.1 bar), UL1 will unload for the remainder of the cycle.
3. If discharge pressure rises to 350psig (23.8 bar), SV1 will open for 1 second and continue to cycle as often
as every 30 seconds to reduce the pressure to less than 350psig (23.8 bar).
4–11 62-11637
4.9.3 Normal Defrost Termination
Defrost terminates when the defrost termination temperature (DTT) and supply air temperature (SAT) both rise
higher than 55°F (12.8°C).
4.9.4 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence

The following sequence will be used to perform a Normal Defrost Termination:
1. The control system will place the engine in low speed and open SV1 & SV2.
2. The control system will return the CSMV to the same % it was prior to the initiation of defrost.
3. After a 3 second delay, SV4 will be closed.
4. After a few seconds the Clutch will be engaged. There will be a short delay before the engine can return to
High Speed.
5. At this point, the control system will return to normal temperature control and the data recorder will record a
Defrost Termination Event.
4.9.5 High Ambient Defrost Operation

High ambient defrost is used if the ambient air temperature is greater than 80°F (26.7°C). The high ambient defrost
cycle consists of the following:
4.9.5.1 Pump Down

The system pumps the low side of the refrigeration system down to a lower suction pressure, and reduces the
engine load normally seen at the beginning of a Defrost Cycle. The controls will be as follows:
Engine
SV1 SV2 SV4
Speed
Open Close Close Low
Clutch
UL1 & UL2 CSMV
Output
Engage Unload 100% Open
The unit will remain in pump down until the following conditions are met:
• A minimum of 30 seconds, and the suction pressure is less than 10 PSIG (0.68 bar) OR
• A maximum of 5-1/2 minutes, regardless of suction pressure.
4.9.5.2 High Ambient Defrost

Following pump down, the defrost cycle will begin. The controls will be as follows:
Engine
SV1 SV2 SV4
Speed
Note 3 Note 1 Open High
Clutch
UL1 & UL2 CSMV
Output
Disengage Note 2 Load 100% Open
NOTES
1. When in defrost, control of SV2 is the same as in Heat Mode. Refer to Section 4.4.3.
2. When the Ambient Air Temperature is greater than 35°F (1.7°C) at the beginning of the defrost cycle and
the discharge pressure rises to 340 psig (23.1 bar), UL1 will unload for the remainder of the cycle.
3. If discharge pressure rises to 350 psig (23.8 bar), SV1 will open for 1 second and continue to cycle as often
as every 30 seconds to reduce the pressure to less than 350 psig (23.8 bar).
62-11637 4–12
4.9.6 High Ambient Defrost Termination
The following sequence will be used for high ambient defrost termination:
1. The unit will remain in High Speed and the CSMV will reset to the position it was in at the start of defrost.
2. The control system will open SV1, open SV2 and unload UL1.
3. When suction pressure has risen 10 PSIG (0.7 bar) above start point or after 15 seconds, the control system
will place the unit in low speed, close SV4 and unload UL2.
4. After 5 seconds, the clutch will be engaged.
5. After an additional 5 seconds, the control system will return to normal temperature control and the data
recorder will record a Defrost Termination Event.
4.10 User Selected Override Operation

Four optional software override programs are available to the user. These programs include: Temperature Range
Lock, ProductShield, FreshProtect and Air Flow. Information on how the unit operates under these programs is pro-
vided in the following sub-paragraphs.
4.10.1 FreshProtectTM Supply Air Control

FreshProtect operates when:
• The FRESHPROTECT Functional Parameter is not OFF and
• The setpoint is above 32°F (0°C) and
• The TEMPERATURE CONTROL Functional Parameter is set for Return Air and
• The unit is in Continuous Operation with the return air temperature less than 10°F (5.6°C) above setpoint or
the unit is in Start–Stop Operation, return air temperature is within 5°F (2.8°C) of setpoint and criteria for
shutdown other than compartment temperature has not been met.
The FRESHPROTECT Functional Parameter may be set to:
Setting Supply Air Range
(Below Setpoint)
OFF NO LIMIT
A 2 to 5°F (1.1 to 2.8°C)
B 4 to 7°F (2.2 to 3.9°C)
C 6 to 9°F (3.3 to 5.0°C)
D 8 to 11°F (4.4 to 6.1°C)
E 10 to 13°F (5.6 to 7.2°C)
FreshProtect places a flexible limit on how far below setpoint the supply air temperature can drop while the unit is
running under the above listed conditions.
4.10.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2

Range Lock is a group of configurations which may be set to lock the unit into Start-Stop or Continuous Operation
for various setpoint ranges.
Two ranges are available for selection. Each range can be independently set to lock setpoint temperatures into
either Start-Stop or Continuous operation.
Each Range has a selectable minimum and maximum temperature, which define the span of the range. If some
setpoint temperatures are contained in both ranges due to range overlap, Range 1 will always have priority over
Range 2.
4–13 62-11637
Figure 4.4 Range Lock Settings - Non Overlapping
Range Lock 1 & 2
Range 2 is set for Range 1 is set for

0 to -22 F 28 to 55 F
(-17.8 to -30 C) (-2.2 to +12.8 C)
Range 2 Range 1
F -22 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
C -30 -23.3 -17.8 -12.2 -6.7 -1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7
Figure 4.5 Range Lock Settings - Overlapping
Range 1 always has priority

when Range 1 & 2 overlap
Range 1 is set for 32 to 42 F Range 2 is set for -22 to

(0 to 5.6 C) 89.6 F (-30 to 32 C)
Set for Continuous Set for Start-Stop
Range 2
Range
1
F -22 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
C -30 -23.3 -17.8 -12.2 -6.7 -1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7
Typically, Range 1 and Range 2 are used to control different setpoint ranges when IntelliSet is not active. For units
with IntelliSet, because each IntelliSet is generally programmed for a specific product, only Range Lock 1 is used
to hold the unit in either the Start/Stop or Continuous Operation, and Range Lock 2 is left OFF.
For example (see Figure 4.4), if Continuous Operation is ALWAYS required whenever the setpoint is between
28°F and 55°F (-2.2°C and +12.8°C), Range 1 will be set for Continuous, with a Minimum Temperature of 28°F (-
2.2°C) and a Maximum Temperature of 55°F (-12.8°C). Should Continuous Operation ALWAYS also be required
with setpoints between -22 and 0°F (-30 and -17.8°C), then Range 2 will be set for Continuous, with a Minimum
Temperature of -22°F (-30°C) and a Maximum Temperature of 0°F (-17.8°C). Any setpoint outside of Range 1 or 2
will allow changes between Start-Stop and Continuous.
62-11637 4–14
The primary time that it is important to determine which range is to be Range 1 and which is to be Range 2 is when
the ranges overlap each other.
In example 2 (see Figure 4.5), the ranges have been set to lock all setpoints into Start-Stop, except for a small
range between +32° and +42°F (0° and 5.6°C) where the unit will always operate in Continuous. Range 1 Minimum
Temperature has been set for +32°F (0°C), and Maximum Temperature of +42°F (5.6°C). Range 2 has been set for
a Minimum Temperature of -22°F (-30°C) and a Maximum Temperature of +89.6°F (32°C). The unit will switch to
Continuous when the temperature is between +32° and +42°F (0° and 5.6°C) because, when the ranges overlap
each other the Range 1 settings will take priority.
4.10.3 ProductShield
ProductShield is a group of Configurations that work together to allow improved operating efficiency while providing
customized product protection.
Each ProductShield setting allows the user to select an ambient temperature range in which to operate. The Mini-
mum and Maximum range values can be set to OFF, or the allowed value range.
4.10.3.1 ProductShield: Econo

ProductShield Econo allows the APX Control System to automatically switch between Start/Stop Operation and
Continuous Operation. This allows maximum product protection while providing power savings when ambient tem-
perature is in the preset range. While running in ProductShield Econo the FRESHROTECT Functional Parameter
settings will be effective.
ProductShield Econo - Go to Start-Stop Operation.
When the unit is set to Continuous Operation, ProductShield Econo allows the unit to run in Start/Stop Operation
when:
• The ProductShield Econo Configuration is set to GO TO S/S AND
• The unit has run in Continuous Operation for a minimum of either 15 minutes, or the Minimum Run Time
Functional Parameter setting (whichever time is longer) AND
• The ambient temperature falls within the pre-programmed temperature range AND
• The unit is not already running in ProductShield Winter.
The operator can also pre-program a maximum evaporator coil temperature differential (delta-t) between the return
air and supply air temperatures as an additional criteria for switching to Start/Stop Operation. The unit must bring
the delta-t below this setting before going to Start/Stop Operation if this option is chosen.
NOTE
In ProductShield Econo: Go to Start/Stop, the delta-t must be lower than the value selected in order to
enter Start/Stop.
Once the control system detects that the above criteria have been met, the unit will switch from Continuous Operation
to a Start/Stop Off Cycle for the MINIMUM OFF TIME Functional Parameter setting. During the Minimum Off Time,
the RESTART OVERRIDE TEMPERATURE Functional Parameter setting can cause the unit to restart to protect the
load. After the Minimum Off Time has expired the unit will return to Continuous Operation when the return air tem-
perature is more than ±3.6° F (± 2° C) away from setpoint in the perishable range, or +3.6°F (+2°C) above setpoint in
the frozen range.
When the unit restarts, it will return to Continuous Operation for a minimum of 15 minutes or the MINIMUM RUN
TIME Functional Parameter setting, whichever time is longer. The original activation conditions must then be met in
order for the unit to return to ProductShield Econo: Start/Stop.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is set to OFF, and ProductShield Econo Minimum Temperature
is set to a temperature, the ambient air temperature will be considered to be “inside the range” whenever the ambi-
ent air temperature is higher than the Minimum Temperature setting, with no upper limit.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is set to a temperature, and ProductShield Econo Minimum
Temperature is set to OFF, the ambient air temperature will be considered to be “inside the range” whenever the
ambient air temperature is lower than the Maximum Temperature setting, with no lower limit.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is set to OFF, and ProductShield Econo Minimum Temperature
is set to OFF, the ambient air temperature will be considered to be “inside the range” at any ambient air tempera-
ture.
4–15 62-11637
ProductShield Econo: Go To Start/Stop Examples:
The following examples apply in situations where all other Start/Stop conditions have been met.
Example 1 - If the Minimum is set to 30°F (-1.1°C) and the Maximum is set to 40°F (4.4°C) and the ambient air tem-
perature falls between these temperatures, the unit operation can change to Econo Start/Stop.
Example 2 - If the Minimum is set to 30°F (-1.1°C) and the Maximum is set to OFF and the ambient air temperature
is above 30°F (-1.1°C), the unit operation can change to Econo Start/Stop.
Example 3 - If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Maximum is set to 40°F (4.4°C) and the ambient air temperature
falls below 40°F (1.7°C), the unit operation can change to Econo Start/Stop.
Example 4 If both the Minimum and the Maximum are set to OFF, unit operation can change to Econo Start/Stop
at any ambient temperature.
ProductShield Econo - Go to Continuous Operation.
When the unit is set for Start/Stop, ProductShield Econo allows the unit to run in Continuous Operation when:
• ProductShield Econo configuration is set to GO TO CONTINUOUS AND
• The unit has run in Start/Stop Operation for a minimum of 15 minutes OR the MINIMUM RUN TIME Func-
tional Parameter setting (whichever time is longer) AND
• The ambient temperature falls outside the pre-programmed temperature range AND
• The unit is not already running in ProductShield Winter.
Once the control system detects that the above criteria have been met, the unit will switch from Start/Stop to Con-
tinuous Operation for a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes the unit will return to Start/Stop if the ambient
temperature enters the pre-programmed temperature range. While the unit is running, the FRESHPROTECT
Functional Parameter settings will be effective.
NOTE
Delta-t logic is not used or available when ProductShield Econo - Go To Continuous is active.
ProductShield Econo: Go To Continuous Examples

Example 1 - If the Minimum is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and the Maximum is set to 90°F (32.2°C) and the ambient air
temperature falls outside these temperatures, the unit operation can change to Econo Continuous Operation.
Example 2 - If the Minimum is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and the Maximum is set to OFF and the ambient air temperature
falls below 0°F (-17.8°C), the unit operation can change to Econo Continuous Operation.
Example 3 - If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Maximum is set to 90°F (32.2°C) and the ambient air tempera-
ture falls above 90°F (32.2°C), the unit operation can change to Econo Continuous Operation.
Example 4 - If both the Minimum and Maximum are set to OFF, ProductShield Econo: Go To Continuous can not
operate as there is no range for the ambient to fall outside of.
4.10.3.2 ProductShield: High Air

ProductShield High Air allows the control system to automatically switch the engine from low speed to high speed,
and thereby provide high evaporator air flow. This allows maximum product protection when certain conditions are
met while providing for power savings when High Air is not required.
Operation in High Air is controlled by four Configurations; PRODUCTSHIELD HIGH AIR, HIGH AIR MINIMUM
TEMPERATURE, HIGH AIR MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE and HIGH AIR DELTA-T.
• The PRODUCT SHIELD HIGH AIR Configuration may be set to OFF or ON. ProductShield High Air is only
active when the Configuration is set to ON.
• The High Air ambient air temperature range is defined by the HIGH AIR MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE Config-
uration setting and the HIGH AIR MINIMUM TEMPERATURE Configuration setting. When a value is
entered for both of these configurations, the unit will enter High Air when ambient temperature is above the
high setting or below the low setting.
• When the HIGH AIR MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE Configuration is set for a value and High Air Minimum
Temperature Configuration is set to OFF, the engine will switch to high speed when the ambient temperature
is above the setting.
62-11637 4–16
• When the HIGH AIR MINIMUM TEMPERATURE Configuration is set for a value and High Air Maximum
Temperature Configuration is set to OFF, the engine will switch to high speed when the ambient temperature
is below the setting.
• When both the HIGH AIR MINIMUM TEMPERATURE Configuration and the HIGH AIR MAXIMUM TEM-
PERATURE Configuration are set to OFF, ProductShield High Air is not active.
• If a value is entered in the HIGH AIR DELTA-T Configuration, delta-t must be above the value before the
engine will switch to High Speed.
Once the APX Control System determines that the criteria have been met, the unit will switch to High Air. The unit
will continue to operate in High Air for a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes the unit will return to normal oper-
ation if ambient temperature falls inside the pre-programmed temperature range by ±3.6°F (±2°C).
If the unit shuts down in Auto Start/Stop during High Air, it will not be in High Air when it restarts and will return to
normal operation for a minimum of 15 minutes. The original activation conditions must then be met in order for the
unit to return to high air.
4.10.3.3 ProductShield: Winter

When the unit is set for Start/Stop operation, ProductShield Winter allows it to switch to Continuous Operation
when the ambient temperature falls below the pre-programmed temperature. This helps protect the unit from the
possibility of cold weather issues.
Once the control system detects that the ambient temperature has dropped below the pre-programmed tempera-
ture, the unit will switch into ProductShield Winter which will force the unit to operate in Continuous Operation.
The unit will continue to operate in Continuous Operation for a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the unit
will return to auto Start/Stop if the ambient temperature has risen above the pre-programmed ProductShield Winter
temperature.
4.10.3.4 ProductShield Fresh:

• When the unit is operating with the FreshProtect Functional Parameter active, the ProductShield Fresh
Configuration may be used to override the FreshProtect setting when the unit is operating under high
ambient conditions.
• Operation in ProductShield Fresh is controlled by three Configurations; PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH,
PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH TEMPERATURE and PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH PROTECT.
• The PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH Configuration may be set to OFF or ON. With the Configuration set to
ON, the override is allowed.
• The PRODUCT SHIELD FRESH TEMP Configuration may be set from 70 to 90°F (21 to 48°C). Override
will be allowed when ambient temperature is above the setting. The unit will return to the FreshProtect
setting when ambient falls to 3.6°F (2°C) below the setting.
• The PRODUCT SHIELD FRESH PROTECT setting establishes the overriding limit on how far below set-
point the supply air temperature can drop. The settings displayed for selection will depend on the Fresh-
Protect Functional Parameter setting for this application. Only the values that allow less temperature
drop will be available for selection. For example, if the FreshProtect Functional Parameter is set to C,
then the ProductShield FreshProtect overrides displayed for selection will be A & B.
NOTE
All of the ProductShield settings may be viewed in the Data List (Refer to Section 3.14). For units with
IntelliSets, the Data List will reflect the ProductShield settings for the IntelliSet that is currently active.
4.10.4 Air Flow

The AIR FLOW Functional Parameter may be set to place the unit in continuous high air flow when the setpoint is
in perishable range. The Parameter may be set to NORMAL or HIGH. The factory default setting is NORMAL.
Some products generate a considerable amount of heat (due to respiration) during transportation. This frequently
occurs with produce. The HIGH selection can be used for these loads, since continuous high air flow may be
required to keep the entire load at a constant temperature. The engine will remain in high speed when HIGH is
selected, unless a low speed override (refer to Section 4.11.2) is active.
4–17 62-11637
4.11 Preprogrammed Software Overrides
4.11.1 Cargo Protect Mode

The control system will activate Cargo Protect Mode when alarms 00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT)
and 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR activate at the same time.
• If the setpoint is in the perishable range (refer to Section 4.5.2), the unit will shutdown.
• If the setpoint is in the Frozen Range the engine will go to low speed.
The MessageCenter will display “WARNING: NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL” when the unit is operating in Cargo
Protect Mode.
4.11.2 Engine Speed Overrides

This section lists the different factors that determine engine speed (high or low) in addition to the speed controls
used in temperature control.
Speed Control Overrides in priority order are:
1. High Ambient.
If ambient temperature is 120°F (48.9°C) or above during the engine starting sequence, the unit will run in low
speed for the first 2 minutes of operation. This applies to Heat and Cool modes only - not Defrost.
2. Low Suction/High Discharge Pressure.
If UL1 has unloaded and the suction pressure is less than 3 PSIG (0.2 bar) for at least 20 seconds or the discharge
pressure is greater than the calculated maximum for more than five seconds, the engine will be forced to run in low
speed for a minimum of five minutes. After five minutes, the engine can return to high speed if suction pressure is
greater than 3 PSIG (0.2 bar) for 30 seconds or discharge pressure is less than the calculated maximum for 30
seconds.
3. Engine Coolant Warm-Up.
The engine will run in low speed until the coolant is above 79°F (26°C).
4. Defrost.
The engine is generally in high speed but will run in low speed during the high ambient pump down and at the end
of the defrost cycle while the refrigerant control solenoids are realigned.
5. Door/Remote Switch Configuration.
If the DOOR/REMOTE SWITCH Configuration is set for low speed, the engine will run in low speed when the door/
remote switch is open/active.
6. RAT & SAT Alarms.
When alarms 00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT) and 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR are both
active at the same time the control system will enter Cargo Protect Mode. Refer to Section 4.11.1.
7. Frozen Setpoint Override.
If the setpoint is in the frozen range and temperature is below setpoint, the engine will operate in low speed.
8. Air Flow.
When setpoint is in the perishable range and the AIR FLOW Functional Parameter is set to HIGH, the engine will
operate in high speed.
9. Product Shield High Air.
The engine is forced to high speed if the PRODUCT SHIELD HIGH AIR Configuration is active, refer to Section
4.10.3
10. High Speed Delay.
Whenever the engine starts, the unit will remain in low speed according to the Continuous or Start-Stop High Speed
Delay Functional Parameter setting.
11. Start-Stop Frozen Range.
When in Start-Stop Operation with a setpoint in the frozen range after the minimum run time has expired, the
engine will be forced to high speed if the refrigerated compartment temperature is not yet down to setpoint.
62-11637 4–18
12. High Speed Delay.
Whenever the engine is in low speed, transition to high speed will be delayed for the HIGH SPEED DELAY Config-
uration setting.
13. Range Protect.
When the unit is operating in Range Protect and the compartment temperature is inside the protected range, while
all other conditions to allow an off cycle are not met the engine will operate in low speed.
4.11.3 Unloader Control Overrides

This section lists the different factors that determine the operation (de-energizing / loading and energizing / unload-
ing) of the unloaders in addition to the unloader control used in temperature control.
There is a minimum delay of 10 seconds between LOADING and UNLOADING cylinders under all operating condi-
tions except when the engine is starting.
NOTE
In all of the following instances UL1 refers to the Front Unloader and UL2 refers to the Rear Unloader.
Unloader Overrides, in priority order, are as follows. If an override only applies or takes effect for one unloader,
continue down the priority list for the other unloader:
1. High Ambient.
If ambient temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C) when the engine starts UL1 and UL2 will both be unloaded for the
first 2 minutes of unit operation.
2. Discharge Pressure.
If discharge pressure is greater than 414.7 PSIG (22.22 bar) UL1 and UL2 will unload.
3. Engine Power Unloading.
If the actual engine RPM is less than the desired RPM, this is defined as engine RPM droop. When the system is
running in heat or cool with the CSMV controlling maximum operating pressure (refer to Section 4.11.4) and the
engine RPM droop is greater than 30 RPM, UL2 will unload for a minimum of two minutes. If, the system is operat-
ing in cool and, after 10 seconds in 4 cylinder operation, the engine RPM drop is still greater than 30 RPM, UL2 will
unload for a minimum of two minutes.
4. Throttle Position Delay.
If the unit is running in two or four cylinder operation due to engine power unloading, and the rack position sensor
is greater than 90%, loading of cylinders will be delayed until the rack position is less than 90% or for a maximum
of 80 seconds.
5. Low Suction Pressure/High Discharge Pressure.
Unloading is used along with low speed to increase the suction pressure or decrease the discharge pressure.
These steps in capacity reduction are taken in the following order: 6-cylinder high speed to 4-cylinder high speed to
4-cylinder low speed to 2-cylinder low speed. Unloading will take place if the following conditions occur: discharge
pressure is greater than 435 PSIG (29.6 bar) for 5 seconds or suction pressure is less than 0 PSIG (0bar) for 30
seconds.
Therefore, if the engine is running in high speed 6 cylinder operation and one of the conditions listed above occurs,
UL1 will be unloaded (6 to 4 cylinders) and the engine will remain in high speed. If the discharge pressure does not
drop to less than 410 PSIG or suction pressure does not increase to above 5 PSIG, the engine will transition to low
speed and the compressor will remain running on 4 cylinders. If the condition still does not change, UL2 will unload
and the compressor will operate on 2 cylinders, still in low speed.
Once the engine transitions to low speed, or one or both of the unloaders unload due to these conditions the unit
will remain in low speed, and the unloader(s) will remain unloaded for a minimum of 5 minutes.
6. Defrost.
Refer to Section 4.9.
7. Cargo Protect Mode.
Refer to Section 4.11.1.
4–19 62-11637
8. Start/Stop Override.
If the system is running in a Start/Stop run cycle, and the minimum run time has expired and the compartment tem-
perature is not at setpoint, both unloaders will be loaded to increase unit capacity so that set point may be reached
more quickly, and allow an Off Cycle.
9. Continuous Run Low Speed Null Mode.
UL1 and UL2 will load and unload periodically as the APX Control System makes capacity adjustments to maintain
compartment temperature when it is close to setpoint.
10. Range Protect.
When the unit is operating in Range Protect IntelliSet and the box temperature is inside the protected range, and at
least one other condition to allow an Off Cycle is not met (i.e. Battery Volts, Battery Charging Amps, Minimum Run
Time, Engine Coolant Temperature) UL1 & UL2 will unload.
4.11.4 CSMV Control Overrides

1. Engine Rack (Throttle) Position Limit.
The APX Control System monitors the engine throttle position reading provided by the ENCU rack position sensor
(RPS). If the position is greater than or equal to the maximum position the CSMV will move toward the closed posi-
tion as required to lower the engine load, and thereby, the rack position.
2. Engine RPM.
When the engine throttle position has been more than 90% for three seconds the APX Control System will monitor
actual engine RPM verses desired engine RPM (if the actual RPM is less than the desired RPM, this is defined as
engine RPM droop.) If the droop is above 30 RPM, the CSMV will move toward the closed position as required to
eliminate the droop by lowering the load on the engine.
3. Discharge Pressure Control.
The APX Control System monitors discharge pressure. When the pressure is above the calculated maximum
(absolute maximum is 435.3 PSIG = 29.62 bar), the CSMV will move toward the closed position as required to
bring the pressure below 400.0 = 27.22 bar).
4. High Suction Pressure Control.
The APX Control System monitors suction pressure. When the pressure is above the calculated maximum the
CSMV will move toward the closed position as required to lower the pressure.
5. Low Suction Pressure Control.
The APX Control System monitors suction pressure. When both UL1 & UL2 are unloaded and the pressure is
below the calculated minimum the CSMV will move toward the open position as required to raise the pressure.
62-11637 4–20
SECTION 5 - CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
5.1 INTERFACE METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5.2 TECHNICIAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Technician Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2.2 Inactive Alarms .......................................................... 5–3
5.2.3 Configuration Settings ..................................................... 5–5
5.2.4 Component Test Mode .................................................... 5–6
5.2.5 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.3 USB MEMORY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.3.1 Data Transfer USB Memory Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.3.2 PC Mode ............................................................... 5–9
5.3.3 Downloading Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.3.4 Installing Software ....................................................... 5–12
5.3.5 Transferring Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.4 TRU-TECH & TRU-VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.4.1 TRU-Tech ............................................................. 5–15
5.4.2 TRU–View ............................................................. 5–15
5.4.3 Connecting Computer and Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.1 Pre-Replacement Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5.5.2 Main Microprocessor Replacement .......................................... 5–17
5.5.3 Main Microprocessor Setup ................................................ 5–18
5.5.4 Configurations Via Display Mounted Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
5.5.5 Functional Parameters Via Display Mounted Keys .............................. 5–19
5.5.6 DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech ....................................... 5–19
5.5.7 System Final Checkout ................................................... 5–19
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 5
CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
5.1 INTERFACE METHODS
There are four methods for interfacing with the APX Control System:
1. Driver/Advanced User Interface - Driver & Advanced User Interface activities such as start, stop, Pretrip,
reading alarms, reading data and changing Functional Parameters may all be performed using the display
mounted keys (refer to Section 3).
2. Technician Mode - code based access. Technician Mode includes: technician hour meters, inactive alarms,
configuration settings, Component Test Mode and Service Mode.
3. USB memory device - Activities using the USB memory device include, PC Mode, downloading data files,
installing software, and transferring configuration files.
4. TRU-Tech/TRU-View - Access using a computer and service cable.
5.2 TECHNICIAN MODE

Technician Mode allows the technician to view inactive alarms, view additional hour meters, work with Configura-
tions, test unit components and service the refrigeration system. Instructions for entering Technician Mode are pro-
vided below.
Figure 5.1 Technician Mode

Selections
TECH
MODE
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode press
the MENU key until the TECH MODE soft key is displayed. If TECH MODE does not display, place the sys-
tem in Advanced User Mode (refer to Section 3.13).
2. Press the TECH MODE soft key. Enter the master technician PIN code. The factory installed master techni-
cian PIN code is 7435. Enter this code by pressing the 3&4 keys simultaneously, then pressing the 4 key,
then the 3 key, then the 1&4 keys simultaneously. Once the code is entered, press the “=” key to enter the
Technicians Menu.
START/STOP DIESEL COOL TECHNICIANS MENU (1 OF 4)
34.3
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
34
COMPONENT TEST MODE
Enter Code SERVICE MODE
__________________ CANCEL TECHNICIAN MODE/PIN ACCESS
oF
BOX TEMPERATURE SETPOINT oF END OF LIST
STATUS OK BACK EXIT
5–1 62-11637
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of menu items. Press the “=” key to enter the settings or test
modes.
NOTICE
position.
4. Once activity requiring use of Technician Mode is complete, Technician Mode should be manually canceled.
• To cancel from the TECHNICIANS MENU screen, highlight CANCEL TECHNICIAN MODE/PIN ACCESS
and then press the “=” key. This will return he system to the Advance User Mode.
• To cancel from any screen, press and then release the two outside soft keys simultaneously (NOTE: the
system will not respond) and then press the “=” key. The system will return to Driver Mode.
5.2.1 Technician Hour Meters

Hour meters, other than the standard hour meters, are available for viewing when the control system is in Techni-
cian Mode. Instructions for viewing these hour meters are provided below.
Figure 5.2 Technician Hour Meters

Selections
1
METER DATA 2
1. Enter Technician Mode. While in the TECHNICIANS MENU screen, press the BACK or EXIT key and then
press the MENU key until HOUR METERS is displayed.
2. Press the HOUR METER soft key to display the hour meter screen.
HOUR METERS (1 OF 4)
STANDARD HOUR METERS
OTHER METERS & COUNTERS
NOTE: This line will only
display if one or more hour
MAINTENANCE HOUR METERS
meters has timed out and is
RESET HOUR METERS
ready to be reset.
END OF LIST
BACK EXIT
62-11637 5–2
3. The hour meter screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the
available selections. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, Press the “=” key to view the data.
Engine Protect Hours

STANDARD HOUR METERS (2 OF 3) Switch On Protect Hours OTHER METERS & COUNTERS
ENGINE HOURS 1050 HOURS Engine Sleep Hours
SWITCH ON HOURS 1400 HOURS Switch On Sleep Hours METER/COUNTER LIST
TOTAL RUN HOURS 1150 HOURS High Speed Hours
Clutch Cycles
END OF LIST Start Cycles END OF LIST
LOCK BACK EXIT LOCK BACK EXIT
SCREEN SCREEN
Number of hours
or cycles
MAINTENANCE METERS RESET PM HOUR METERS (2 OF 2)
TIME LEFT TO (METER NAME) ##### High Speed Hours TIME LEFT TO ENGINE HOURS 0
Clutch Cycles TIME LEFT TO SWITCH ON HOURS 0
Start Cycles
Switch On Hours
END OF LIST END OF LIST
Engine Hours
LOCK BACK EXIT
SCREEN
As Configured RESET BACK EXIT
To reset an hour meter, highlight the meter

and press the RESET soft key. In this example,
the Switch On Meter would be reset.
4. The number of meters displayed depends on the settings for this unit. Press the BACK key to return to the
HOUR METERS screen or the EXIT key to return to the default screen. Once activity requiring use of Tech-
nician Mode is complete, Technician Mode should be manually canceled.
5.2.2 Inactive Alarms

There are two sections in the Alarm list: an active alarm section and an inactive alarm section. The APX Control
System can hold up to 16 alarms in the combined lists. The lists can be read via the display screen or using TRU-
Tech. Alarms in these sections are in the order in which the alarms activate and inactivate, respectively. On startup,
all alarms are moved to the inactive list. If an inactive alarm becomes active, the alarm is moved from the inactive
list to the active list.
Each alarm can only be present in either the active or inactive list at any given time. As conditions change, alarms
may be moved from the active list to the inactive list and back.
Alarms are also recorded in the DataLink data recorder. They are recorded at the time they become active, and the
time they become inactive.
Instructions for reading and clearing the Inactive Alarms are provided in Figure 5.3. For a complete list of Alarms
and troubleshooting information Refer to Section 9.
NOTE
The Inactive Alarm List is also called the Technician’s List. Only qualified refrigeration technicians
should access the inactive list. It is not intended for the use of drivers or Advanced Users.
5–3 62-11637
Figure 5.3 Inactive Alarms
ACTIVE ALARMS
NO ACTIVE ALARMS
CLEAR INACTIVE BACK

ALARMS ALARMS
INACTIVE ALARMS
I00093 CHECK START-UP BUZZER
P00144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT
6 P00141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER 4
CLEAR CLEAR BACK EXIT

5 INACTIVE ALL
1. Enter the Technician Mode, then press the ALARM key.
2. Press the INACTIVE ALARMS soft key.
3. If there are inactive alarms, the alarm number will be displayed preceded by the letter “I” (inactive alarm) or
“P” (inactive Pretrip alarm). The last alarm that occurred will be the first alarm displayed and so on.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of alarms.
5. To clear only the inactive alarms and leave the active alarms, press the CLEAR INACTIVE soft key. The dis-
play will provide an “INACTIVE ALARMS CLEARED” message to confirm the alarms have cleared.
6. To clear both the active and inactive alarms, press the CLEAR ALL soft key. The operators message panel
will provide an “ALL ALARMS CLEARED” message to confirm the alarms have cleared.
7. If there are no inactive alarms, the operators message panel will provide a “NO INACTIVE ALARMS” mes-
sage and return to the default display after 5 seconds.
NOTICE
position.
62-11637 5–4
5.2.3 Configuration Settings
Configuration settings match the control system to the unit and define control system action under various opera-
tional conditions. Instructions for working with Configurations are provided below.
1. Enter the Technicians Menu, highlight CONFIGURATION SETTINGS and then press the “=” key.
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 11)

UN IT IDENTIFICATION
SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK
START-STOP SETTINGS
INTELLISET & PRODUCT SHIELD
BACK EXIT
2. Eleven Configuration sub-menus will be available. To scroll through the Configuration sub-menu list, press
the ▲ or ▼ key. The sub-menus will highlight as the list is scrolled. The available sub-menus are listed in
Table 5–1.
3. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, press the “=” key. The individual Configurations within the sub-menu
will display. There are two types of Configuration screens, data entry screens and value selection screens.
4. Data entry screens are displayed for the UNIT MODEL #, TRAILER ID #, UNIT SERIAL #, SET DATE &
TIME and SET NEW HOURS (in a replacement main microprocessor) Configurations. To change a data
entry screen press the “=” key with the configuration highlighted.
UNIT IDENTIFICATION (2 OF 4) SET # SET DATE AND TIME

UNIT MODEL #: NDL233N0AFA
23 MAY 2015 23:58
TRAILER ID#: MY TRAILER #1
UNIT SERIQL #: NAR91108766 INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS
SET DATA & TIME: MAY 18 2015 11:58 Press UP/DOWN To Select Field Press UP/DOWN To Select Field
EQUAL To Modify Field EQUAL To Modify Field
BACK EXIT CANCEL SAVE CANCEL SAVE
a. A data entry screen will be displayed with the entry points in a horizontal row of “fields”. The first selection
“field” will be highlighted. Press the “=” key to enter the field then press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the
available selections.
• When setting a number, the numbers 1 to 9 and the letters A to Z will be displayed.
• When entering the date & time the day, month, year, hour or minute will be displayed. The system uses a
24 hour clock. Hours 00 to 11 are AM and hours 12 to 23 are PM.
• With the desired selection in the field, press the “=” key to save the field entry.
b. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to move to the next field or to the desired field. Press the “=” key to enter the field then
press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the available selections. With the desired selection in the field, press
the “=” key to save the field entry.
c. Continue as above to enter additional field changes as required.
d. When all the fields are displayed as desired, press the SAVE soft key to save the setting into memory.
e. Continue as above to enter additional UNIT IDENTIFICATION changes as required.
5–5 62-11637
5. To change a value selection screen, press the “=” key with the desired Configuration sub-menu highlighted
as in Sample Screen A. The individual Configurations within the sub-menu will display as in Sample Screen
B. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the individual Configurations. The individual Configurations will
highlight as the list is scrolled.
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (5 OF 11) CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 3) CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 3)
ENGINE SETTINGS CONFIGURATION 1 SELECTION CONFIGURATION 1 SELECTION
ALARM SETTINGS CONFIGURATION 2 SELECTION CONFIGURATION 2 SELECTION
HOUR METERS CONFIGURATION 3 SELECTION CONFIGURATION 3 SELECTION
OTHER SETTINGS
RAIL SETTINGS
END OF LIST
BACK EXIT BACK EXIT BACK EXIT
Sample Screen A Sample Screen B Sample Screen C

a. With the desired individual Configuration highlighted, press the “=” key. The highlight will move to the pres-
ent setting. As in Sample Screen C. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the available settings. With the
desired setting highlighted, press the “=” key to select. Refer to Table 5–1 for information on the settings in
each sub-menu and resultant System actions.
b. Continue as above to enter additional sub-menus and set additional individual Configurations as required.
NOTICE
position.
5.2.4 Component Test Mode

Component Test Mode allows the technician to energize individual circuits for 5 minutes at a time. The engine is
not allowed to start when the System is in Component Test Mode. Instructions for entering the Component Test
Mode are provided below.
1. Enter the Technicians Menu, highlight COMPONENT TEST MODE and then press the “=” key.
Figure 5.4 Component Test Mode
COMPONENT TEST MODE (1 OF 9)

UNLOADER 1
UNLOADER 2
SV1
SV2
BACK EXIT
62-11637 5–6
2. To scroll through the tests press the ▲ or ▼ key. The tests will highlight as the list is scrolled. The available
tests include:
• UNLOADER 1 - MM output @ 3MM-6
• UNLOADER 2 - MM output @ 3MM-8
• SV1 - MM output @ 3MM-1
• Clutch Relay - MM output @ 3MM-11
• ENCU Power Circuit (Run Relay) - MM output @ 3MM- 9
• Engine Preheat (Glow Plug Relay) - MM output @ 3MM- 14
• Buzzer - MM ground @ 3MM- 15
3. With the desired test highlighted, press the “=” key. For example, if UNLOADER 1 is selected, the unloader
will come on, and “UNLOADER 1 OFF IN 5 MINUTES” will display. The minutes will count down to 0 at
which time the circuit will be de-energized, and the operator message panel will return to the test selection
screen.
COMPONENT TEST MODE
UNLOADER 1 OFF IN 4 MIN

AMP DRAW: 2.0 AMPS
RESET CANCEL/
TIMER STOP
4. When a component is energized in Component Test Mode, the AMP DRAW display initially shows the cur-
rent draw of the system, after a few seconds the display will change to reflect the current draw of the system
plus the added component. For example, if a component is energized in Component Test Mode, the AMP
DRAW display might initially show 0.75 Amps, then after a few seconds, the AMP DRAW display will change
to 1.0 Amps. The difference between the two readings reflects the current draw of the component being
tested; in this case the component is drawing 0.25 Amps.
5. To extend the test time, press the RESET TIMER soft key. The time will reset to 5 minutes. To stop the test
press the CANCEL/STOP soft key.
6. Continue as above to test additional components as required.
NOTICE
position.
5–7 62-11637
5.2.5 Service Mode
! CAUTION
or evacuating.
NOTE
If the START/RUN - OFF switch is toggled to the OFF position, the System will exit Service Mode.
Enter Service Mode:
1. Enter the Technicians Menu, highlight SERVICE MODE and then press the “=” key.
2. “TRANSITION TO SERVICE MODE” and then “ENTERING SERVICE MODE” will display in the operator
message panel. When entering Service Mode the system brings the CSMV and EVXV to 100% open and
energizes SV2 & UL1.
3. Once the CSMV and EVXV are 100% open, “RECOVER/ LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE” is displayed in the
operator message panel.
4. Refrigerant recovery, leak checking, or evacuation may be performed on the unit at this time. Refer to Ser-
vice Section 8.
5. The unit should remain in the RECOVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE as refrigerant recovery or leak testing
procedures are performed.
6. If the message in the operator message panel changes to “CHARGE MODE - HOLD = TO EXIT” do not
continue refrigerant recovery, leak testing or evacuation procedures. Exit Service Mode and then re-enter,
ensuring that “RECOVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE” is displayed in the operator message panel before
continuing refrigerant recovery or leak testing.
7. During evacuation, the control system will monitor the pressure transducer readings.
8. The System will remain in “RECOVER / LEAKCHK / EVAC MODE” as evacuation is started.
9. As the refrigeration system is evacuated, the system pressure will go into a deep vacuum. Once the CSP is
less than 20 inhg and the CDP is less than+5 psig the operator message panel will change to “EVAC/
CHARGE MODE”. The position of the CSMV, EVXV, SV2 & UL1 do not change in this mode.
10. Following the evacuation, as the charging procedures are started the control system will bring the CSMV
and EVXV to 0% open and de-energize SV2& UL1 when both of the transducers rise above +5 psig (0.34
bar).
11. When the CSMV and EVXV are closed, “CHARGE MODE – HOLD = TO EXIT” is displayed in the operator
message panel. This action is taken to prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor during charging.
12. To exit Service Mode at any time, press the EXIT soft key. “EXITING SERVICE MODE” will then display in
the operator message panel. When Service Mode is exited, the control system brings the CSMV and EVXV
to 0% open and SV2 & UL–1 will be de-energized.
NOTICE
position.
62-11637 5–8
5.3 USB MEMORY DEVICES
Instructions for using USB memory devices with the APX Control System are provided below.
5.3.1 Data Transfer USB Memory Device

Carrier Transicold APX USB Flash Drive, CTD P/N 12-00734-00 must be used:
• The device may be used to enter PC Mode.
• Data files from the DataLink data recorder may be transferred from the APX Control System to the “DOWN-
LOAD’ folder.
• Software files may be transferred to the “PROGRAM” folder and then transferred to the APX Control Sys-
tem.
• IntelliSet/Configuration files may be transferred to the “CONFIG” folder and then transferred to the APX
Control System.
5.3.2 PC Mode
PC Mode allows the technician to access the control system without the engine running. When in PC Mode the
System is fully functional, all operator interfaces may be performed and the operation of the system may be
demonstrated, again, without the unit actually operating. Instruction for entering and using PC Mode are provided
below.
! WARNING
Do not toggle the START/RUN - OFF switch out of the OFF position when in PC Mode or the
unit will start.
Figure 5.5 PC Mode
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
READING USB
34
SETPOINT oF
USB Port
5–9 62-11637
1. With the START/RUN - OFF switch in the OFF position, remove protective cover from the USB interface port
and insert a Data Transfer USB. The USB activity LED will flash, the Carrier Transicold logo will display and
then the MessageCenter will display one or more USB soft key descriptions.
NOTES:
a. A PC–USB service cable (Carrier Transicold P/N 22-04253–20) may be used.

b. If Configured to do so, the System will prompt for entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT
DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
2. Press the “PC MODE’ soft key. DO NOT remove USB or cable at this time.
3. The MessageCenter will display “PC MODE”. The System is now in PC Mode. The purpose of PC Mode is
to allow demonstration of the System features and allow changes to the System while the engine is not
actually running. It is important to note that any changes saved to memory while in PC Mode will remain
after leaving PC Mode.
NOTICE
position.
4. If Technician Mode is entered while in PC Mode, once Technician Mode activity is complete, re-enter the
Technicians Menu, highlight “CANCEL TECHNICIAN MODE/PIN ACCESS” and then press the “=” key to
take the system out of Technician Mode before taking the System out of PC Mode.
5. When use of PC Mode is completed, remove the USB or cable. “SHUTTING DOWN - PLEASE WAIT” may
be displayed or after a few seconds, the display will go blank. Replace the cover on the USB port.
62-11637 5–10
5.3.3 Downloading Data Files
Instructions for downloading data from the DataLink data recorder to a Data Transfer USB memory device are
provided below.
Figure 5.6 Downloading Data Files
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
READING USB
34
SETPOINT oF
USB Port
1. Data may be downloaded with the system powered up or turned off. Remove protective cover from the USB
interface port and insert the Carrier Transicold APX USB Flash Drive, CTD P/N 12-00734-00. The Mes-
sageCenter will display READING USB.
NOTE
If configured to do so, the System will prompt for entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to
“PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
2. The Message Center will then display the USB soft keys. (The INSTALL SOFTWARE and INSTALL SET-
TINGS soft keys will not display if the applicable files are not loaded on the Data transfer USB device.)
START/STOP DIESEL COOL DATA EXTRACTION (1 OF 4)
34.3
EXTRACT: All Data
34
EXTRACT: Last 30 Days
3 EXTRACT: Last 7 Days
EXTRACT: Quick Download
BOX TEMPERATURE oF SETPOINT oF END OF LIST
DOWNLOAD INSTALL INSTALL PC BACK EXIT
2 DATA SOFTWARE SETTINGS MODE
3. Press the DOWNLOAD DATA soft key. Four extraction choices will be available as shown above. To scroll
through the choices press the ▲ or ▼ key. The choices will highlight as the list is scrolled. With the desired
choice highlighted, press the “=” key. The System will begin downloading data to the USB and the operator
message panel will display COPYING DATA - PLEASE WAIT ##%. The percent downloaded will display as
the data is copied and then the operator message panel will display COPY COMPLETE, PRESS ANY KEY.
Press any key to return to the USB soft keys.
5–11 62-11637
4. The MessageCenter will return to the USB soft key display and the USB may be removed.
5. The downloaded data will now be in a folder, inside the Data Transfer USB memory device “DATA EXT”
folder. Each day data is extracted to the USB a folder will be created. The folder naming convention will
begin with the letters “DX” followed by the last two digits of the year, two digits representing the month and
two digits representing the day. For example a folder named DX130212 would contain data extracted Febru-
ary 12th, 2013.
6. Two files will be created inside the folder for each download. The file naming convention used is the last
8characters of the Trailer ID followed by .zdx for the first file and a secondary file with the same name fol-
lowed by .zax.
NOTE
If the same unit (with the same asset, trailer or car ID) is downloaded twice or more on the same day,
the earlier files will be overwritten. If the earlier files will be required for later review, ensure they are
transferred off the device before starting another download.
5.3.4 Installing Software

Instructions for installing software into the control system from a Data Transfer USB memory device are provided
below. If power is lost or USB removed this procedure should be repeated. The screen may be blank until the USB
is reinserted.
TIP
Whenever installing new software, it is always a good idea to start the unit and give it a quick check
over prior to performing the operation. All units should have the software upgraded to the latest ver-
sion, provided for Carrier Transicold dealers on the TransCentral web site.
Figure 5.7 Installing Software
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE oF
READING USB
34
SETPOINT oF
USB Port
1. Ensure the desired software version folder is the only folder loaded in the “PROGRAM” folder on a Data
Transfer USB memory device.
62-11637 5–12
2. With the system powered or off, remove the protective cover from the USB port and insert USB. The Mes-
sageCenter will display READING USB.
NOTE
If configured to do so, the system will prompt for entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to
“PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
3. In less than two minutes time, the MessageCenter will display the USB soft keys. (The INSTALL SETTINGS
soft key will not display if files are not loaded in the CONFIG folder and DOWNLOAD DATA does not display
if the DATAEXT folder is not present.)
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE
DOWNLOAD INSTALL
oF
INSTALL
34
SETPOINT oF
PC
DATA SOFTWARE SETTINGS MODE
4. Press the INSTALL SOFTWARE soft key. The System will enter the software install menu and display the
software version presently in the System, and the software version on the USB.
NOTE
Once a software version is installed, the same version cannot be installed but a newer or older version
can be.
SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU

NOTE
CURRENT SOFTWARE VERSION: ##.##.01
Once a software version is installed
SOFTWARE ON USB: ##.##.02
the same version cannot be loaded,
but a newer or older version can
PRESS = TO LOAD, OTHER TO EXIT
5. Press the “=” key to start the installation. Press any other key to exit and return to the USB soft keys.
SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU
SOFTWARE INSTALL IN PROGRESS

UNIT AND MICRO WILL STOP NOW
33%
DO NOT REMOVE USB DO NOT REMOVE USB
6. Once the “=” key is pressed, the operator message panel will display “UNIT AND MICRO WILL STOP
NOW” and the unit will stop. The system will begin downloading software from the USB memory device and
the operator message panel will display “SOFTWARE INSTALL IN PROGRESS”. The percent downloaded
will display as the software is copied and then the operator message panel will display “SOFTWARE
INSTALL COMPLETE - MICRO WILL RESTART NOW - REMOVE USB.
7. After install is complete, reinstall the USB, press the INSTALL SOFTWARE soft key and then the “=” key to
verify the software matches that on the USB.
8. Remove the USB and reinstall USB the cover.
5–13 62-11637
5.3.5 Transferring Configuration Files
Instructions for installing configuration files into the control system from a Data Transfer USB memory device are
provided in Figure 5.8. Configuration” (*.set) files consist of one of the following types of files. A “Configuration” file
contains a complete set of Configuration, Functional Parameter and Data Recorder settings for the system. An
“IntelliSet” file contains multiple Configurations which are programmed using easily recognizable names that can
then be selected using the display mounted keys by the operator. A “Maintenance” file contains one or more indi-
vidual settings. For example: Remote Sensor Yes/No, Fuel Level Sensor: Yes/No. etc. Unit specific and time sensi-
tive data cannot be loaded to a configuration file. This data includes: model number, serial number, trailer ID hour
meter readings, date and time. These configurations must be set using the display mounted keys or TRU-Tech and
a service cable.
1. Ensure the desired setting file(s) are loaded to the “CONFIG” folder on a Data Transfer USB memory
device.
2. With the System powered or off, remove protective cover from the USB interface port and insert the device.
The MessageCenter will display READING USB. NOTE: If configured to do so, the System will prompt for
entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
3. The Message Center will then display the USB soft keys. (The INSTALL SOFTWARE soft key will not dis-
play if a file is not loaded In the PROGRAM folder.)
4. Press the INSTALL SETTINGS soft key. The System will enter the INSTALL SETTINGS menu.
Figure 5.8 Transferring Configuration Files
3
4
34.3
BOX TEMPERATURE
DOWNLOAD INSTALL
oF
34
SETPOINT oF
INSTALL PC
DATA SOFTWARE SETTINGS MODE
5. If one or more configuration file(s) are loaded on the Data Transfer USB memory device a listing of available
files will be displayed. To scroll through the files press the ▲ or ▼ key. The files will highlight as the list is
scrolled.
INSTALL SETTINGS MENU (1 OF 3) NOTE

CTD IntelliSet_2008_0219 Earlier software versions may have a
display limit of 10 files. If the desired file
ACME TRUCKING
is not displayed, reduce the USB CONFIG
ACME EXPRESS directory content to 10 files or less.
BACK EXIT
INSTALL SETTINGS MENU INSTALL SETTINGS MENU
INSTALL SETTINGS IN PROGRESS

INSTALL SETTING COMPLETE
33% SYSTEM WILL RESET NOW
DO NOT REMOVE USB DO NOT REMOVE USB
6. With the desired file highlighted, press the “=” key to start the installation. Press any other key to exit and
return to the USB soft keys.
7. The unit will shutdown and the settings will be installed. If a single configuration is installed, the system will
reset and the unit will restart. If IntelliSets are installed, following the system reset, the user will be prompted
to select one of the new IntelliSets before the unit can be started. Reinstall USB cover.
62-11637 5–14
5.4 TRU-TECH & TRU-VIEW
The TRU-Tech & TRU-View program allows the user to access and download data, using a computer, when the
unit is not running and without starting the eight-hour DataLink data recorder timer. Using the computer will provide
additional programming and configuring capabilities that will not be available using the display mounted keys. The
DataLink data recorder may also be configured using the TRU-Tech program.
For complete instructions on using TRU-Tech & TRU-View, refer to the manual supplied with the TRU-Tech/TRU-
View software.
NOTE
For diagnoses of problems with the control system, DataLink data recorder downloading, file analysis
using TRU-View or use of USB memory devices, refer to Section 5.3.
5.4.1 TRU-Tech
The TRU-Tech Program enables the user to do the following:
• Monitor in real-time via the USB interface port the current status of the control system inputs, outputs, refrig-
eration, electrical, engine and temperature sensors and alarms.
• Record sensor data to a file for diagnostic purposes.
• Display, edit and send unit model number, unit serial number and trailer ID to the main microprocessor.
• Display, edit and send Functional Parameters and Configuration settings to the System (including the Data-
Link data recorder) or to a Data Transfer USB memory device.
• Write hour meter values to a replacement main microprocessors (during the first 25 hours).
• Initiate Pretrip and Defrost operations.
• Support Download, Configuration and Program USB operations.
• Provide a security log on system controlled by a System Administrator.
5.4.2 TRU–View
The TRU-View Program enables the user to do the following:
• Read download files from the System.
• Create various customized text reports that include setpoint, sensors, and events.
• Create various customized graphical reports.
• Print numerical, graphical, and event reports.
• View and print refrigeration system historical settings and changes.
• Filter download data by date range and desired sensors and events.
• Search for a sensor or event of interest.
• Synchronize multiple graphical and numerical windows to better understand historical operation.
• PC Setup enables the user to select how to display various parameters for use in the graph and text window.
• Easily adjust x and y axis and color scheme to accommodate various data.
• Export data to a user friendly format such as PDF
5.4.3 Connecting Computer and Control System

To connect the control system and computer:
1. Locate the USB interface port (Figure 2.2) and remove the protective cover to gain access.
2. Plug a PC–USB service cable into the port and a USB port on the computer (see Figure 5.9). If SROS is off,
the System will power up, and display “PC MODE”. If Configured, the System will prompt for entry of the
data protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
3. Start the TRU-Tech & TRU-View program by double clicking on the icon on your computer desktop and
entering the required password. Verify that the correct COM port is selected in the PC Setup. For complete
instructions on using TRU-Tech & TRU-View, refer to the manual supplied with the TRU-Tech/TRU-View
software.
4. When work is complete, remove the interface cable and install the protective cover back onto the USB port.
The control system will return to normal operation.
5–15 62-11637
Figure 5.9 TRU-Tech/TRU-View Connection
SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU
CURRENT SOFTWARE VERSION:

##.##.01
SOFTWARE ON USB: ##.##.02
PRESS = TO LOAD, OTHER TO EXIT
PC–USB Service Cable. Carrier Transicold

Part #: 22–04253–01 = 20 foot/6.1 meter long)
NOTE: Only this cable will communicate
correctly. An “off the shelf” USB to USB cable
will not provide the required communication.
5.5 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT
NOTICE
Some main microprocessor inputs operate at voltage levels other than the conventional 12 VDC. These inputs
include but are not limited to the pressure transducers and temperature sensors. Under no circumstances should 12
VDC be applied at these connection points.
NOTICE
When field diagnosis of a Carrier Transicold refrigeration unit determines that an APX main microprocessor is not per-
forming properly and must be replaced, the replacement microprocessor must be setup for this unit and customer by
entering the required Configurations, Functional Parameters and DataLink data recorder settings.
If the replacement microprocessor is not loaded with the most recent software, it should be updated. If software is
loaded, it should be verified that it is the approved revision for this model.
When a module is replaced, software should be upgraded before switching the unit on. This will ensure software
compatibility of all modules.
The preferred method for setup of the main microprocessor is to use the display mounted keys or a Data Transfer
USB memory device. All required changes, except unit specific and time sensitive data, may be performed using
the device.
62-11637 5–16
If a USB is not available the main microprocessor may be setup using TRU-Tech. TRU-Tech allows entry of all
required data. If neither a USB memory device or TRU-Tech and service cable is available, the main microproces-
sor may be setup for immediate use using the display mounted keys. Changes to the default DataLink data
recorder settings may not be entered using the display mounted keys. If the main microprocessor is setup using
the display mounted keys and this feature is needed, it may be loaded at a later date.
5.5.1 Pre-Replacement Steps

Before the unit can be started using the replacement main microprocessor certain unit specific and time sensitive
data must be known.
TIP
Print this page and fill out the following for use when entering the data.
That information includes:
• Unit Serial Number _____________________
• Unit Model Number _____________________
• Engine Protect Hours ___________________
• Switch On Protect Hours_________________
• Engine Sleep Hours ____________________
• Switch On Sleep Hours __________________
• High Speed Hours______________________
• Clutch Cycles _________________________
• Start Cycles___________________________
• Date and Time_________________________
• ID Number____________________________
1. If possible, power the original system up by entering PC Mode, or by placing the START/RUN - OFF switch
in the START/RUN position.
2. Insert a Data Transfer USB memory device and download all data from the DataLink data recorder.
3. Scroll through the data list and hour meter readings and make note of the unit specific data listed above. If
the original main microprocessor will not power up, gather the unit specific data from the model/serial num-
ber nameplate and estimate hour meter readings from the unit maintenance records. If a Data Transfer USB
memory device will be used to setup the replacement main microprocessor, write the required data to the
device. Also, if the current configuration file is available for this customer from the TransCentral web site, it
should be transferred to the device prior to beginning work.
5.5.2 Main Microprocessor Replacement
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by placing the START/RUN–OFF switch in the OFF position and
removing the negative battery cable.
2. Release the tabs on and remove the two 35 pin connectors and 8 pin connector from the front of the mod-
ule.
3. Replace module. Tighten mounting hardware to 96 inch/lbs (10.8 Nm).
4. Reinstall connectors ensuring tabs are fully locked in place.
5–17 62-11637
5.5.3 Main Microprocessor Setup
1. Ensure that the replacement main microprocessor is in place, all wires connected and the negative battery
cable is reconnected.
2. Make sure the latest software has been loaded to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to Section 5.3.2
NOTICE
3. Power up the system by replacing the negative battery cable and placing the START/RUN - OFF switch in
the START/RUN position. The display will immediately go into the Unit Identification Configuration screen.
The unit model information must be entered before the System can display the correct screens for this unit.
4. Select the correct model and then enter the correct model number by using the ▲ and ▼ keys. Scroll
through the list until the correct Model Number appears (verify by reading the Model/Serial Plate on the
unit). Press the “=” key to enter the new model number.
5. Press the ▲ key again, and the Unit Serial Number field will appear. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions
on entering the unit serial number.
6. Press the ▲ key again, and the Trailer ID field will appear. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions on entering
the Trailer ID.
NOTICE
Ensure that the clock you are using is accurate. Also, some customers are located in different
time zones from the repair location. If you know the owners desired location time, enter that
time. If you don’t, enter the current time at your location.
7. Now, press the ▼ key until “SET DATE & TIME” appears. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions on entering
the date and time.
8. Press the ▲ key to go to “SET NEW HOURS”. Press the “=” key then the ▲ key to enter that menu.
9. The first hourmeter is Engine Protect Hours. Press the “=” key to select this meter. The cursor will be blink-
ing on the ten-thousands place. Press the ▲ and ▼ key to select the correct value, then press the “=” key.
If the correct number in any of the locations is 0 (zero), just press the “=” key to enter 0 as the value and
move the cursor to the next place. For example, if you are entering 567 hours, you will press the “=” key
twice to leave a 0 for the first two numbers, then use the ▲ and ▼ keys to scroll through the numbers to
enter the correct hours. When the correct hours for Engine Protect Hours has been entered, press the “=”
key to advance to the next hourmeter. If an invalid number is entered, a warning message will flash in the
MessageCenter. For example, you can not enter a higher number of hours for Engine Protect than the num-
ber of Switch On Hours.
NOTES
• None of the “Total” hourmeters are listed. When the hours for all the hourmeters are entered, the system
will add the correct hours together and calculate the Total Engine Hours and Total Switch On Hours.
When the end of the list is reached “PRESS = TO SAVE HOURS” will be displayed. Pressing the “=” key
will save the hours, and return you to the configuration list.
• If you do not press the “=” key, none of the time hours or cycles you just entered will be saved.
• Hour meters may be changed for 60 minutes following the initial hour entry. If an error has been made, be
certain to correct it within the 60 minute time period. Following that time, the hourmeters will count the
appropriate hours because the unit switch is on and the unit is operating, and no further manual changes
will be allowed.
62-11637 5–18
NOTES
• If a Data Transfer USB memory device will be used to setup the remainder of the main microprocessor
settings, proceed to Section 5.5.7 after the settings are entered.
• After the unit specific and time sensitive configuration settings are complete use the ▲ or ▼ key until
“CONFIGS COMPLETE, = TO EXIT” is displayed in the MessageCenter. Press the “=” key to save.
• If the Configurations, Functional Parameters and DataLink data recorder setup will be set using the dis-
play mounted keys and /or TRU-Tech, continue with following steps.
5.5.4 Configurations Via Display Mounted Keys

Refer to Table 5–1 for a list of available Configurations. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions on how to access
them.
5.5.5 Functional Parameters Via Display Mounted Keys
1. Refer to Table 3–2 for a list of available Functional Parameters and Section 3.17 for directions on how to
access them.
2. Leave the system powered up as you continue with the next section.
5.5.6 DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech
NOTE
If the factory settings are used, this section can be skipped.
1. Refer to Section 3.10 for list of DataLink data recorder setups.
2. Connect a computer to the USB interface port of the unit and start the TRU-Tech program (refer to Section
5.4).
3. In TRU-Tech, click on the REEFER SETUP LIVE/ Data Recorder Tab.
4. Select the Sensors to be recorded and whether you wish averaged or snapshot recordings (averaged is rec-
ommended for RAT, SAT, AAT & the remote sensors; snapshot is recommended for all others).
5. When the setup is correct, press the Send button to send the new settings to the system.
6. From the “Confirm Send Information” Pop Up, check the data that is to be sent and un-check the data that is
not to be sent. Click the OK button.
7. Verify that the settings were sent by waiting for the confirmation pop up message.
NOTE
If the DataLink data recorder date and time were not set earlier, they can be set from TRU-Tech.
5.5.7 System Final Checkout
1. Start the unit and allow it to run for a few minutes.
2. While the unit is running, scroll through the Data List. Verify that all the data is now accurately displayed.
3. Initiate a Pretrip test. Allow the unit to complete the Pretrip and check for any alarms. Make any necessary
repairs before returning the unit into service.
5–19 62-11637
Table 5–1 Configuration Settings
Configuration Selections Description
Press the ▲ or ▼ keys to display configurations:

UNIT IDENTIFICATION
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 11) SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK
UN IT IDENTIFICATION START-STOP SETTINGS
SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK INTELLISET & PRODUCT SHIELD
START-STOP SETTINGS ENGINE ALARMS
INTELLISET & PRODUCT SHIELD ALARM SETTINGS
BACK EXIT HOUR METERS
REMOTE SENSORS
OTHER SETTINGS
RAIL SETTINGS
AUTO FRESH AIR SETTINGS
UNIT IDENTIFICATION
UNIT MODEL NUMBER # A list of configurable model Indicates to the main microprocessor the model
numbers number of the unit. There are several model num-
bers provided in the list. Select the model number
printed on the Model/Serial Number nameplate.
NOTE
The unit model number selection may have an asterisk (*) in the place of the 7th character. If that is the
case, then that number may be selected as long as all of the other numbers and letters match exactly.
TRAILER ID # A customer assigned ID # may be entered. This may
be up to 10 characters long. Numbers, letters, and
spaces may be entered by scrolling through the
available list. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions
on entering the Trailer ID.
NOTE
The default display for this Configuration is “TRAILER ID #”. The display may be modified if the “UNIT
OPERATION’” Configuration in the Rail Settings group is set to “RAIL”. If this Configuration is set to
“RAIL” then “ASSET ID #” or “CAR ID #” may display rather than the “TRAILER ID #” default. Refer to
the UNIT OPERATION Configuration later in this table.
UNIT SERIAL NUMBER # The unit S/N may be entered. Numbers, Letters, and
a space are available by scrolling through the avail-
able list. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions on
entering the unit serial number.
SET NEW HOURS This Configuration will display when a replacement main microprocessor is installed.
It allows entry of the hours (from the existing microprocessor) into the replacement
microprocessor. This Configuration will only display until one of the hour meters
reaches 25 hours. Changes to these values may be made for up to 60 minutes.
SET DATE AND TIME Indicates to the main microprocessor the current date and time. Refer to Section
5.2.3 for instructions on entering the date and time.
NOTE
Date and Time may also be configured under “Other Settings”.
62-11637 5–20
SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK
DECIMAL DISPLAYED DISPLAYED = setpoint will be shown with a decimal
NOT DISPLAYED and temperatures may be selected to a tenth of a de-
gree.
NOT DISPLAYED = setpoint will not be shown with
a decimal. All other temperatures will still be dis-
played with a decimal.
MIN SETPOINT -22°F TO 90°F (-30C to 32°C) Indicates to the main microprocessor the minimum
(in 0.1°F or °C increments) allowable set point.
MAX SETPOINT -22°F TO 90°F (-30C to 32°C) Indicates to the main microprocessor the maximum
(in 0.1°F or °C increments) allowable setpoint.
RANGE 1 LOCK OFF OFF = If both Range Locks are OFF, the unit will op-
OR START-STOP erate normally.
RANGE 2 LOCK CONTINUOUS If either Range 1 or Range 2 is not OFF, the unit will
operate as selected whenever the setpoint is within
that range.
START-STOP = The unit will always operate in
Start-Stop whenever the setpoint is between the
minimum & maximum temperatures for that range
(refer to the following sub-configurations).
CONTINUOUS = The unit will always operate in
Continuous Run whenever the setpoint is between
the minimum & maximum temperatures for that
range (refer to the following sub-configurations).
• RANGE 1 (or 2) -22°F TO 90°F (-30C to 32°C) Select the lowest temperature desired for this range.
MINIMUM TEMPERATURE (in 0.1°F or °C increments)
• RANGE 1 (or 2) -22°F TO 90°F (-30C to 32°C) Select the highest temperature desired for this range
MAXIMUM in 0.1°F or °C increments
TEMPERATURE
START-STOP SETTINGS
CURRENT FOR S/S 7.0A In Start-Stop Operation the charging current must
SHUTOFF 1A TO 10A drop below this value before the unit is allowed to
(in 0.5A increments) shut down.
VOLTAGE FOR S/S 12.2V The engine will restart from a Start-Stop Off cycle or
RESTART 12.0 TO 12.8V a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the battery drops to
this value.
A lower selection may result in a longer off cycle
(based on battery voltage) and possibly overall
shorter battery life. A higher selection may result in a
shorter off cycle (based on battery voltage) and pos-
sibly overall longer battery life.
ENGINE TEMP FOR S/S 32°F (0°C) The engine will restart from a Start-Stop Off cycle or
RESTART 10°F to 32°F (-12.2°C to 0°C) a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the engine coolant
temperature drops to this value.
5–21 62-11637
S/S PARAMETERS TOGETHER TOGETHER = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
SEPARATE mum Off Time, Restart Temperature, Maximum Off
Time, and Override Temperatures are set in the
Functional Parameter List, the same values will be
used for both Frozen and Perishable setpoints.
SEPARATE = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
mum Off Time, Restart Temperature, Maximum Off
Time, and Override Temperatures are set in the
Functional Parameter List, different values may be
entered for Perishable and Frozen setpoints.
INTELLISET & PRODUCTSHIELD
ENABLE INTELLISET NO YES = Allows access to the IntelliSet menu using the
AT = KEY YES = key.
NO = Allows access to the IntelliSet menu using the
SELECT key.
PRODUCTSHIELD: OFF OFF = ProductShield Econo is OFF
ECONO GO TO S/S GO TO START/STOP = Allows unit to be set for and
GO TO CONT operate in Continuous Run until ambient tempera-
ture falls within a user-defined range when unit will
go to START/STOP. This allows energy savings
while offering Continuous Run operation protection
when ambient is outside range. Unit will return to
Continuous Run when ambient goes beyond range.
GO TO CONTINUOUS = Allows unit to be set for
and operate in START/STOP until ambient tempera-
ture falls outside a user-defined range when unit will
go to Continuous Run. This provides continuous air
flow and good product protection for extreme ambi-
ent temperatures. Unit will return to START/ STOP
when ambient comes back inside range.
• ECONO MIN. TEMP OFF or OFF = There is no lower limit for this parameter.
-20°F to +119.0°F Select the lowest ambient temperature desired to ac-
(-28.9°C to +48.4°C) tivate ProductShield Econo.
(in 0.5° increments)
Default: 119.0°F (48.4°C) If ProductShield Econo is Go To Continuous there is
a minimum 10°F range. Therefore, this parameter’s
upper limit is ProductShield Econo Maximum Tem-
perature minus 10°F (5.5°C).
• ECONO MAX. TEMP OFF or OFF = There is no upper limit for this parameter.
-20°F to +119.0°F Select the highest ambient temperature desired to
(-28.9°C to +48.4°C) activate ProductShield Econo.
(in 0.5° increments)
Default: 119.0°F (48.4°C) If ProductShield Econo Install is Go To Continuous
there is a minimum 10°F range. Therefore, this pa-
rameter’s lower limit is ProductShield Econo Min
Temp plus 10°F (5.5°C).
• ECONO DELTA-T OFF OFF = Delta-t is not used in determining when the
NOTE: This is available for +3.6°F to +27.0°F unit will go into Econo: Go To Start/Stop Mode.
“Go to S/S” only. Not avail- (+2°C to 15°C) Select the desired delta-t value for activation of
able for “Go to Continuous”. (in 0.5° increments) ProductShield Econo. When delta-t is below this set-
ting and within the minimum/maximum range go to
start/stop will be allowed
62-11637 5–22
PRODUCTSHIELD: OFF OFF = The unit will operate normally in high and low
HIGH AIR ON speeds.
ON = The unit will operate in high speed when the
ambient air temperature is outside a user defined
range. This provides increased air flow and good
product protection for extreme ambient tempera-
tures. Unit may return to low speed when ambient
comes back within the range.
HIGH AIR MIN. TEMP OFF OFF = There is no lower limit for this parameter.
-19°F to +119°F Select the lower limit of the ambient range desired
(-28.3°C to +48.3°C) for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for more
(in 0.5°F or °C increments) information on High Air Min. Temp.
HIGH AIR MAX. TEMP OFF OFF = There is no upper limit for this parameter.
-19°F to +119°F Select the upper limit of the ambient range desired
(-28.3°C to +48.3°C) for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for more
(in 0.5°F or °C increments) information on High Air Max. Temp.
HIGH AIR DELTA-T OFF OFF = Delta-t is not used for determining the activa-
+3.6°F to +27°F tion/de-activation of High Air Delta-T
(+2°C to +15°C) Select the desired Delta-T value for activation of
(in 0.5°C or °F increments) ProductShield High Air. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for
more information on High Air Delta-T.
PRODUCTSHIELD: OFF Select the desired ambient temperature below which
WINTER -20°F to +32°F ProductShield Winter will operate (forced
(-28.9°C to +0°C) Continuous Run operation).
(in 0.5°C or °F increments)
PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH NO OFF = ProductShield Fresh is turned off.
YES ON - The FreshProtect value in the system will be
overridden when operating under high ambient con-
ditions. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for more information
on FreshProtect.
PRODUCTSHIELD OFF This Configuration is used to override the FreshPro-
FRESHPROTECT A through F: tect Functional Parameter value already in the sys-
tem. The values displayed will depend on the
A = 2 to 5°F (1.1 to 2.8°C) FreshProtect Functional Parameter setting for this
B = 4 to 7°F (2.2 to 3.9°C) application. Only the values that allow less tempera-
C = 6 to 9°F (3.3 to 4.9°C) ture drop will be displayed, available for selection.
D = 8 to 10°F (4.4 to 6.1°C)
E = 10 to 13°F (5.6 to 7.2°C) For example, if the FreshProtect Functional Param-
eter is set to C, then the ProductShield FreshProtect
overrides displayed for selection will be A & B.
PRODUCTSHIELD 70° F to 118°F (21°C to 48°C) Ambient temperature above which ProductShield
FRESH TEMP in 1° C or °F increments. Fresh will be active.
Default: 90°F (32°C)
5–23 62-11637
ENGINE SETTINGS
GLOW TIME SHORT Indicates to the main microprocessor which engine
LONG is in the system.
INTAKE HEATER LONG = Glow Plug equipped and longer glow times
are used (TV engines).
SHORT= Glow Plug equipped and shorter glow
times are used (DI engines).
INTAKE HEATER = Engine preheat equipped (Tier
4 engines).
NOTE: Refer to Table 4–1 for glow times.
ENGINE OIL YES / NO Use of an oil level device is not recommended at this
LEVEL SWITCH time.
USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SETTING.
HIGH ENGINE YES / NO YES = When alarm 00012 HIGH COOLANT TEM-
TEMP SHUTDOWN PERATURE alarm has been activated three times in
the last two hours of engine operation alarm 00021
TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED will be activated.
NO = When alarm 00012 HIGH COOLANT TEM-
PERATURE has been activated three times in the
last two hours of engine operation alarm 00021
TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED will not be acti-
vated.
ENGINE OIL YES / NO YES = When alarm 00011 CHECK ENGINE OIL
PRESS SHUTDOWN PRESSURE has been activated three times in the
last two hours of engine operation, alarm 00021
TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED will be activated.
NO = When alarm 00011 CHECK ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE has been activated three times in the
last two hours of engine operation alarm 00021
TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED will not be acti-
vated.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR YES / NO / 3rd PARTY YES = A Fuel Level Sensor is installed in the fuel
tank.
NO = There is no Fuel Level Sensor installed in the
fuel tank.
3rd PARTY = A 3rd Party Fuel Level Sensor has
been installed.
LOW FUEL ALARM UNIT SHUTDOWN UNIT SHUTDOWN = The unit will be shutdown and
ALARM ONLY alarm if level reaches 15%.
ALARM ONLY = An alarm will be generated if level
reaches 15% and the engine will continue to run.
FUEL HEATER NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = A Fuel Heater is not installed.
INSTALLED INSTALLED = A Fuel Heater is installed.
MAX THROTTLE 80 - 125 IF THIS CONFIGURATION IS AVAILABLE, USE
POSITION 125 default FACTORY DEFAULT ONLY, DO NOT OPERATE
WITH A DIFFERENT SETTING.
62-11637 5–24
EES SYSTEM INSTALLED Not Installed Indicates if Diesel Particulate Filter is installed.
(DPF Installed)
Installed
ALARM SETTINGS
OUT OF RANGE YES / NO YES = When the refrigerated compartment tempera-
SHUTDOWN ture has been out-of-range for 45 minutes, the alarm
light will come on, and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the refrigerated compartment tempera-
ture has been out-of-range for 30 minutes, the alarm
light will come on and the unit will continue to run.
Refer to alarm 00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE
for more information.
RPM ALARM SHUTDOWN YES / NO YES = When alarm 00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM is
activated the alarm light will illuminate and the en-
gine will shut down.
NO = When alarm 00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM is
activated the alarm light will illuminate and the en-
gine will continue to run.
LOW PRESSURE YES / NO YES = When alarm 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT
SHUTDOWN PRESSURE is activated the alarm light will illumi-
nate and the unit will shut down.
NO = When alarm 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE is activated the alarm light will illumi-
nate and the unit will continue to run.
LP SHUTDOWN DELAY (0 - 255 seconds in 1 second If the Low Pressure Shutdown Configuration is set to
increments) YES, shutdown is to be delayed for this amount of
120 SECS time after the Low Pressure Shutdown signal is re-
ceived.
HIGH SUCT PRESS YES / NO YES = When alarm 00027 HIGH SUCTION PRES-
SHUTDOWN SURE is activated the alarm light will illuminate and
the unit will shut down.
NO = When alarm 00027 HIGH SUCTION PRES-
SURE is activated the alarm light will illuminate and
the unit will continue to run.
REFRIGERATION YES / NO YES = When alarm 00028 CHECK REFRIGERA-
SYSTEM SHUTDOWN TION SYSTEM is activated the alarm light will illumi-
NO = When alarm 00028 CHECK REFRIGERA-
TION SYSTEM is activated the alarm light will illumi-
5–25 62-11637
COMPRESSOR ALARM YES / NO If the “Compressor Alarm Shutdown” option has
SHUTDOWN been installed (refer to Unit Data), this setting will be
(This Configuration is an op- available.
tion, it will not display if the YES = The unit will shutdown and not restart when
option is not installed.) 00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE, 00017
HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP, 00018 LOW RE-
FRIGERANT PRESSURE, 00027 HIGH SUCTION
PRESSURE, 00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM or 00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR
FLOW occur 3 times within 2 hours of continuous
engine operation.
NO = Normal shutdown rules for above alarms.
ALTERNATOR YES / NO YES = When alarm 00051 ALTERNATOR NOT
CHECK SHUTDOWN CHARGING is activated the alarm light will illumi-
NO = When alarm 00051 ALTERNATOR NOT
CHARGING is activated the alarm light will illumi-
CONFIGURE HOUR METERS
VIEWABLE STANDARD METERS
DISPLAY TOTAL YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
ENGINE HR startup messaging sequence and will be in hour me-
ter menu.
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence. It will be displayed
with the “other meters and counters”.
DISPLAY TOTAL YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
SWITCH ON HR startup messaging sequence and will be in hour me-
ter menu.
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence. It will be displayed
with the “other meters and counters”.
SET PM CONFIGURATIONS
PM (METER NUMBER) OFF OFF = This meter will turn OFF (will not display).
CONFIGS HIGH SPEED HOURS ENGINE HOURS = This meter will count engine
Meters available are PM-1 START CYCLES hours until the next reset interval.
through PM-5. SWITCH ON HOURS = This meter will count switch
CLUTCH CYCLES
on hours until the next reset interval.
SWITCH ON HOURS
START CYCLES = This meter will count how many
ENGINE HOURS times the engine has started until the next reset in-
terval.
CLUTCH CYCLES = This meter will count how many
times the clutch is engaged until the next reset inter-
val.
HIGH SPEED HOURS = This meter will count the
number of hours the engine operated in high speed
until the next reset interval.
If a meter is configured, the following sub-configura-
tion will be available.
62-11637 5–26
DIESEL RESET VALUE OFF When the engine maintenance hour meter is reset,
(Refer to Table 8–1 for oil/ 50 to 30,000 hours in 50 hour the value selected here will be added to the present
filter change intervals.) increments meter reading to indicate to the microprocessor
when the next service interval alarm will be activat-
ed. If the value entered is “0” the alarm feature is
turned off.
SWITCH ON RESET OFF When the switch on maintenance hour meter is re-
VALUE 50 to 30,000 hours in 50 hour set, the value selected here will be added to the
increments present meter reading to indicate to the micropro-
cessor when the next service interval alarm will be
activated. If the value entered is “0” the alarm feature
is turned off.
PM 1-5 RESET INTERVAL ENGINE HOURS The value to be entered here is the desired number
NOTE: 0 or 50 TO 30,000 hours in 50 of hours or cycles between PM Maintenance Alarms
hour increments for this meter.
This Configuration will not
display for those meters that SWITCH ONHOURS 0 or 50 When the meter is reset, the value selected here will
are configured for zero TO 30,000 hours in 50 hour in- be added to the to the present meter reading to indi-
hours. crements cate to the main microprocessor when the next ser-
vice interval alarm is to be activated.
START CYCLES 0 or 1,000
TO 90,000 CYCLES in 1,000
cycle increments
CLUTCH CYCLES 0 or 1,000
TO 90,000 CYCLES in 1,000
cycle increments
HIGH SPEED HOURS 0 or 50
TO 30,000 hours in 50 hour in-
crements
REMOTE SENSORS
REMOTE TEMP SENSOR ON ON = A remote sensor has been added to the unit,
1 (or 2) OFF and connected into the wire harness.
RAT2 OFF = There is no Remote Sensor (1or 2) in this unit.

RAT2 = Indicates that RAT2 is installed and config-
ures as a Return Air Temperature Sensor.
NOTE
If an intake air sensor is installed in this unit, the sen-
sor will be wired into the REMS2 connections and be
activated by the REMS2 configuration.
DOOR SWITCH NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = There is no door switch.
OPEN SWITCH OPEN OPEN SWITCH OPEN = A door switch has been in-
OPEN SWITCH CLOSED stalled. The switch contacts will be OPEN whenever
the door is OPEN.
3rd PARTY
OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = A door switch has been
installed. The switch contacts will be CLOSED
whenever the door is OPEN.
3rd PARTY = A 3rd party switch has been installed.
5–27 62-11637
DOOR SWITCH ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When a door switch indicates that
UNIT SHUTDOWN the door is open, a warning alarm will be displayed in
the MessageCenter.
LOW ENGINE SPEED
UNIT SHUTDOWN = When a door switch indicates
DATA RECORDER ONLY that the door is open, a warning alarm will be dis-
played in the MessageCenter, and the unit will shut-
down. If this setting is chosen the following sub-
setting will also be available.
LOW ENGINE SPEED = When a door switch indi-
cates that the door is open, the engine will be forced
to low speed. If this setting is chosen the following
sub-setting will also be available.
DATA RECORDER ONLY = The DataLink data re-
corder will record every time the door is opened or
closed. There will be no alarms or messages dis-
played in the MessageCenter.
UNIT SHUTDOWN BELOW OFF If Door Switch = Unit Shutdown is selected:
(ambient air temperature) 120 to -20°F (49 to -29°C) OFF = the unit will shutdown at any ambient tem-
perature.
Value = when ambient temperature is below the en-
tered value, shut down will be allowed. (When ambi-
ent temperature is above the entered value, the unit
will not shutdown.)
RUN LOW SPEED BELOW OFF If Door Switch = Low Engine Speed is selected:
(ambient air temperature) 120 to -20°F (49 to -29°C) OFF = the unit will transition to low speed at any am-
bient temperature.
Value = when ambient temperature is below the en-
tered value, transition to low speed will be allowed.
(When ambient temperature is above the entered
value, the unit will not transition to low speed.)
REMOTE SWITCH 1 NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = There is no remote switch.
ON CONTACTS CLOSED ON CONTACTS CLOSED = The remote switch will
ON CONTACTS OPEN be used as a remote control switch. The switch con-
tacts will be CLOSED whenever the switch is in the
OPEN SWITCH CLOSED ON position.
OPEN SWITCH OPEN ON CONTACTS OPEN = The remote switch will be
used as a remote control switch. The switch contacts
will be OPEN whenever the switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = The remote switch will
be used as a door switch. The switch contacts will be
CLOSED whenever the door is OPEN.
OPEN SWITCH OPEN = The remote switch will be
used as a door switch. The switch contacts will be
OPEN whenever the door is OPEN.
62-11637 5–28
REMOTE SWITCH 1 ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When the switch is activated, a
UNIT SHUTDOWN warning alarm will be displayed in the Message-
Center.
LOW ENGINE SPEED
UNIT SHUTDOWN = When the switch is activated,
DATA RECORDER ONLY a warning alarm will be displayed in the Message-
Center, and the unit will shutdown.
LOW ENGINE SPEED = When the switch is activat-
ed, the engine will be forced to low speed.
DATA RECORDER ONLY = The DataLink data re-
corder will record every time the switch is activated.
There will be no alarms or messages displayed in
the MessageCenter.
OTHER SETTINGS
ENABLE YES YES = Advanced User Mode is automatically en-
ADVANCED USER MODE: NO abled when the unit is powered on.
NO = Driver Mode is automatically enabled when the
unit is powered on and Advanced User Mode may be
enabled manually.
PROTECT DATA WITH PIN YES
NOTE
NO Master technician PIN code is described
in Section 5.2. Using the TRUtech pro-
gram, a data protect PIN code, which can
override the master technician PIN code,
may be entered into the control system.
YES = The data protect PIN code will override the

master technician PIN code and the data protect
code must be entered to use the USB Interface port
or data recorder print functions.
NO = The data protect PIN code, if entered, will not
override the master technician PIN code when using
the USB Interface port or data recorder print functions
PARAMETERS LOCKOUT YES YES = All Functional Parameters are locked and
NO cannot be changed using the display mounted keys.
NO = Functional Parameters can be changed using
the display mounted keys, unless individually locked
out by TRU-Tech.
8 HOURS YES YES = When the START/RUN-OFF switch is placed
ADDITIONAL DATA NO in the OFF position, the DataLink data recorder will
continue to record data for an additional 8 hours.
NO = When the START/RUN-OFF switch is placed
in the OFF position, the DataLink data recorder will
stop recording data.
SATELLITE COMM OTHER OTHER = The microprocessor is set for communica-
tion from Qualcomm T2 (Trailer Tracs 2) or any other
(This Configuration is an op- QUALCOMM
supplier.
tion, it will not display if the
option is not installed.) QUALCOMM =- The microprocessor is set for com-
munication from Qualcomm Trailer Tracs.
5–29 62-11637
HIGH SPEED DELAY 1 Minute Select the length of time unit remains in low speed
0 to 10 minutes in 0.5 minute before transitioning to high speed.
increments
LIGHT BAR NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = a remote light bar is not installed
2 LIGHT 2 LIGHT = a two light bar is installed.
SET DATE AND TIME Indicates to the main microprocessor the current date and time. Refer to Section
5.2.3 for instructions on entering the date and time.
NOTE
Date and Time may also be configured under “Unit Identification”.
RAIL SETTINGS
UNIT OPERATION STANDARD RAIL = The system is set to control rail refrigeration
RAIL operation. When this Configuration is set to “RAIL”
the following “VEHICLE ID”, “RAIL SHUTDOWN
OVERRIDE” and “RAIL OVERRIDE RESTARTS”
Sub-Configurations will be available.
VEHICLE ID ASSET This Configuration modifies the prefix wording used
TRAILER for display of the customer assigned ID number en-
tered in the “TRAILER ID” Configuration. For exam-
CAR ple, if the customer assigned ID number entered is
12345:
ASSET = will display “ASSET # 12345”
TRAILER = will display “TRAILER # 12345”
CAR = will display “CAR # 12345”
RAIL SHUTDOWN NO NO = When alarm 00030 FAILED TO RUN MINI-
OVERRIDE YES MUM TIME or 00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO
MODE is activated, the system will not override the
alarm(s) and the unit will not restart until the alarms
are cleared manually.
YES = When either alarm 00030 FAILED TO RUN
MINIMUM TIME or 00031 FAILED TO START -
AUTO MODE is activated, the unit will automatically
override and clear the alarm(s) and attempt a restart
after 4 hours. When this Configuration is set to “YES”
the following “RAIL OVERRIDE RESTARTS” Sub-
Configurations will be available.
RAIL OVERRIDE 1-20 With the default setting the system is allowed to
RESTARTS 3 override and clear 00030 FAILED TO RUN MINI-
MUM TIME or 00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO
MODE three consecutive times before the override
is locked out and no further restart attempts will be
allowed until the alarm(s) are cleared manually.
The number of restart attempts allowed before the
override is locked out may be changed by entering
the desired number in this Sub-Configuration. Set-
ting this number too high may result in a discharged
or damaged battery if the unit never actually starts or
fails to run long enough to charge the battery prior to
shutting down again.
62-11637 5–30
AUTO FRESH AIR SETTINGS
AUTOFRESH AIR NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = AutoFresh Air Exchange is not
STANDARD installed.
STANDARD = AutoFresh Air Exchange is installed.
AUTOFRESH AIR DELAY SETPOINT SETPOINT - Once the compartment temperature
0-48 HOURS IN 1 HOUR has reached setpoint 1.5°F (0.8°C), the Auto- Fresh
INCREMENTS Air Exchange will start to operate based on the se-
lected Functional Parameters.
0 to 48 Hours - After this length of time, AutoFresh
Air Exchange will begin if the unit is no longer run-
ning in Pulldown, even though the compartment tem-
perature may not have reached setpoint.
5–31 62-11637
62-11637 5–32
SECTION 6 - MESSAGECENTER
6.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES ................................................ 6–1
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 6
MessageCenter Messages
6.1 MessageCenter Messages
The following table lists all of the messages which do not appear in other lists in this manual and a description of
their meaning. Refer to Section 9 for a list of Alarm messages. Refer to Section 3.14 for a list of Unit Data mes-
sages. Refer to Section 3.17 for a list of Functional Parameter messages. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for a list of Con-
figuration messages.
Table 6–1 MessageCenter Messages

Message Description
ACTIVE This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the current
IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and none of its settings have
been modified.
ACTIVE ALARM LIST The list of active alarms in the microprocessor has been erased. (This does not
CLEARED remove alarms from the DataLink data recorder.)
ALL ALARMS CLEARED The list of active and inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm lists have
been erased. (This does not remove alarms from the DataLink data recorder.)
BUZZER OFF IN X MINS The Buzzer circuit has been energized in Component Test mode. The Buzzer
circuit will continue to be energized for the number of minutes shown.
CANNOT ENTER TRIP START Cannot enter Trip Start. A problem has been detected within the DataLink data
recorder.
CANNOT START DEFROST Due to current unit conditions, the defrost cycle cannot be started.
CYCLE Refer to Defrost Section 3.11 and Section 8.9.13.
CANNOT START PRETRIP Due to current unit conditions a Pretrip test cannot be started.
Refer to Pretrip Section 3.6.
CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT The IntelliSleep IntelliSet is active. Alternates with “INTELLI- SLEEP MODE” at
five second interval whether unit is running or not.
CHARGE MODE-HOLD = TO Service mode has the refrigeration system set so that it can be charged with
EXIT refrigerant through the liquid line service valve. Press the = key to manually
exit, or wait until the charging is complete.
CHECK AT NEXT SERVICE The unit needs to be checked at next service interval. There is currently an
INTERVAL active non-shutdown alarm in the alarm list.
CHECK DOOR The door switch indicates that a refrigerated compartment door is not closed.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL The level in the fuel tank is very close to empty.
(Requires Optional Sensor)
COMPONENT TEST MODE Pressing the = key while this message is highlighted will allow user access to
Component Test mode.
CONTINUOUS LOCKED The current setpoint is within a range that has been locked into the Continuous
Run mode. Start-Stop can not be selected.
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE The unit operating mode has been changed from Start-Stop to Continuous
SELECTED Run.
DATA RECORDER FAILURE The microprocessor has stopped recording Unit Data.
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED The unit has gone into Defrost.
DOOR OPEN A refrigerated compartment door is open.
6–1 62-11637
Message Description
DOOR OPEN - LOW SPEED A refrigerated compartment door is open forcing the unit to run in low speed.
ENTERING SERVICE MODE The initial message for Service mode.

ERROR: ENG HRS > SWITCH When setting up a replacement microprocessor, incorrect hours have been
ON HRS entered.
ERROR: HI SP HRS > TOTAL
ENG HRS
EVAC / CHARGE MODE The unit is in Service mode, and the refrigeration system is ready to be
evacuated then charged with refrigerant. Refer to Section 5.2.5
EXITING PRETRIP MODE Pretrip has been aborted either by user or by a pre-trip alarm.
EXITING SERVICE MODE Service mode has been turned off and unit is returning to normal operation.
INACTIVE ALARMS IN There are inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm list which have not yet
MEMORY been cleared.
INTELLI-SLEEP MODE The IntelliSleep IntelliSet is active. This message alternates with “CHANGE
INTELLISET TO EXIT” at five second intervals whether unit is running or not.
KEYPAD (display mounted Once the battery voltage goes below 7.0 Volts for 10 seconds, all of the keys
keys) LOCKED-BATTERY TOO on the display will be locked.
LOW
LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS There is a loss of communications between the display module or other
module(s). If a specific module is involved, the module name will be indicated.
MAX SETPOINT HAS BEEN Maximum setpoint allowed by configuration settings has been reached.
REACHED
MICRO WILL RESET & The microprocessor program software has just been changed, or a new
RESTART NOW configuration has been programmed into the microprocessor. The
microprocessor will turn itself off then on again (similar to a computer reboot) in
order for the changes to be effective.
MIN SETPOINT HAS BEEN Minimum setpoint allowed by configuration settings has been reached.
REACHED
MODIFIED This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the current
IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and one or more of its settings
have been modified.
NO ACTIVE ALARMS There are no active alarms in the Alarm list.
NO INACTIVE ALARMS There are no inactive alarms in the Alarm list
PC MODE The START/RUN-OFF switch is in the OFF position, the engine is not running
in order to enter PC mode.
PM DUE Preventative maintenance is now due on the unit. Information on what meter(s)
has timed out and the reset feature is provided under Technician Hour Meters.
PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETED The Pre-Trip test is completed, and some of the Pre-Trip tests did not pass.
Check the Alarm list for Pre-Trip alarms.
PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX Some of the Pre-Trip tests did not pass and the Pre-Trip was not completed.
Check the Alarm list for Pre-Trip alarms.
PRETRIP PASS All of the Pre-Trip tests were ok.
PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER Pre-Trip has been stopped by user.
62-11637 6–2
Message Description
PRODUCTSHIELD: ECONO The unit is operating in ProductShield Econo which overrides normal unit Start-
ON Stop or Continuous Run operation. Refer to Section 4.10.3.
PRODUCTSHIELD: HIGH AIR The unit is operating in ProductShield High Air which overrides normal unit
ON speed operation. Refer to Section 4.10.3.
PRODUCTSHIELD: WINTER The unit is operating in ProductShield Winter which overrides normal unit
ON operation. Refer to Section 4.10.3.
RECORDING DATA - PLEASE This message will be displayed when the unit is starting and the main
WAIT MICRO WILL RESTART microprocessor is completing communicating with another module.
WHEN COMPLETE
RECOVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC This message will be displayed when the unit is in Service mode and the
MODE system is ready for recovery and leak testing.
REMOTE SWITCH 1 OPEN Remote switch is open. May be connected to a refrigerated compartment door
or a remote control switch.
REMOTE SWITCH 1 Shows that the remote switch is open and that the unit is running in low speed.
OPEN - LOW SPEED Switch may be connected to a refrigerated compartment door or a remote
control switch.
SERVICE MODE Selection which is used when servicing the refrigeration system. Refer to
Section 5.2.5.
SETPOINT CHANGED The new setpoint has been entered (saved into microprocessor memory), the
new setpoint will be used.
SETPOINT NOT CHANGED The new setpoint has NOT been entered (NOT saved into microprocessor
memory), the old setpoint will be used.
SETTING SMV: XXX % The START/RUN-OFF switch has been toggled out of the OFF position and the
CSMV is opening.
SLEEP MODE, OFF / ON TO The unit is cycled off in Sleep mode. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the
WAKE OFF position, then back to the START/RUN position to wake the
microprocessor up.
SLEEP WARNING: DOOR The unit is configured for Rail mode and the unit is in Sleep mode and a
OPEN refrigerated compartment door is open. The unit will start as needed for Sleep
mode.
SLEEP WARNING: NO TEMP The unit is running in Sleep mode to charge the battery and (in Engine
CONTROL Operation) warm the engine coolant. It is not running to provide temperature
control.
SLEEP WARNING: REMS1(2) The unit is configured for Rail mode and the unit is in Sleep mode and a remote
OPEN switch is open. The switch may be connected to a refrigerated compartment
door or to a remote control switch. The unit will start as needed for Sleep mode.
SMV CLOSING: WAIT XXX Power Up and the CSMV is closing. XX indicates the number of seconds
SECONDS remaining until valve is fully closed.
START STOP LOCKED The setpoint has been locked into Start-Stop Operation. Continuous Run can
not be selected.
START-STOP MODE Start-Stop Operation has been selected.
SELECTED
STATUS OK The unit is operating correctly.
TECHNICIAN RESET 00011 CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE or 00012 HIGH COOLANT
REQUIRED (AL00021) TEMPERATURE has been activated three times in the last two hours and the
unit has been locked out. Refer to alarm descriptions for further information.
6–3 62-11637
Message Description
TIME SELECTION NOT A time change was started but not entered (saved) in teh Configuration List.
CHANGED
TRIP START ENTERED The Trip Start marker has been placed in the DataLink data recorder.
UNIT BATTERY TOO LOW The unit battery has dropped below 7 volts for more than 10 seconds.
UNIT SHUTDOWN - DOOR The unit has shutdown because the refrigerated compartment door is open.
OPEN
UNIT SHUTDOWN - SEE An active shutdown alarm has shut the unit down, refer to Section 7.
ALARM LIST
UNIT SHUTDOWN - RMS1 The unit has shutdown because a switch is open. May be connected to a door
or a remote control switch.
USE UP/DOWN KEY TO Available items are being displayed or additional items are available for
SCROLL USE = KEY TO selection. Use the ▲ or ▼ key to highlight the desired selection and then use
SELECT ITEM TO CHANGE the “=” key to select it.
VIEWING MENU SOFT KEY Additional soft key selections are available and the MENU key can be used to
SELECTIONS PRESS MENU scroll and view them.
KEY TO SCROLL
WARNING: NO TEMP The temperature sensors have failed and the unit has entered Cargo Protect
CONTROL mode. Refer to Section 4.11.1.
62-11637 6–4
SECTION 7 - ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00011 CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
00015 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
00016 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
00017 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
00019 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
00020 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
00021 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
00022 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
00030 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
00034 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
00035 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
00036 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
00041 ENGINE STALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
00051 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
00054 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
00055 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
00057 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1 (REMS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
00059 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) NOT RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
00060 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) TIME WRONG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
00061 DOOR OPEN (DS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
00066 CHECK EVAP SENSOR GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
00081 CHECK FHR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
00084 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
TOC 62-11637
00093 CHECK STARTUP BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
00097 CHECK SV2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
00132 CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
00133 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
00134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
P00141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
P00143 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
P00144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00148 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00151 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00152 CHECK FUEL/SPEED ACTUATOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00162 CHECK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00164 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00165 CANNOT PUMP DOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
P00177 CHECK EXV (EVXV) SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
P00178 CHECK UL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
P00180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57
P00182 CHECK SV1 VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57
P00186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57
P00191 CHECK UL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–58
P00194 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00196 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60
P00197 CHECK CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60
P00198 LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
P00200 CHECK UL1 CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
P00201 CHECK UL2 CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
P00202 HIGH SIDE LEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–63
62-11637 TOC
P00203 CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–63
P00204 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–64
P00205 CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
00223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
00225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66
00226 SERVICE SOON-PM #1 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66
00232 SETPOINT ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–69
00233 MODEL # ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–69
00237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70
00238 CONFIGURATIONS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
00245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
00246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
00248 CONFIG MODE / HP2 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–73
00255 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–74
02000 UPDATE SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–74
02003 DISPLAY MODULE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
03001 ENGINE LOAD CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
04004 NO SETPOINT CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
05006 POWER ENABLE RELAY FUSE ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
05007 BAD F3 FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77
05008 BAD F10 FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77
05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–78
05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–79
05014 CHECK STARTER SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–80
05016 CHECK REMOTE AMBER LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–80
05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81
05018 CHECK POWER ENABLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–82
07008 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–82
07009 RETURN AIR SENSORS RAT & RAT2 OUT OF RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83
20100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–84
20101 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO REMOTE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–85
21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86
22100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO INPBD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86
22101 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE LOW INP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–87
22102 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE HIGH INP1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88
22103 INPUT LOST CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88
23100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OUTPBD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–89
23101 OUTPUT LOST CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–89
25100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO STP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–90
25101 OVER CURRENT STP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–90
25102 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE STP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–91
26100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–91
26101 ENGINE OVER HEAT ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92
26102 WATER TEMP LOW ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92
TOC 62-11637
26103 WATER TEMP HIGH ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92
26104 BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93
26105 ENGINE OVERRUN ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93
26106 SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93
26108 RACK POSITION SENSOR ABNORMAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–94
26109 ACTUATOR ABNORMAL ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–94
27200 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OPTIONAL COMM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–95
28001 NO COMM FROM FUEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–95
26110 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR ABNORMAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–95
28003 INVALID DOOR SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–96
28004 INVALID REMS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–96
28005 INVALID REMS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–96
28002 NO COMM FROM DOOR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–96
62-11637 TOC
SECTION 7
Alarm Troubleshooting
! WARNING
7.1 Introduction
This section provides guidance for troubleshooting alarms. The alarm light will be illuminated when there is at least
one alarm stored in the system. Instructions for reviewing the active alarm list are provided in Section 3.15 while
instructions for reviewing the inactive alarm list are provided in Section 5.2.2.
When an alarm occurs, look through both active and inactive alarm lists and make note of all alarms. Each alarm
begins with an A (active) or I (inactive) followed by an alarm number and description. Alarms are listed in this guide
by alarm number in ascending order. Alarms that are only activated during a Pretrip will begin with a capital “P”.
Before beginning to troubleshoot an alarm, visually inspect the unit, in particular the area of the unit that is causing
a problem. In many cases the cause of the problem will be obvious once a visual inspection is performed. For
those cases where the cause of the problem is not obvious, this troubleshooting guide will be of assistance.
Troubleshooting should begin with the first alarm that appears in the active alarm list. The first alarm that appears
is the last alarm that was recorded. Other alarms in the list may have contributed to the occurrence of the first
alarm.
The corrective actions in the troubleshooting guide are listed in order of their likeliness of occurrence and ease of
testing. We recommend that you follow the order in which they are presented, however, there may be times when
situations or experience lead to the use of a different order. For example, if the trailer is loaded, condensing section
checks should be done first, even though some evaporator section checks may be listed before them.
When the cause of the problem is corrected, it is not necessary to continue through the remainder of the steps. Some
active alarms will inactivate themselves automatically once the cause has been corrected. Alarms that do not
inactivate themselves automatically must be cleared manually. (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2)
When repairs are completed, run the unit through a Pretrip cycle and verify that no further active alarms occur.
Also, the inactive alarm list should be cleared so that there are no inactive alarms in memory when the unit leaves
the repair facility.
When working on the refrigeration system, an accurately calibrated manifold gauge set should always be installed
to read compressor suction and discharge pressure. Compressor suction pressure is displayed under Unit Data
when in the Driver Mode. In the Advance User Mode (Section 3.13), compressor discharge pressure and
temperature will also be displayed.
In high or low ambient it may be necessary to cool or warm the refrigerated compartment temperature before
performing specific tests, providing that the compartment is not loaded with temperature sensitive product.
! WARNING
The alarm related troubleshooting procedures in this section are to be performed by properly
trained personnel only.
7–1 62-11637
7.2 Notes
NOTE
Note 1: The active alarm list may be cleared when in the Driver Mode or Advanced User Mode by
pressing the CLEAR ALARMS soft key. That is: the alarm is “cleared” from the active alarm list and
moved to the inactive alarm list for later review if the condition that caused the alarm has been
corrected. When Shutdown Alarms are cleared, the unit will attempt to restart. When non-Shutdown
Alarms are cleared, there will be no noticeable change in the unit’s operation.
The Inactive Alarm list may be cleared when in the Technician Mode in the same way. From the
inactive alarm list the technician has the option to “Clear Inactive” alarms only or to “Clear All” alarms.
Clearing the inactive alarm list removes the alarm from the system. However alarms that have been
activated will remain in the data recorder.
NOTE
Note 2: The Virtual Tech system may provide a “signal” voltage when a circuit is not energized
(nominal 3 to 5 volts). This signal voltage is used by the control system to activate an alarm message
if there is a problem in the circuit but should not be used for component testing.
When instructed to test for voltage, energize the component using Component Test Mode to ensure
the correct voltage is being read. Refer to Section 5.2.4. Also, testing may be performed without the
unit starting. To do this, place the unit in PC Mode before using Component Test Mode. Refer to
Section 5.3.2.
NOTE
Note 3: Sensors may be tested by taking a resistance measurement, at the sensor side of the
harness connector, at the sensor location. To do this, being careful not to damage the connector pins,
disconnect the sensor from the harness and measure resistance. Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of
resistances for different sensors.
The interconnecting wiring may also be tested by checking for continuity between the harness side of
the connector at the sensor location and the harness side of the connector at the module.
NOTE
Note 4: Switches (door/remote, high pressure, engine oil pressure and defrost air) may be tested by
checking continuity, at the switch side of the harness connector, at the switch location. To do this,
being careful not to damage the connector pins, disconnect the switch from the harness and check
continuity to determine if the switch is open or closed.
The interconnecting wiring for the door/remote, engine oil pressure and defrost air switches may also
be tested by checking for continuity between the harness side of the connector at the switch location
and the harness side of the connector at the module.
The high pressure switch (HPS) interconnecting wiring may be tested by checking for continuity
between the harness side of the connector at the high pressure switch location and the PCM or JP-1
harness connector.
NOTE
Note 5: Some tests can only be conducted while the unit is operating. The unit may be started
automatically by placing the SROS in the Start/Run position.
62-11637 7–2
7.3 Alarms
00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
NOTE
This is an optional alarm which will only occur when a fuel level sensor is present & configured “YES”.
• ACTIVATION: The ENCU circuit is energized (3MM-9) and fuel level is 15% or less for more than 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the ENCU circuit is energized (3MM-9) and fuel level is above 17%
for more than 30 seconds, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning
the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active alarm
should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any
active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Low Fuel Level - Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
2. Check Fuel Level Sensor - Refer to procedure for alarm 00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT. Alarm
condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
00011 CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
NOTE
This alarm may be activated if too high a viscosity oil is used in cold ambient.
• ACTIVATION: The ENCU circuit is energized (3MM-9) and engine oil pressure is below 12 psig (0.82 bar)
for longer than 5 seconds while the engine is running.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by
turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the active
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Section 7.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Engine Oil Level - Check engine oil dipstick, add engine oil as needed to fill.
2. Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS) Power & Wiring

a. Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. Verify that there is no physical damage to the switch.
Check the connections for damage and corrosion.
b. Using Component Test Mode, energize the ENCU Power Circuit. Check for power at the switch con-
nector. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check the connectors and wiring between terminals for
damage, moisture or corrosion.
c. Check for continuity from switch connector terminal A to ENCU-15. If good continuity is not present,
check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
d. Check for continuity from switch connector terminal B to ENCU-18. If good continuity is not present,
3. Check ENOPS Switch - Remove switch, connect to an external pressure source and test. Contacts close
on a pressure rise at 15 psig (1.02 bar). Contacts open on a pressure fall at 12 psig (0.82 bar).
4. Check Engine Oil Pressure - Connect mechanical oil gauge. Oil pressure must be greater than 15 psig
(1.02 bar.).
7–3 62-11637
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• ACTIVATION:
Condition 1: Ambient temperature is below 120°F (48.9°C) and engine coolant temperature is above
230°F (110°C).
Condition 2: Ambient temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C) and engine coolant temperature is
above 241°F (116°C).
Condition 3: Ambient temperature is at or above 120°F (48.9°C) and the engine coolant temperature
has remained between 230 and 241°F (110 and 116°C) for more than 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if engine coolant temperature falls below 212°F
(100°C), or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off and
back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coolant Level
! WARNING
Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant system. If the cap must be removed, do so very
a. Check coolant level in overflow bottle. Level must be in the normal range.
b. Inspect connecting tube between overflow bottle and radiator. Connections must be airtight. No
leakage or holes in tube.
2. Check Freeze Point Of Coolant - Use Coolant Tester to check concentration of anti-freeze mixture.
Must be between 40% to 60% Ethylene Glycol to water mixture.
3. Check Airflow Through Radiator & Condenser Coil

a. Inspect condenser & radiator. Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged.
Condenser/Radiator coil must be clean.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Verify even airflow through the entire coil and no “dead” spots.
c. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping.
Replace if required. Refer to Section 8.6.
4. Check Water Pump/Alternator Belt Tension & Condition - Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping.
Refer to Figure 8.15. Replace if required.
Alarm continued on next page...
62-11637 7–4
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - CONTINUED
5. Check Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
a. Refer to procedure for alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR. Alarm condition must be
corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
b. Inspect sensor & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to sensor. Verify no damage,
moisture, or corrosion in connector.
c. Check sensor resistance. (Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2) 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) Refer to
Table 8–3 for complete table of temperatures & resistance values.
6. Check Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Wiring

a. Inspect harness & control box connector pins & terminals. (See wiring schematic Section 10.3).
Verify no physical damage to harness and no damage or corrosion in connectors.
b. Check voltage at the sensor connector with the microprocessor powered up. Voltage reading
should be 2.5 ± 0.1 VDC. This verifies microprocessor output and wiring connections to sensor.
7. Check Engine Cooling System

a. Compare actual engine temperature to the Unit Data reading. Refer to Section 3.14. Temperature
must be within ± 20°F (± 11.1°C).
b. Test operation of thermostat. Must operate correctly.
c. Check water pump operation. Verify no seepage at weep hole, bearings tight and quiet, and
impeller firmly attached to shaft.
d. Check cooling system for scale, sludge, rust, etc. Coolant must be clean & clear with no foreign
particles or substances in it. Flush & clean the coolant system as necessary.
e. Check water pump bypass hose to thermostat housing for internal blockage. Must be clear and
open.
7–5 62-11637
00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: Compressor discharge pressure switch (HPS) contacts are open. HPS contacts open
when the discharge pressure rises to 465 psig (32 bar).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if the compressor discharge pressure falls below 350
psig (24 bar), or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. If Alarm Occurs During Pretrip Test 12, 13 or 14 (Pretrip descriptions can be found in Section 3.6)
Check that SV1 is opening. During Pretrip tests 12, 13 and 14, SV1 may be de-energized for 1 sec-
ond to reduce discharge pressure (Refer to Figure 2.10). If SV1 fails to open during the 1 second
that it is de-energized, this alarm may occur. Repair SV1 as required.
2. Check System Pressures - Install a manifold gauge set to check and compare actual compressor dis-
charge & suction pressures with those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on
comparison. If discharge pressure is in normal range, proceed to step 6.

b. Check airflow (with unit running). Verify even airflow through the entire coil, and no “dead” spots.
c. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping.
Replace if required. Refer to Section 8.6.
4. Perform Pretrip (Section 3.6) - Check for Pretrip alarms. Any active alarms must be corrected and
cleared before proceeding.
5. Check Refrigerant Charge - Refer to Section 8.7.2.

6. Check HPS Power And Wiring
a. Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. Verify that there is no physical damage to the switch.
Check the connections for damage and corrosion.
b. Disconnect switch connector and check for power at the A position (includes J1, SROS, and SP-
9). If a minimum of 11 VDC is not present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for
c. Check continuity from the switch connector B position to PCM-15 (includes SP-5). If good continu-
ity is not present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corro-
sion.
7. Check HPS Switch
a. With discharge pressure below the switch closing pressure (refer to Section 2.10), disconnect
switch connector and check continuity across the switch. Switch closed.
b. Check/test switch operation. Refer to Section 8.9.11
8. Refer to Refrigeration Troubleshooting (Section 9.3) - Discharge pressure must be in range for the
current ambient and refrigerated compartment conditions.
62-11637 7–6
00015 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH
• ACTIVATION: Battery voltage at the main microprocessor is greater than 17 VDC.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the main microprocessor is
between 11 and 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning
the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Battery Voltage
a. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be between 11-16 VDC.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit running. Must be between 12-16 VDC.
NOTE
Voltage with unit running should always be higher than voltage with unit off due to battery charging.
2. Check Alternator Voltage

a. Test voltage at PCM-T3 with unit off. Must be between 11-16 VDC.
b. Test voltage at PCM-T3 with unit running. Must be between 12-16 VDC.
3. Check Voltage At Main Microprocessor
a. Check voltage reading at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34. Must be between 11-16 VDC.
b. Check Unit Data voltage reading. Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34.
7–7 62-11637
00016 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW
• ACTIVATION: Battery voltage at the main microprocessor is less than 10 VDC (except when the engine
starter is engaged).
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm. Alarm condition only if activated while starting unit.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the main microprocessor is
between 11 - 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the
unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For 00051 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING
a. Inspect battery cable ends and posts. Must be clean and tight.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Test voltage at battery with unit running. Must be above reading with unit off.
NOTE
Voltage with unit running should always be higher than voltage with unit off due to battery charging.
d. Perform load test on battery. Follow battery manufacturer’s procedure.

3. Check Connections to Main Microprocessor
a. Check connections at PCM-T1, T2 & T3. Verify that connections are not damaged or corroded.
b. Check voltage reading at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Check Unit Data voltage reading. Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34.
62-11637 7–8
00017 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP
• ACTIVATION: Alarm 00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR is not active AND:
Ambient temperature is below 120°F (48.9°C) and discharge temperature is greater than 309°F
(154.4°C) for 3 minutes, or ambient temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C) and discharge temperature
is greater than 340°F (171.1°C) for 3 minutes, or discharge temperature exceeded 350°F (176.7°C).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes with the ambient temperature below 120°F (48.9°C),
when the discharge temperature falls below 300°F (148.8°C); or auto reset after 15 minutes with the
ambient temperature above 120°F (48.9°C) when the discharge temperature falls below 330°F (165.4°C);
or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. If Alarm Occurs During Pretrip Test 14 (Pretrip descriptions can be found in Section 3.6) - Check
compressor by performing a compressor test. Refer to Section 8.8.1.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots.
c. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, no cracking, and no slipping.
Refer to Section 8.6. Replace if required.
4. Check System Pressures - Install a manifold gauge set to check and compare actual compressor dis-
comparison.
5. Check Compressor Discharge Sensor (CDT) - Refer to procedure for alarm 00125 CHECK COMP
DISCHARGE SENSOR. Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
6. If alarm occurred during Defrost, check DTT
a. Visually inspect the mounting of DTT. Must be mounted tightly to the tube sheet, with the center screw
properly torqued. Ensure sensing side is in contact with the tube sheet. Refer to Figure 2.3.
b. Using a service (test) thermometer check temperature of evaporator tube sheet at DTT location and
compare actual temperature to the Unit Data reading. Must be within ±2°F (1°C).
7. Perform Pretrip Check - Clear Active Alarm list, then run Pretrip & check for any new alarms. Any active
alarms must be corrected and cleared before proceeding.
8. Check System For Non-Condensables - Check refrigeration system for non-condensable gas(es). No
non-condensable gas(es) may be present. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
9. Check Compressor Cylinder Valves & Gaskets - Remove compressor heads & inspect condition of
cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves & gaskets. Must be in good condition. Install new parts
and gaskets as required. Refer to Section 8.8.
7–9 62-11637
00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: The compressor is operating with the suction pressure less than -3 psig (-0.20 bar) for
more than the LP SHUTDOWN DELAY Configuration (up to 5 minutes) with RAT above -10°F (-23.3°C)
or less than -8 psig (-0.53 bar) with RAT at any temperature.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if suction pressure is more than -2 psig (-0.13 bar) or
alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit OFF, then ON again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Visually Inspect Unit - Look for damage to the liquid line causing a restriction or any signs of tempera-
ture drop at the filter drier. Verify all tubing from the receiver to the evaporator section is in good condi-
tion. Verify there is no temperature drop at the filter drier or anywhere on the liquid line.
2. Check Airflow Through Evaporator Coil/Section
a. Inspect coil. Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged. Coil must be clean.
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Good air flow. Return air not restricted. Air chute in good condition.
d. Check fan clutch. Must be fully engaged.
e. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to
Section 8.6. Replace if required.
4. Check System Pressures - Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge,
suction and evaporator outlet pressure to the Unit Data readings. Suction pressure must be above -3 psig
(-0.2 bar). Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
5. Manually Defrost Unit - Defrost unit and terminate automatically. Typical defrost cycle time is 5-20 min-
utes. Visually verify that all ice is cleared from evaporator coil.
7. Check Unloader Operation - Check Front (UL1) and Rear (UL2) Unloaders. Refer to alarm 00085
CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT and 00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT.
8. Check Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) - Refer to Section 8.9.8.
9. Check Expansion Valve (EVXV) - Refer to Section 8.9.9.
62-11637 7–10
00019 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN
NOTE
This is an optional alarm. This alarm will only occur if the Fuel Level Sensor Configuration is YES.
• ACTIVATION: The fuel level is 10% or less for more than 30 seconds AND Alarm 00126 CHECK FUEL
SENSOR CIRCUIT is not active.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when fuel level is above 25% for more than 1 minute, or alarm may be
manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Low Fuel Level - Add fuel as needed.
2. Check Low Fuel Level Sensor - Refer to procedure for alarm 00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT.
Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
00020 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS

• ACTIVATION: This option must be installed and alarm must be enabled by configuring the Compressor
Alarm Shutdown to YES. Alarms 00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE, 00017 HIGH COMP DIS-
CHARGE TEMP, 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE, 00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE,
00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM, 00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE or 00056 CHECK EVAPO-
RATOR AIR FLOW individually occur 3 times within the last 2 hours.
• RESET CONDITION: Clear the alarm from inactive alarm list. This alarm and the alarm(s) that caused it
can not be reset by turning switch OFF and then ON again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Determine Which Alarm Activated This Alarm
a. Check active alarm list for 00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE, 00017 HIGH COMP DIS-
CHARGE TEMP, 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE, 00027 HIGH SUCTION PRES-
SURE, 00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM, 00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE or 00056
CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW. One or more of these alarms will be present.
b. Follow the troubleshooting steps for the alarm(s) found, and correct the alarm condition. All alarm
conditions must be corrected.
2. Reset Alarm - Clear all inactive alarms (Section 5.2.2). All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
7–11 62-11637
00021 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED
• ACTIVATION: The High Engine Temperature Shutdown Configuration and/or Engine Oil Pressure Shut-
down Configuration is/are set to YES, and Alarm 00011 CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE, 00012 HIGH
COOLANT TEMPERATURE, or 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR - Check Engine Coolant Sen-
sor has become active and shut the unit down three times within the past 2 hours.
• RESET CONDITION: Clear the alarm from inactive alarm list. This alarm and the alarm(s) that caused it
can not be reset by turning switch OFF and then ON again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Determine Which Alarm Activated This Alarm - Check active alarm list for 00011 CHECK ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE, 00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE, or 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SEN-
SOR. One of these alarms will be present. Follow the troubleshooting steps for the alarm(s) found, and
correct the alarm condition. All alarm conditions must be corrected.
2. Reset Alarm - Clear all inactive alarms (Section 5.2.2). All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
00022 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT

• ACTIVATION: Alarms 00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR and/or 00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP
SENSOR are not active and Compressor Suction Superheat (Compressor Suction Temperature (CST)
minus saturated temperature for Compressor Suction Pressure (CSP)) is less than 5°C (9°F) for more
than 2 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes, or alarm may be manually reset using the display
mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
suction and evaporator outlet pressure to the Unit Data readings. Refer to Section 8.9.12.
2. Check Evaporator Section - Check return air bulkhead, air chute, and the evaporator coil (for cleanli-
ness and airflow). Refer to Section 9.3.12.
4. Check Expansion Valve (EVXV) - Refer to Section 8.9.9.
62-11637 7–12
00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: The refrigeration system is running and suction pressure has been greater than 98 psig
(6.7 bar) for more than 10 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when suction pressure is less than 75 psig (5.1 bar) for 5 minutes and
configured for Alarm Only, or Auto Reset after 15 minutes if configured as a Shutdown Alarm or, alarm
may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check System Pressures - Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge &
suction pressures with those shown in Unit Data. Suction pressure must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar) and
should be in the normal range for ambient & refrigerated compartment conditions. Refer to Section
8.9.12.
2. Check Compressor Drive Coupling - Verify that compressor coupling is intact and the compressor
crankshaft is turning. Repair as required.
5. Check Compressor
a. Perform Pump-Down Test. Refer to Section 8.8.1. Must hold a vacuum and not equalize in a short
period of time.
b. Cover condenser and build-up discharge pressure. Must be able to raise pressure to 400 psig (27.2
bar).
c. Disassemble and inspect compressor valve plates, cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves
and pistons, etc. Must be intact, clean, and in good working order. Refer to Section 8.8.
6. Check Expansion Valve (EVXV)

a. Visually inspect valve. Check coil is seated properly.
b. Check valve. Refer to Section 8.9.9.
7–13 62-11637
00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
• ACTIVATION:
Condition 1: When system has been operating in Pulldown for more than five minutes and delta-t
(SAT - RAT) is between -3.0°F (-1.7°C) and +5°F (+2.8°C).
Condition 2: Discharge pressure is not at least 5 psig (0.34 bar) higher than suction pressure for
more than 10 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL:
Condition 1: If the DTT and/or SAT temperatures are cool enough to allow a defrost the unit will go
into defrost. Following defrost, if activation criteria for Condition 1 reoccur within 45 minutes of the
defrost cycle, alarm or alarm and shutdown as Configured. If, following the defrost and the 45 minute
wait time, the activation criteria for Condition 1 reoccur the unit will go into defrost again. If the DTT
and SAT temperatures are too warm to allow a defrost, alarm or alarm and shutdown as Configured.
Condition 2: Alarm or alarm and shutdown as Configured.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when discharge pressure is more than 20 psig (1.26 bar) above the suc-
tion pressure for five minutes, or alarm has been active and unit has been shutdown more then 14 minutes
or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Compressor Drive Coupling - Verify that compressor couping is intact and the compressor
2. Check Sensors and/or Transducers - Using an accurate temperature measurement device or pressure
measurement device, check SAT, RAT, CDP, EVOP and CSP readings. Readings must be the same on
measurement device & Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on pressure reading compari-
son.
4. Check Compressor
period of time.
bar).
62-11637 7–14
00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE
• ACTIVATION: The unit has been operating in the heat cycle for more than 5 minutes, and the SAT is more
than 5.5°F (3°C) colder than the RAT constantly for more than 60 seconds. (Unit is actually cooling the air
going through the evaporator).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes or alarm may be manually reset using the display
mounted keys or by turning the START/RUN-OFF switch OFF and then back On again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Perform Pretrip Check - Run Pretrip & check for alarms. Any active alarms must be corrected and
2. Refer to Section 9.3.6, Refrigeration System Not Heating
00030 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME

• ACTIVATION:
If Configured STANDARD: The unit has shutdown on an alarm 3 times without having run for at least
15 minutes between each shutdown (not including door switch shutdowns).
If Configured RAIL: The unit has shutdown on an alarm and attempted to restart for the configured
number of times without having run for at least 15 minutes between each shutdown (not including
door switch shutdowns).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only or shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit
off, then back on again. If the Configuration is set to Rail Mode, this alarm will reset after 4 hours and a
rail alarm reset will be recorded in the data recorded.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check For Shutdown Alarms - Alarm conditions must be corrected and alarm(s) cleared to continue.
7–15 62-11637
00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE
• ACTIVATION: Engine has tried to start three times unsuccessfully.
off, then back on again. If the Configuration is set to Rail Mode, this alarm will reset after 4 hours. Rail
alarm reset will be recorded in the data recorder.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Section 7.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Additional Alarms - If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00041
ENGINE STALLED, 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT, 00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT, 00079
CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT, 05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT, 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT or 00086
CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required. Clear
alarms, restart and check for repeat alarm(s).
2. Check For Low Fuel Level - Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
3. Check for Alarms - Check for 00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT and 00035 CHECK
STARTER CIRCUIT. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
4. Check Engine Control Unit (ENCU) and Fuel Speed Actuator (FSA)
a. Check voltage from fuse F3 through PCM-34 and SP-6 to ENCU-22. Verify correct fuse, see Fig-
ure 2.7. Must have minimum 11 VDC with the battery connected and SROS in the OFF position.
b. Check voltage from 3MM-9 to ENCU-44. Must have minimum 11 VDC with SROS in the START/
RUN position. If not, energize the run relay output using Component Test Mode (refer to Section
5.2.4) and retest.
c. Check for ground at ENCU-19 and ENCUGND-A (at the battery negative cable connection). If
ground not good, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
d. Inspect fuel/speed actuator (FSA), engine speed sensor (ENSSN) and engine speed control unit
(ENCU) connector pins & terminals. Verify no physical damage to components, and no damage or
corrosion in connectors.
e. Check resistance & amp draw of FSA. Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
f. Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine manual.
5. Check Engine Air-intake System

a. Check air cleaner indicator. Flag must not be visible.
b. Inspect air intake system. Verify hoses & tubes in good condition, with no kinks or restrictions.
6. Check For Correct Engine Oil - Check viscosity is correct for ambient conditions. Refer to Section 2.8.
7. Check Engine Exhaust System - Exhaust system must be clear and unobstructed.
8. Check Engine Compression - Refer to Engine Workshop manual.
62-11637 7–16
00034 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP
• ACTIVATION: Engine is turning more than 500 RPM for 20 seconds after unit shutdown or cycled off.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check to Ensure Engine is Running - Verify that engine is still running. Engine should not be running.
2. Check Start/Run-Off Switch & Circuit

a. Check SROS. It must be in the OFF position.
b. Check two way communication equipment. It must not be wired so unit can start with SROS in the
OFF position. Correct wiring as needed.
c. Check voltage to 2MM-35: 0 VDC at 2MM-35 (including SP-9) and 3MM-16.
3. Check For Alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR.
4. Check Fuel Speed Actuator (FSA) & Circuit
a. Check voltage to ENCU-44. Must have 0 VDC between 3MM-9 and ENCU-44.
b. Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine manual.
7–17 62-11637
00035 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: Engine speed fails to reach 50 rpm during 2 start attempts.
off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Starting Sequence - Check to see if engine starts, runs for a few seconds then shuts off. If not,
continue with Step 2. If yes, check engine speed sensor. Refer to procedure for alarm 00130 CHECK
ENGINE RPM SENSOR.
2. Check Fuse - Check Fuse F10. Replace fuse as required. Clear alarms, restart and check for repeat
alarm(s).
3. Check Starter Solenoid Circuit
a. Place SROS in START/RUN position. After buzzer sounds, check for power at starter solenoid &
3MM-12. If there is not a minimum of 11 VDC, check connectors and wiring between terminals for
b. Inspect wiring to starter motor. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no physical dam-
age to wiring or battery cable end, and no damage or corrosion in connections.
4. Check Starter
a. Inspect starter and wiring. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no damage or corro-
sion. Wiring and battery cable must be clean and tight.
b. Check voltage to starter motor. Must be above 10 VDC while cranking.
c. Check resistance of starter motor. Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
d. Check amperage draw of starter. Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
a. Inspect cable ends and posts. Must be clean and tight, with no corrosion.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must have minimum 11 VDC.
c. Perform load test on battery. Follow battery manufacturer’s procedure.
a. Check voltage from fuse F3 through PCM-34 and SP-18 to ENCU-22. Verify correct fuse, see Figure
2.7. Must have minimum 11 VDC with the battery connected and SROS in the OFF position.
b. Check voltage from 3MM-9 to ENCU-44. Must have minimum 11 VDC with SROS in START/ RUN. If
not, energize the run relay output using Component Test Mode (refer to Section 5.2.4) and retest.
c. Check for ground at ENCU-19 and ENCUGND-A (at the negative battery cable connection). If ground
not good, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
(ENCU) connector pins & terminals. Verify there is no physical damage to components, and no
damage or corrosion in connectors.
7. Check For Correct Engine Oil - Check viscosity is correct for ambient conditions. Refer to Section 2.8.
62-11637 7–18
00036 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• ACTIVATION: Coolant temperature is below 32°F (0°C) after the engine has been running for 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when coolant temperature is higher than 36°F (2.2°C) or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coolant Temperature - Check temperature of coolant or upper radiator hose. Must be above
32°F (0°C).
2. Check Engine Coolant Sensor - Refer to Alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR.
00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM

• ACTIVATION: The control system is calling for low engine speed operation, and engine speed is less than
1200 rpm or greater than 1500 rpm for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the control system
calls for a change from high to low speed, or when unit first starts).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if control system is calling for low engine speed operation and signal is
within 1220 and 1480 rpm for 60 seconds or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted
keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Force Low Speed Operation - Set the High Speed Delay Functional Parameter to 10 minutes and
restart unit. (Reset following testing) System should run in low speed. (If not, check speed overrides,
Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System is calling for low speed when performing steps 3 & 4.
2. Check Engine Speed
a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Speed must be within range shown
above.
b. Compare actual speed with that shown in Unit Data. Readings must be within ± 50 rpm.
3. Check Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA) - Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine
workshop manual.
4. Check Engine Air-Intake System
5. Check Engine Exhaust System - Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.
7–19 62-11637
00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• ACTIVATION: The control system is calling for high speed operation, and engine speed is less than 1650
rpm, or greater than 1950 rpm for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the control system calls for
a change from low to high speed, or when unit first starts).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if control system is calling for high speed operation and the speed is
within 1670 and 1930 rpm for 60 seconds or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted
keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Force High Speed Operation - Place unit in continuous run, adjust setpoint above 11°F (-12°C) and set
the Air Flow Functional Parameter to HIGH. (Reset following testing). System should run in high speed.
(If not, check speed overrides, Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System is calling for high speed when performing
steps 3 & 4.
2. Check Engine Speed

a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Refer to Table 2–1. Speed must be within
range shown above.
manual.

62-11637 7–20
00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM
• ACTIVATION: Alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR is not active and engine speed is less than
1200 rpm or greater than 1950 rpm for 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if engine speed is within the specified range for 5 minutes or alarm may
be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
manual.
3. Force Low Speed Operation - Set the High Speed Delay Functional Parameter to 10 minutes and
restart unit. (Reset following testing). System should run in low speed. (If not, check speed overrides,
Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System is calling for low speed when performing step 4.
4. Check Low Speed Engine RPM
a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Refer to Table 2–1. Speed must be within
range provided above.
5. Force High Speed Operation - Place unit in continuous run, adjust setpoint above 11°F (-12°C) and set
the Air Flow Functional Parameter to HIGH. (Reset following testing). The System should run in High
Speed. (If not, check speed overrides, Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System is calling for high speed when
performing step 6.
6. Check High Speed Engine RPM
a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Refer to Table 2–1.
7–21 62-11637
00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: Engine preheat amperage is less than 70 Amps with heater activated.
NOTE
This alarm can only occur when the preheat time is greater than 14 seconds. Refer to Table 4–1 for
preheat times.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if amperage is greater than 70 amps for at least 14 seconds during the
preheat cycle, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarm 05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY - Alarm conditions must be corrected and the
alarm cleared to continue.
2. Check Engine Preheat Circuit

a. Using Component Test Mode, refer to Section 5.2.4, energize engine preheat circuit. Check dis-
played amp draw, must be greater than 70 amps.
NOTICE
DO NOT leave the air intake circuit energized for the full 5 minutes if full amperage is shown,
as the intake air heater element life will be greatly shortened.
b. Check for power at PCM-T4 and EPH +. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors
and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
c. Replace PCM with known good component.
3. Check Engine Preheat Circuit - Check resistance of EPH. Refer to Section 2.8 for specifications.
62-11637 7–22
00041 ENGINE STALLED
• ACTIVATION: The control system is calling for the engine to run, Engine speed sensor is good, and
engine speed is less than 10 rpm; or Alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR is ON, and the oil
pressure switch contacts are open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Restart after 15 minutes, or Alarm may be manually reset using the display
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Section 7.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Additional Alarms
a. If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO
MODE, 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT, 00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT, 00079 CHECK
SV4 CIRCUIT, 05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT, 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT or 00086
CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse as required. Clear
alarms, restart and check for repeat alarm(s).
b. Check for alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR. When alarms 00130 and 00041 occur at
the same time, generally the engine has run out or is running out of fuel. This causes the engine
speed to surge and drop. Check fuel tank and add fuel as necessary. Check fuel lines between the
fuel tank and the fuel pump inlet for air leakage.
2. Check Start/Run-Off Switch & Circuit

a. Check SROS. Must be in the START/RUN position
b. Check two way communication equipment. Must be set to allow operation and calling for opera-
tion.
3. Check Fuel System

a. Check for Alarm 00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING. Fill tank as needed.
b. Check fuel flow. Unrestricted fuel flow through system. Pump screen(s) clean. Fuel not gelled.
c. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
a. Check voltage from fuse F3 through PCM-34 and SP-6 to ENCU-22. Verify correct fuse, see Fig-
ure 2.7. Must have minimum 11 VDC with the battery connected and SROS in the OFF position.
RUN position. If not, energize the run relay output using Component Test Mode (refer to Section
5.2.4) and retest.
c. Check for ground at ENCU-19 and ENCUGND-A (at the negative battery cable connection). If
f. Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine workshop manual.
7–23 62-11637
00041 ENGINE STALLED - CONTINUED
5. Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) - Inspect harness, connector pins & terminals. (See wiring sche-
matic Section 10.) Verify no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in con-
nectors.

8. Check Engine
a. Check injection pump timing. Timing must be correct.
b. Check engine valve adjustment. Rocker arm clearance must be correct.
c. Check engine compression. Compression must be above 400 psig (27.2 bar).
9. Check Refrigeration System - Check discharge & suction pressures. Must be within normal operating
range for conditions.
00051 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING

• ACTIVATION: Unit is running and the current flow is less than -1.0 amps (discharge) between the alterna-
tor and the battery for 3 continuous minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only, or if Alternator Check Shutdown Configuration is set to “YES” shutdown &
alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset (if not shutdown) when alternator is charging or alarm may be manually
reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Water Pump/Alternator Belt Tension & Condition - Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping.
Refer to Section Figure 8.15 . Replace if required.
2. Check Current Transformer (CT)

a. Check current value. Power up control system in PC Mode. (Refer to Section 5.3.2.) Check Unit
Data. Must be -2.0 to 1.5A with no load.
b. Check CT power from main microprocessor. Must have +5 VDC from terminal 2MM-29 to PCM-31.
c. Check CT ground to main microprocessor. Check wiring from terminal 2MM-23 to PCM-30.
d. Check CT signal to main microprocessor. Check wiring from terminal 2MM-12 to PCM-29.
3. Check Alternator Wiring & Output

a. Check output & ground wiring (with unit OFF). Ground from alternator G terminal to PCM-T2. Positive
from alternator B+ terminal to PCM-T3.
b. Check output (with unit running). When the unit is started, voltage at the battery will begin near 12.0
VDC, and slowly rise toward 13.5 VDC as the battery charges.
4. Check for Add-on Equipment Drawing Too Much Current - Check amperage of added-on compo-
nents & accessories. Total current draw including the actual unit current draw and all add-on components
& accessories must be less than alternator rating.
62-11637 7–24
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE
• ACTIVATION:
Condition One: If the unit is running in Pulldown and the SAT is not greater than 1°F (0.56°C) below
the RAT or if the unit is running in Pull-Up and the SAT is not above the RAT, the configured action
(Alarm only after 30 minutes or Alarm and Shutdown after 45 minutes) will be activated.
NOTE: If the Out-Of-Range Alarm Functional Parameter is set to OFF, the following conditions will
not trigger an alarm or shutdown.
Condition Two: If the refrigerated compartment temperature has been within ± 2.7°F (± 1.5°C) for
perishable setpoints or + 2.7°F (± 1.5°C) for frozen of setpoint at least once since the unit was started
and is now further away from setpoint than the limit set in the Out-Of-Range Alarm Functional
Parameter [4°, 5°, or 7°F (2°, 3°, or 4°C)], the configured action (Alarm only after 30 minutes or Alarm
and Shutdown after 45 minutes) will be activated.
Condition Three: If a shutdown alarm occurs and the RAT is further away from setpoint than the limit
set in the Out-Of-Range Alarm Functional Parameter [4°, 5°, or 7°F (2°, 3°, or 4°C)], the configured
action (Alarm only after 30 minutes or Alarm and Shutdown after 45 minutes) will be activated regard-
less if the refrigerated compartment temperature has been in-range or not.
• UNIT CONTROL: If the alarm is not Configured for shutdown, alarm only. If the alarm is Configured for
shutdown the unit will shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION:
Condition 1: Auto reset; If the unit is running in Pulldown and the SAT is greater than 1°F (0.56°C)
below the RAT or if the unit is running in Pull-Up and the SAT is greater than the RAT.
Condition 2 & 3: Auto reset when the temperature is within ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) for perishable setpoints
or + 2.7°F (± 1.5°C) for frozen setpoint.
For Any Condition: Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys OR by turning the
unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: The 30 or 45 minute timer is reset and starts again whenever:
• The unit cycles off and restarts in Start-Stop.
• The unit goes into and comes out of Defrost.
NOTE: This alarm does not go into the Inactive Alarm List when it becomes inactive or is cleared.
NOTE: This alarm will not be activated in Sleep Mode.
NOTE: For Condition Two, the temperature criteria for this alarm is reset, and the refrigerated compartment tem-
perature must again go In Range before this alarm can be activated if any of the following occur:
• Pretrip is started.
• Setpoint is changed.
• A door switch or remote switch is installed and configured as a door switch, and the switch is opened indi-
cating that the compartment door has been opened.
7–25 62-11637
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Compartment Doors - Must be closed, and not allowing any air leakage.
2. Defrost Evaporator - Initiate manual defrost cycle. Defrost must terminate automatically. Verify that all
ice is cleared from the evaporator coil.
3. Check for Shutdown Alarm(s) - Alarm conditions must be corrected and alarm(s) cleared to continue.
4. Check for Alarm 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE - Alarm conditions must be corrected and
the alarm cleared to continue.
6. Check System Pressures - Install manifold gauge set to check and compare actual compressor dis-
comparison.
7. Check for Alarm 00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW - Alarm conditions must be corrected and
9. Check for Low Delta-T - Read delta-t from Unit Data. In Cool, the delta-t must be greater than (cooling
more than) -1°F (-0.56°C). In Heat the delta-t must be greater than 0 (SAT must be higher than RAT).
62-11637 7–26
00054 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE
• ACTIVATION: Defrost cycle did not terminate automatically. (DTT and SAT did not reach termination tem-
perature of 55°F/12.8°C within 45 minutes or the SAT rose to 120°F/48.9°C during the cycle.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. While this alarm is active, the defrost timer will be temporarily set to initiate
a defrost cycle 1.5 hours of unit running time after the alarm comes on.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when defrost cycle is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Evaporator Fan Clutch In Defrost - Must completely disengage fan.
2. Check Refrigerant Charge - Refer to Section 8.7.2. Charge must be correct.
3. Check for Alarm 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE - Alarm conditions must be corrected and
4. Check DTT
a. Using a service (test) thermometer check temperature of evaporator tube sheet at DTT location and
compare with Unit Data. Must be within 2°F (1°C)
b. Check DTT and RAT wiring. Verify that RAT temperature is being displayed as RAT in unit Unit Data
and that DTT is being displayed as DTT. Correct wiring if required.
c. Check DTT and SAT resistance. 10K Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of resis-
tances for different sensors.
d. Inspect DTT Should be fastened securely in place. Flat area of DTT must be against metal surface.
6. Refer to Section 9.3.6 - Refrigeration System Not Heating
7–27 62-11637
00055 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH (DAS)
• ACTIVATION: The defrost air switch has called for a defrost cycle within 8 minutes of a defrost termina-
tion for 2 consecutive defrost cycles. (The air switch contacts were closed continuously for 15 seconds
before the defrost cycle was started.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. While this alarm is active, the defrost air switch will NOT be used to initiate
a defrost cycle; however the Defrost Timer will initiate a defrost cycle 90 minutes after the alarm comes
on, and the manual defrost switch will remain operative.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when defrost cycle terminates correctly, and the air switch does not call
for a defrost cycle within the 8 minutes following defrost termination, or alarm may be manually reset
using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Condition of Refrigerated Compartment & Load
a. Check condition of refrigerated compartment doors & seals. Doors must be closed, and door seals
must seal and prevent entrance of outside air.
b. Check condition of evaporator. Check for blockage sufficient to cause an air pressure differential
across the coil great enough to close the contacts of the defrost air switch. Coil must be free of ice
following defrost.
c. Check condition of product. If product is warm and moist, frequent defrost cycles can be expected.
2. Check DAS Power and Wiring

a. Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. Verify no physical damage to switch. No damaged or
corrosion in connections.
b. If required, power switch by placing the unit in PC Mode. Check for power at switch connector.
Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage,
moisture or corrosion.
c. Check for continuity from switch connector plus terminal to 3MM-19. If good continuity is not pres-
ent, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
d. Check for continuity from switch connector minus terminal to 3MM-29. If good continuity is not
present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
3. Check Defrost Air Switch and Tubing - Check tubing and perform testing as required. Refer to Section
8.9.13.
62-11637 7–28
00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW
• ACTIVATION: In Heat Mode, the suction pressure has been higher than 100 PSIG (6.8 bar) for more than
60 seconds OR
In Cool Mode, SAT is 5°F (2.8°C) or more warmer than RAT for 3.5 minutes. After the first occurrence of
this alarm, the MessageCenter will display “NO TEMP CONTROL - SEE ALARM LIST”.
NOTE
For this alarm the unit must be running. This alarm will not occur in either the Defrost or Pretrip
cycles.
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm.

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset in 15 minutes if Alarm 00030 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME is not
also active or, alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then
back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Verify good air flow, and Return Air not restricted. Air chute in good
condition.
d. Check fan clutch. Must be fully engaged. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify
no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to Section 8.6. Replace if required.
comparison.
5. Check SV4 - Refer to SV4 Checkout Procedure, Section 8.9.6.
6. Refer to Refrigeration Troubleshooting - Check low cooling capacity causes. Refer to Section 9.3.2 &
Section 9.3.4.
7–29 62-11637
00057 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1 (REMS1)
• ACTIVATION: REMS1 is set to trigger an alarm if the switch is activated (opened or closed, depending on
switch type) for more than five seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: May be configured as alarm only, alarm and force low engine speed, or alarm and shut-
down.
Alarm Only: Auto reset after the switch has deactivated for more than five seconds.
Shutdown: Auto reset after three minutes (minimum off time for switch activated condition) and the switch
has deactivated for more than five seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
IF A SWITCH IS INSTALLED:
1. Determine What REMS1 is Activated By - REMS1 may be connected to a compartment door or some
other device. Locate the device used as REMS1.
2. Check to See if REMS1 has Activated - Inspect device used to activate REMS1. For example, Com-
partment door must be closed, and switch must be deactivated.
3. Check Configuration for REMS1 - Verify that Configuration is set for the type of switch being used (i.e.
when switch is activated, switch contacts are closed; etc). Configuration must agree with switch type.
4. Check Wiring
a. Visually inspect wiring to REMS1. Wiring must be connected.
b. Visually inspect condition of switch. Must not be damaged, wet, corroded, etc.
c. Check circuit. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) With the switch contacts closed, check for mini-
mum 11 VDC from 2SVM-15 through the wiring and switch back to 2SVM-26.
5. Temporary Solution Tip - In the event of a defective switch that can not be repaired or replaced, and the
switch is forcing the unit into shutdown or low speed, this action may be temporarily overridden by setting
the OVERRIDE REMS1 SHUTDOWN Functional Parameter to YES.
IF A SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED:
1. Check Configurations - Any switch/sensor not present in the unit should not be Configured “ON”. Cor-
rect Configurations.
2. Check REM Connector - Locate and inspect 10 position connector for optional sensors and switches
(see wiring schematic Section 10). Connector must have cap on. Verify no corrosion or moisture inside
connector. If there is a problem with the connector and there are no remote sensors or switches in the
unit, the connector may be removed and each individual wire separated from the others, terminated and
insulated with heat shrink.
62-11637 7–30
00059 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) NOT RECORDING
• ACTIVATION: No data is being recorded by the DataLink data recorder.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Clear Alarm
a. Clear Active Alarm(s).
b. Check for Active Alarm re-occurrence. If Inactive, download all data & retain. If Active, go to next
step.
2. Main Microprocessor Defective
a. Download previous data using a Data Transfer USB memory device, or TRU-Tech. Data retrieval
OK.
b. Replace and setup main microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.5.
NOTE
Specific Configurations may be found on the TransCentral Website (Authorized Carrier Transicold
Dealers only).
00060 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) TIME WRONG

• ACTIVATION: The real time clock in the DataLink data recorder does not contain a valid date.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the DataLink data recorder real time clock is reset, or alarm may
be manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Real Time Clock - Check Real Time Clock in the Unit Data, or using TRU-Tech. Must show cor-
rect date and time. Change as needed. Refer to Section 5.2.3.
2. Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position for 30 seconds and then return it to the START/RUN position.
Verify microprocessor powers up correctly.
b. Check for valid real time clock reading in Unit Data. Alarm is cleared automatically.
c. Real Time Clock can not be changed. Proceed to step 3.
3. Main Microprocessor Defective

a. Download previous data using a Data Transfer USB memory device, or TRU-Tech. Verify data
retrieval OK.
b. Replace and setup main microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.5.
7–31 62-11637
00061 DOOR OPEN (DS1)
• ACTIVATION: DS1 is set to trigger an alarm if the switch is activated (opened or closed, depending on
switch type) for more than five seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: May be configured as alarm only, alarm and force low engine speed, or alarm and shut-
down.
Alarm Only: Auto reset after the switch has deactivated for more than five seconds.
Shutdown: Auto reset after three minutes (minimum off time for door open condition) and the switch has
deactivated for more than five seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
IF A SWITCH IS INSTALLED
1. Determine What DS1 is Activated By - DS1 may be connected to a compartment door or some other
device. Locate the device used as DS1.
2. Check to See if DS1 has Activated - Inspect device used to activate DS1. For example, compartment
door must be closed, and switch must be deactivated.
3. Check Configuration for DS1 - Verify that Configuration is set for the type of switch being used (i.e.
when switch is activated, switch contacts are closed; etc). Configuration must agree with switch type.
4. Check Wiring
a. Visually inspect wiring to DS1 to make sure it is connected.
b. Visually inspect condition of switch. It must not be damaged, wet, corroded, etc.
c. Check circuit. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) With the switch contacts closed, check for mini-
mum 11 VDC from 2SVM-14, through the wiring and switch back to 2SVM-25.
5. Temporary Solution Tip - In the event of a defective switch that can not be repaired or replaced, and the
switch is forcing the unit into a shutdown or low speed, this action may be temporarily overridden by set-
ting the OVERRIDE DOOR SWITCH SHUTDOWN Functional Parameter to YES.
IF A SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED
1. Check Configurations - Any switch/sensor not present in the unit should not be Configured “ON”. Cor-
rect Configurations.
2. Check Connector - Locate and inspect the DS or REM 10 position connector for optional sensors and
switches (see wiring schematic Section 10). Connector must have cap on. No corrosion or moisture
inside connector. If there is a problem with the DS connector and no switch is installed, the connector
may be removed and both wires separated, terminated and insulated with heat shrink. If there is no DS
connector, there is a problem with the REM connector and there are no remote sensors or switches in the
unit, the connector may be removed and each individual wire separated from the others, terminated and
insulated with heat shrink.
62-11637 7–32
00066 CHECK EVAP SENSOR GROUP
• ACTIVATION: The unit has been shut off for at least 48 hours. During wake up, a temperature
comparison of the Evaporator Temperature Sensors (RAT, SAT, DTT) is performed. If the highest and the
lowest temperature readings are more than 3.6°F (2.0°C) apart this alarm will be activated.
The Evaporator Temperature Sensors test for this alarm is only run when main power is off and the unit is
not running. When this alarm is in the inactive alarm list, the MessageCenter will display “Check at Next
Service Interval” instead of “Status OK”
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and Electric Operation: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: The system will continue to monitor the Evaporator Temperature Sensors during
each wake up. If the temperature sensors read within 2.7°F (1.5°C) the alarm will clear. If the alarm
doesn't clear, the alarm will be displayed as a non-shutdown alarm when the unit is powered up to alert
the operator.
1. Check Unit Data, or take a download to determine which sensor is out of range.
2. Check Temperature Sensors - Refer to Section 8.10.7.
00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the SV1 coil circuit. If this alarm is activated while the unit
is operating in heat or defrost, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated while the unit is
operating in cool, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for SV1 to energize (heat, defrost or
pulse) and the SV1 coil circuit is normal, or when the control system calls for SV1 to be de-energized
(cooling) and the circuit is not shorted or Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or
by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Additional Alarms - If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031 FAILED
TO START - AUTO MODE, 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT, 00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT,
05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT, 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT or 00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT)
check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse as required. Clear alarms, restart and check for
repeat alarm(s).
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check resistance of coil. Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
c. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to test actual current draw of the circuit. Refer to
Section 2.11 for specifications. Verify the actual current is within the specifications.
3. Check Power and Wiring

a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at SV1 termi-
nal A and 3MM-1. Minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no
b. Check for ground at SV1 terminal B (including SP-3) to GND RING1. Good ground. If not, check con-
nectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage, moisture or corrosion.
7–33 62-11637
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the SV4 coil circuit. If this alarm is activated while the unit
is operating in heat or defrost, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated while the unit is
operating in cool, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for SV1 to energize (heat, defrost or
pulse) and the SV1 coil circuit is normal, or when the control system calls for SV1 to be de-energized
(cooling) and the circuit is not shorted or Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
TO START - AUTO MODE, 00041 ENGINE STALLED, 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT, 00078
CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT, 05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT, 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT or 00086
CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse as required. Clear alarms,
restart and check for repeat alarm(s).
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. No damage to coil. No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 2.11 for specifications. Verify the actual current is within the specifications.

62-11637 7–34
00081 CHECK FHR CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the fuel heater relay coil circuit. If this alarm occurs while
the fuel heater circuit is operating, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm occurs while the fuel heater
circuit is not operating, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the circuit is normal, or Alarm may be manually reset using the
display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Relay
a. Inspect relay socket and connection pins inside PCM. No damage to relay. No damaged or corroded
connections.
b. Check resistance of coil (terminals 85 & 86). Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
a. Check for power at fuse F10 terminal A inside PCM. Minimum 11 VDC. If not, check PER circuit and
fuse F5. (NOTE: FLS, SATPWR and LB will also be without power.)
b. Check fuses F5 & F10. Verify correct fuse, see Figure 2.7.
c. Check for power at FHR + terminal. Replace PCM.
d. If the ambient temperature is below 77°F (25°C) the fuel heater relay (FHR) will be grounded by the
main microprocessor at 3MM-17. Power up control system in PC Mode. (Refer to Section 5.3.2).
Check ground from 3MM-17 through PCM-17 to the FHR - connection. If ambient is above 77°F
(25°C), place the SROS in the OFF position and check continuity of the wiring from 3MM-17 through
PCM-17 to the FHR - connection. Good ground. If not, check connectors and wiring between termi-
nals. Verify no damage, moisture or corrosion.
e. Check resistance of heater element. Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
00084 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT

This alarm may be activated with earlier software revisions, follow procedure for alarm 05016
CHECK REMOTE AMBER LIGHT.
7–35 62-11637
00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the front unloader (UL1) coil circuit. If this alarm is acti-
vated while the control system is calling for UL1 to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this
alarm occurs at any other time, the circuit is detected open.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT, 00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT, 05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT or 00086
CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms,
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. Verify no damaged or corroded pins.
Section 2.11 for specifications. Verify that the actual current is within specifications.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at UL1 termi-
b. Check for ground at UL1 terminal B (including SP-2) to GND1RING2. Good ground. If not, check con-
62-11637 7–36
00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the front unloader (UL2) coil circuit. If this alarm is acti-
vated while the control system is calling for UL2 to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT, 00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT, 05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT or 00085
CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms,
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. Verify no damaged or corroded
pins.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at UL2 termi-
b. Check for ground at UL2 terminal B (including SP-2) to GND1RING2. Good ground. If not, check con-
7–37 62-11637
00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the AutoFresh Air Exchange relay coil circuit. If this alarm
is activated while the control system is calling for AFAR to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If
this alarm occurs at any other time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Relay
a. Inspect relay socket and connection pins inside PCM. Verify there is no damage to relay, and no
damaged or corroded connections.
b. Check resistance of coil (terminals 1 & 2). Refer to Section 2.11 for specifications.
a. Check for power at fuse F10 terminal A inside PCM. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check
PCM circuit and fuse F5.
b. Check fuses F5 & F10. Verify correct fuse, see Figure 2.7.
c. Check for power at AFAR + terminal. Replace PCM.
d. Set the AutoFresh Air Functional Parameter to OPEN and ensure the set point is above 30°F (-
1.0°C). The AutoFresh air relay coil will be grounded by the main microprocessor at 3MM-13.
Check ground from 3MM-13 through PCM-26 to the AFAR - connection. Reset AutoFresh Air
Functional Parameter and setpoint as required following testing. If ground not good, check con-
nectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
62-11637 7–38
00093 CHECK STARTUP BUZZER
• ACTIVATION: The Buzzer (B) circuit is shorted or open. (The Buzzer output from the microprocessor
[PCM-23 to 3MM15] is negative, so the circuit will not be shorted to ground, but is shorted either within
the Buzzer itself, or to a positive wire.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when Buzzer amp draw is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using
the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Buzzer
a. Inspect Buzzer & wire connections. No damage to buzzer. No damage or corrosion.
b. Check resistance of buzzer. Cannot be opened (infinite ohms) or shorted (zero ohms).
c. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to test actual current draw of the circuit.
Buzzer provides audible signal. View current draw in Component Test Mode screen. Verify the
actual current is within the specifications.
2. Check Buzzer Wiring -
Inspect PCM sub-harness connector pins & terminals. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify
there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
3. Is the component functioning? Are there additional alarms?
a. If the component is functioning, and additional alarms are present (often within 3MM01 - 3MM12 or
3MM13 - 3MM18) check related fuses, wires, and connectors.
b. If the fuses/wires/connectors are OK, it indicates an internal problem with the MM or the PCM.
Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main Microprocessor Module
replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
c. If problem persists reinstall the old MM, and replace the PCM. Refer to Section 8.10.2.
7–39 62-11637
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the SV2 coil circuit. If this alarm is activated while the con-
trol system is calling for SV2 to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at
any other time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when unit calls for cooling and the SV2 coil circuit is normal, or Alarm
may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coil
00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) is not within range of -53 to +158°F (-47° to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm and a value of 122°F (50°C) will be used for any calculations.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor is in range or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
play mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connector. Verify no damage to sensor. Verify no damage, moisture, or corrosion in
connector.
b. Check sensor resistance. (Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2) 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to
Section 8.10.7 for chart of resistances for different sensors.
2. Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor and connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section
10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in con-
nectors.
b. Place the system in PC Mode. Refer to Note 2 in Section 7.2. Disconnect sensor from harness.
Check for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC at harness plug between pins. Voltage should be 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC volts at
harness plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor output and wiring connections to the sen-
sor.
62-11637 7–40
00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT)
• ACTIVATION: Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) is not within range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL: If Alarm 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR is not active: Alarm and switch to sup-
ply air control. If Alarm 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR is active: Alarm and the System will enter
Cargo Protect Mode. Refer to Section 4.11.1.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connectors. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)
Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
b. Place system in PC Mode. Refer to Note 2 in Section 7.2. Disconnect sensor from harness. Check
for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC at harness plug between pins. Voltage should be 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC volts at harness
plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor output and wiring connections to the sensor.
00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) is not within range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL: If Alarm 00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT) is not active, Functional Param-
eter Temperature Control is set for Supply Air and setpoint is in perishable range: Alarm and switch to
return air control. If Alarm 00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT) is active, alarm and system will
enter Cargo Protect Mode. Refer to 4.11.1.
play mounted keys or by turning the unit off and then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance. Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to
Check for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC volts at harness plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor output
and wiring connections to the sensor.
7–41 62-11637
00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT) is not within the range of -40° to
+392°F (-40° to +200°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connector. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or cor-
rosion in connector.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no
physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: The fuel level sensor is configured “YES” and the reading (in Unit Data) is less than 2% for
30 seconds.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when fuel level is sensed above 4% for 30 seconds or, alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Low Fuel Level - Check fuel level in tank. Add fuel as needed.
2. Check Sensor Fuse F8 & Wiring
a. Verify correct fuse, and check fuse holder for damage, see Figure 2.7. Replace fuse as required.
Clear alarms, restart and check for repeat alarm(s).
b. Inspect wiring from at PCM-22, and 2MM-24. Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no
damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
c. Perform sensor check procedure. Refer to Section 8.5.7.
NOTE
If new sensor is not available, the sensor may be configured OFF temporarily. Refer to Section
5.2.3 Configurations.
62-11637 7–42
00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F
(-47 to +70°C.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance. Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table
8–3 for complete table of temperatures and resistance values.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor and connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section
10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in con-
nectors.
00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) is not within the range of -58 to +266°F (-50
to +130°C).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor is in range or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance. Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to
Section 8.10.7 for chart of sensor resistances.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at ENCU. (See wiring schematic Section 10) Verify there is no
physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
and wiring connections to sensor.
7–43 62-11637
00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: If ambient temperature is above 32°F (0°C), and this is the second or third start attempt,
and the engine oil pressure switch is closed (oil pressure good), and engine speed is sensed at less than
1000; OR, if ambient is below 32°F (0°C) and the DC amp draw is more than 2 amps, and this is the sec-
ond or third start attempt, and engine speed is sensed at less than 1000.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only and engine will be considered running.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when engine speed is greater than 1,000 rpm or alarm may be manually
reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarm 00041 ENGINE STALLED - When alarms 00041 and 00130 occur at the same time,
generally, the engine has run out or is running out of fuel. This causes the engine to surge.
a. Check fuel in tank and add fuel as necessary.

b. Check fuel lines between the fuel tank and the fuel pump inlet to ensure air is not being drawn in.
2. Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
a. Check actual engine speed using a hand held tachometer and compare with speed shown in unit
data. Must be ± 20 rpm. Must be a steady reading.
b. Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. Verify there is no physical damage to sensor, and no dam-
age or corrosion in connections.
c. Check power from ENCU. Should read approximately +12 VDC from terminal ENCU-43 to ENSSN-3.
d. Check ground to ENCU. Check wiring from terminal ENCU-20 to ENSSN-1.
e. Check signal to ENCU. Check wiring from terminal ENCU-2 to ENSSN-2.
3. Check Circuits with Test Sensor - Substitute known good sensor and check unit data reading (Refer to
Section 3.14). Must be within ± 50 rpm of reading on tachometer.
62-11637 7–44
00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F
(-47 to +70°C)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only and superheat for EVXV will be calculated using SAT or DTT if alarm 00123
CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR is active.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when EVOT is in range or, alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connector. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or corro-
sion in connector.
b. Check EVOT resistance. Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2. Should be 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See
Table 8–3 for complete table of temperatures and resistance values.

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor and connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)
Check for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC volts at harness plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor output and
wiring connections to sensor.
b. Check coil airflow (with unit running). Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots.
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Verify good air flow and make sure return air not restricted. Air
chute should be in good condition.
7–45 62-11637
00132 CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR
NOTE
The APX Control System uses one Defrost Termination Sensor (DTT) and that sensor will activate
this “CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR” alarm.
• ACTIVATION: Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT) is not within the range of -58 to +266°F (-50
to +130°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: When this alarm is active, the system will use only the SAT for defrost initiation. If both
this alarm and the 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR are active the system will use the RAT for defrost
initiation. In either case, defrost will be allowed when the sensor is below 45°F (7.2°C). When this alarm is
active defrost will terminate when the SAT reaches 55°F (12.8°C). If both this alarm and 00123 CHECK
SUPPLY AIR SENSOR are both active, defrost will terminate after ten minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance. (Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2) 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Sec-
tion 8.10.7 for complete table of temperatures and resistance values.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor at connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)
Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connec-
tors.
62-11637 7–46
00133 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1
00134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2
• ACTIVATION: Remote Temperature Sensor (REMSN1 or REMSN2) is not within the range of -53 to
+158°F (-47 to +70°C.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
IF A SENSOR IS INSTALLED
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance Refer to Note 3 in Section 7.2. Should be 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C).
Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of resistances for different sensors.

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor, REM connector and 2CCB. (See wiring schematic
Section 10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corro-
sion in connectors.
IF A SENSOR IS NOT INSTALLED
1. Check Configurations - Any switch/sensor that is not present in the unit should not be Configured “ON”.
Correct Configurations.
2. Check REM Connector - Locate and inspect 10 position connector for optional sensors and switches.
(see wiring schematic Section 10). Connector must have cap on, no corrosion or moisture inside con-
nector. If there is a problem with the connector and there are no remote sensors or switches in the unit,
the connector may be removed and each individual wire separated from the others, terminated and insu-
lated with heat shrink.
7–47 62-11637
P00141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER
• ACTIVATION: Pretrip cycle was stopped by user before the Pretrip cycle ended automatically.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for any Pretrip Alarms - Check the alarm list for any Active Pretrip alarms. Alarm conditions
must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
2. Rerun Pretrip Check

a. Clear Active Alarm List, then run Pretrip & check for any new alarms.
b. Allow to terminate automatically. Pretrip cycle operates normally.
P00143 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: The circuit current draw is outside the normal range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail in Test #2 and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or Alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. Verify no damaged or corroded
pins.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at CLH ter-
minal A and 3MM-11. Minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify
no damage, moisture or corrosion.
b. Check for ground at CLH terminal B (including SP-3) to GND 1RING1. Good ground. If not, check
connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage, moisture or corrosion.
62-11637 7–48
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail in test 2 and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check UL1 Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition
P00148 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check SV1 Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check SV4 Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition
P00151 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
play mounted keys or by turning the unit off then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Glow Plug Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIR-
CUIT. Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
7–49 62-11637
P00152 CHECK Fuel/speed actuator CIRCUIT
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check ENCU Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT.
P00153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to
+70°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR
(RAT). Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
P00154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to
+70°C).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. Alarm
P00155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) is not within the range of -58 to +266°F (-50
to +130°C).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR.
62-11637 7–50
P00157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT
• ACTIVATION: With all circuits off, current flow of more than +1.5 to -2.0 amps is detected in the 12 VDC
electrical circuits. If this alarm occurs, Pretrip Test #2 will be skipped and Pretrip Test #3 will start. Refer to
Section 3.6 for Pretrip information.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check DC Current Draw and Sensor
a. Observe current draw reading in unit data. Reading must be between +1.5 to -2.0 Amps.
b. Check power between 2MM-29 and 2MM-23 and between PCM-31 and PCM-30 5 VDC. If not,
c. Check for continuity from 2MM-12 to PCM-29. If good continuity not present, check connectors
2. Check Individual Circuits - Isolate individual circuits and test amp draw. Must be in range. (Refer to
Section 2.11 for correct electrical values.)
3. Check for Parasitic Loads - Check for electrical loads that are drawing current with all circuits OFF.
Check for non-factory installed devices such as lift gates, inside lights, satellite systems, etc. These
devices must be wired so as to not draw current during Pretrip testing.
P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to
+70°C).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR.
P00160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT) is not within the range of -40 to +392°F
(-40 to +200°C.)
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SEN-
SOR. Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
7–51 62-11637
P00161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST) is not within the range of -40 to +392°F
(-40 to +200°C.)
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR.
P00162 CHECK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: The (AFAR) circuit current draw is outside the normal range.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Relay Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT. Alarm

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check UL2 Operation - Refer to procedure for 00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be
corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
62-11637 7–52
P00165 CANNOT PUMP DOWN
• ACTIVATION: With SV1, SV2, & SV4 in the closed position, the compressor is not able to pull the low
side of the refrigerant system down to 10 PSIG (0.68 bar).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will abort and “PRETRIP FAILED IN TEST 12, 13 or 14” will be displayed in
MessageCenter.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Compressor Drive Coupling - Verify that compressor coupling is intact and the compressor
2. Check System Pressure - Check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with those
shown in unit data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
3. Manually Check Refrigeration System - Perform a low side pump down, refer to Section 8.7.2. Suction
pressure must drop to at least 0 psig. If this check does not pass, continue to Check Compressor Pump
Down.
4. Manually Test Refrigeration System - See Refrigeration Troubleshooting, Section 9.3.3, for “System
Will Not Pump Down”. Must pass all tests.
P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM

• ACTIVATION:
• In Test #7: With the CAN calling for low speed, engine speed is NOT between: 1200 and 1500 rpm.
• In Test #9: 15 seconds after the High Speed Pretrip Test #8, engine speed has NOT dropped back to
the low speed range (within 15 seconds) as shown above.
NOTE
Test will be skipped if engine speed sensor alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR is active.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Low Speed Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM. Alarm
7–53 62-11637
P00175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• ACTIVATION: In Test #8 with the CAN calling for high speed, engine speed is NOT between 1650 and
1950 rpm.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check High Speed Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM.
P00177 CHECK EXV (EVXV) SUPERHEAT

• ACTIVATION: With the unit running in Test #11, after the control system closes the EVXV to 0%, evapora-
tor pressure fails to drop by 20 psig (1.36 bar) or fails to go below 0 psig / bar OR the EVXV appears not
to be opening to the full capacity position.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Refrigerant Level - Refer to Section 8.7.2.
charge & suction pressures with those shown on the microprocessor display. Suction and Evaporator
Outlet pressures must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar.) Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
3. Check EVXV
a. Visually inspect EVXV for damage. Check to see if coil is seated on valve properly.
b. Inspect EVXV coil and wire connections. Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no
damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
c. Check EVXV operation. See Section 8.9.9.
d. Check basic refrigeration system. Pressures normal. Compressor operation normal.
e. Check the EVXV electrical system for good continuity in all circuits from microprocessor to EVXV.
f. Inspect component and wire connections. No physical damage to harness.
g. Inspect harness connector pins. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no damage,
moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
4. Check EVOT - Check the sensor. Refer to procedure for alarm 00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR.
62-11637 7–54
P00178 CHECK UL1
• ACTIVATION: The pressure differential between suction and discharge pressures did not change as
expected when the Front Unloader (UL1) was de-energized / loaded (discharge pressure should rise and
suction pressure should drop) or when it was energized / unloaded (discharge pressure should drop and
suction pressure should rise.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Wiring to CDP & CSP
a. Verify that correct wires are connected to each transducer. Plugs to transducers are the same. The
correct wire plug must be connected to the proper transducer. The CDP connector is identified with a
red tape band while the CSP connector is identified with a blue band.
b. Verify that correct transducer is being used in each position. Mechanical connections to transducers
are the same. The discharge transducer should have a red marking dot on it. The suction transducer
should have a blue marking dot on it.
2. Check for Alarms - Check for alarm 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT or P00144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT.
Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
3. Check System Pressures
a. Install manifold gauge set to check and compare actual compressor discharge & suction pressures
with those shown in Unit Data. Suction and Evaporator Outlet pressures must be above 3 psig (0.2
bar). Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
b. Check transducer operation. Refer to Section 8.9.12.
4. Check Front Unloader (UL1) Operation - Refer to Section 8.8.5.5, Unloader must load and unload
properly.
7–55 62-11637
P00180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE
• ACTIVATION: With the unit running in Pretrip Test #10, after the microprocessor attempts to close CSMV,
the suction pressure fails to drop to the proper range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST 10”.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
are the same. The Discharge Transducer should have a red marking dot on it. The Suction Trans-
ducer should have a blue marking dot on it.
2. Check Compressor Operation - Check compressor operation. If compressor does not pass all tests,
repair or replace compressor. Refer to Section 8.8.1.
3. Check Suction Modulating Valve
a. Visually inspect CSMV. No damage to valve.
b. Inspect CSMV coil and wire connections. Refer to Section 8.9.8. Verify there is no damage to coil,
and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
c. Check CSMV operation. Refer to Section 8.9.8. Must perform correctly.
d. Check wires from CSMV to microprocessor. Verify there is no visual damage to wires. Continuity
test verifies that each wire is good.
62-11637 7–56
P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE
• ACTIVATION: Suction pressure did not rise within range & discharge pressure did not drop within range
when SV4 was energized (opened).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarms - Check for alarm 00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT or P00150 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT.
Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue
2. Check System Pressures - Check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with those
3. Repair SV4 - Refer to SV4 Checkout Procedure in Section 8.9.6.
P00182 CHECK SV1 VALVE

• ACTIVATION: Discharge pressure did not decrease when SV1 was de-energized (opened) as expected
in Heat Pretrip, or discharge pressure did not increase as expected when SV1 was energized (closed) in
Cool Pretrip.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarms - Check for 00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT or P00148 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT. Alarm
conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
2. Check System Pressures - Check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with those
3. Check SV1 - Refer to SV1 Checkout Procedure in Section 8.9.5.
P00186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP

• ACTIVATION: Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-
47 to +70°C.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Sensor - Refer to procedure for alarm 00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR.
7–57 62-11637
P00191 CHECK UL2
• ACTIVATION: The pressure differential between suction and discharge did not change as expected when
the Rear Unloader (UL2) was de-energized / loaded (discharge pressure should rise and suction pres-
sure should drop) or when it was energized / unloaded (discharge pressure should drop and suction pres-
sure should rise.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
2. Check Alarms - Check for 00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT or P00164 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT (Check
UL2). Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue
suction pressures with those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
4. Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Operation - Check operation of Rear Unloader (UL2) See Section 8.8.5.5.
Unloader must load and unload properly.

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check SV2 Speed Operation - Refer to procedure for alarm 00097 CHECK SV2 CIRCUIT. Alarm con-
dition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
62-11637 7–58
P00194 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: This alarm is generated during Test #4 in Cool Pretrip, suction pressure is higher than nor-
mal.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
2. Check Alarms - Check for P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the
alarm cleared to continue.
a. Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with
those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
b. Check transducer operation Refer to Section 8.9.12.
4. Check Low Side Operating Conditions - Refer to procedure for alarm 00027 HIGH SUCTION PRES-
SURE. Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
7–59 62-11637
P00196 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: This alarm is generated during Test #4 in Cool Pretrip. Discharge pressure is higher than
normal. (“Normal” discharge pressure for systems operating in Cool Mode can be estimated by taking the
temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (Ambient Air Temperature AAT) and adding 30°F (16.6°
C) to it, then looking at a pressure temperature chart-see Table 8–3 for the corresponding pressure.)
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
b. Verify that correct transducer is installed in each position. Mechanical connections are the same. The
CDT should have a red dot on it while the CST has a blue dot.
suction pressures with those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
3. Check High Side Operating Conditions - Refer to procedure for alarm 00013 HIGH DISCHARGE
PRESSURE. Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
P00197 CHECK CLUTCH

• ACTIVATION: Return Air Temperature - Supply Air Temperature is outside the normal range.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Clutch - Check fan clutch. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing,
cracking, or slipping. Refer to Section 8.6. Replace if required.
62-11637 7–60
P00198 LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: In Pretrip heat, the compressor discharge pressure did not rise to normal. (“Normal” dis-
charge pressure for systems operating in Pretrip heat can be estimated by adding 80 psig (5.5 bars) toe
the saturation temperature of the air entering the condenser (ATS reading).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will abort and “PRETRIP FAILED IN TEST 4” will be displayed in MessageCen-
ter.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
b. Verify that correct transducer is installed in each position. Mechanical connections are the same. The
CDT should have a red dot on it while the CST has a blue dot.
2. Check for Alarms
a. Check for 00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR or P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR.
Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
b. Check Ambient Sensor reading. Must be within ±10°F (±5.5°C) of actual temperature.
a. Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with
those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
b. Check transducer operation. Refer to Section 8.9.12.
5. Check SV1 - Refer to SV1 Checkout Procedure in Section 8.9.5.
6. Check Compressor
a. Check the operation of the high side of the compressor by covering the condenser inlet air. Discharge
pressure must rise a minimum of 50 to 100 psig (3.4 to 6.9 bars).
b. Remove compressor heads & inspect condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves
and gaskets. Must be in good condition. Refer to Section 8.8.
7–61 62-11637
P00200 CHECK UL1 CYLINDERS
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected inside the front cylinder head of the compressor with a cylin-
der suction valve, cylinder discharge valve, head gasket or valve plate gasket.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
comparison.
3. Check Compressor Front Head Cylinder Valves & Gaskets - Remove compressor front head &
inspect condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves & gaskets. Must be in good condi-
tion. Refer to Section 8.8.
P00201 CHECK UL2 CYLINDERS

• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected inside the rear cylinder head of the compressor with a cylin-
der suction valve, cylinder discharge valve, head gasket or valve plate gasket.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
comparison.
2. Check Compressor Rear Head Cylinder Valves & Gaskets - Remove compressor front head & inspect
condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves & gaskets. Must be in good condition.
62-11637 7–62
P00202 HIGH SIDE LEAK
• ACTIVATION: Refrigerant pressure is leaking past one of the components in the high pressure side of the
refrigeration system into the low pressure side.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
comparison.
2. Check Compressor
period of time.
bar).
P00203 CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE

• ACTIVATION: Refrigerant is leaking backwards through the Discharge Check Valve.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Pump Down Low Side - Perform pump down and check valve for leakage. Refer to Section 8.9.10.
2. Disassemble and Check Condition - Refer to Section 8.9.10.
7–63 62-11637
P00204 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: Suction Pressure is less than -10inHg (-0.34 bar) for more than 30 continuous seconds, or
less than -16inHg (-0.54 bar) for more than 5 seconds at any time during Pretrip.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will abort and “PRETRIP FAILED IN TEST X” will be displayed in MessageCen-
ter indicating in which test the suction pressure was too low.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Fan Belts - Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, no cracking, no
slipping. Refer to Section 8.6. Replace if required.
comparison.
3. Manually Defrost Unit - Defrost unit and terminate automatically. Typical defrost cycle time is 5-20 min-
utes. Suction pressure should rise gradually during cycle.
a. Inspect coil Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged. Coil must be clean.
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Good air flow. Return air not restricted. Air chute in good condition.
d. Check fan clutch. Must be fully engaged.
e. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to
Section 8.6. Replace if required.
6. Check Expansion Valve (EVXV)
a. Visually inspect valve. Check that coil is seated properly.

b. Check valve. Refer to Section 8.9.9.
7. Check CSMV - Check compressor suction modulation valve. Refer to Section 8.9.8.
62-11637 7–64
P00205 CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR
NOTE
The APX Control System uses one Defrost Termination Sensor (DTT) and that sensor will trigger this
“CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR” alarm.
• ACTIVATION: Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor is not within the maximum range of -53°F to
+158°F (-47°C to +70°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm and defrost cycle will terminate.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 (DTT)
a. Inspect Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 & connector, no damage to sensor, no damage or
corrosion in connector 1MP plug is connected tightly to microprocessor. No wires are pushed back
through plug.
b. Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 resistance. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to
2. Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 Wiring - Inspect harness & control box connector
pins & terminals (See wiring schematic Section 10.) No physical damage to harness. No damaged or cor-
roded pins.
00223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE

• ACTIVATION: The Engine Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Unit Maintenance Records - Schedule unit into service facility for maintenance. Must be done
soon!
2. Perform Maintenance - Perform appropriate engine & unit maintenance. Follow instructions on proper
maintenance form.
3. Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Meter

a. Check that the Engine Maintenance Hour Meter interval is set for your requirements. Reset config-
ured Interval if required.
b. Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Meter for the next service interval. Hour Meter reset is a Func-
tional Parameter. Follow maintenance interval recommendations in Section 8.2.
7–65 62-11637
00225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE
• ACTIVATION: The General Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
soon!
maintenance form.
3. Reset General Maintenance Hour Meter

a. Check that the General Maintenance Hour Meter interval is set for your requirements. Reset con-
figured Interval if required.
b. Reset General Maintenance Hour Meter for the next service interval. Hour Meter reset is a Func-
tional Parameter. Follow maintenance interval recommendations.
00226 SERVICE SOON-PM #1 DUE

• ACTIVATION: The Maintenance Hour Meter #1 time has expired.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
soon!
maintenance form.
3. Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1

a. Check that the Maintenance Hour Meter #1 interval is set for your requirements. Reset configured
Interval if required.
b. Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1 for the next service interval. Hour Meter reset is a Functional
Parameter. Follow maintenance interval recommendations in Section 8.2.
62-11637 7–66
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
soon!
maintenance form.


CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
soon!
maintenance form.

7–67 62-11637
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
soon!
maintenance form.


CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
soon!
maintenance form.

62-11637 7–68
00232 SETPOINT ERROR
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the setpoint that is stored in the main microprocessor memory.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when a valid setpoint is entered, or alarm may be manually reset by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Setpoint
a. Check setpoint setting. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30° and +32°C)
b. Enter new setpoint.
a. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. Disconnect positive battery cable, remove
the F7 fuse or unplug 1MM connector, wait 20 seconds and reinstall. Then place the START/RUN-
OFF back in the START/RUN position. The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest setpoint
appears in the display.
b. Valid setpoint can not be entered and alarm 00232 remains active. Download data and replace the
main microprocessor module (MM). Refer to Section 5.5.
00233 MODEL # ERROR

• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the Model Number that is stored in the main microprocessor memory.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset only when a valid Model number is entered.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Model Number
a. Check Model Number in microprocessor.
b. Enter correct Model Number. Check Model Number on Nameplate. Select the correct model num-
ber in the “MODEL NUMBER” Configuration. If correct model number is not found, install (or have
Carrier Transicold dealer install) latest software revision.
F7 fuse or unplug 1MM connector, wait 20 seconds and reinstall. Then place the START/RUN-
b. Check for valid Model number in Unit Data. Valid number is present. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid model number can not be entered and alarm remains active. Download data and replace the
7–69 62-11637
00237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in one or more of the Functional Parameters that are stored in the main
microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Functional Parameter(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when valid Functional Parameters are entered, or alarm may be manu-
ally reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Functional Parameters - Check Functional Parameters. All must be set for selectable values.
2. Check Software Version - Check microprocessor Software version. Upgrade to the latest version of
software. Newer versions may contain functional parameters that were not present in older versions of
microprocessor software. Refer to Section 5.3.4.
b. Check for valid Functional Parameters in Functional Parameters List. Valid number is set for all
parameters. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid Functional Parameter(s) can not be entered and alarm remains active. Download data and
replace the main microprocessor module (MM). Refer to Section 5.5.
62-11637 7–70
00238 CONFIGURATIONS ERROR
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the Configuration settings stored in the main microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Configuration(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when valid Configuration(s) are entered, or alarm may be manually
reset by turning the unit off, then back on again
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Configurations - Check Configurations. All must be set for selectable values.
2. Check Software Version - Check microprocessor software version. Upgrade to the latest version of soft-
ware. If changes were made using a newer version of TRU-Tech, that version may contain Configura-
tions that were not present in older versions of control system software.
3. Reconfigure Microprocessor - Send settings to microprocessor. Using the latest version of TRU-Tech
or a Data Transfer USB Memory Device, write the desired Configuration file to the device, then load the
file into the microprocessor. Allow the microprocessor to reboot itself.
b. Check for valid Configuration settings in Configuration List. Values are set correctly for all parame-
ters. Alarm is cleared.
c. Disconnect positive battery cable from the battery, wait 30 seconds, then reconnect and place the
START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN. The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest
setpoint appears in the display.
d. Check for valid Configuration settings in Configuration List. Values are set correctly for all parame-
ters. Alarm is cleared.
e. Valid Configurations can not be entered and alarm remains active. Download data and replace the
7–71 62-11637
00245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in sending and saving new settings in the main microprocessor memory.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Microprocessor Software Revision - Check microprocessor software. Unit should have the soft-
ware upgraded to the latest version, provided for Carrier Transicold dealers on the TransCentral site.
b. Check Active Alarm List. Alarm is cleared - microprocessor is OK.
c. If this alarm remains active, unit will operate, but changes to the settings will not be retained in the
microprocessor memory. Download data and replace the main microprocessor module (MM).
00246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE

• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the ability to write information to be stored in the main microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Microprocessor
a. Check setpoint. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30 and +32°C).
b. Enter new setpoint. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30 and +32°C).
b. If this alarm remains active, download data and replace the main microprocessor module (MM).
62-11637 7–72
00248 CONFIG MODE / HP2 ERROR
• ACTIVATION: EEPROM Configuration is out of range.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset only when valid info is entered.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Microprocessor
a. Check setpoint setting. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30 and +32°C).
b. Check Functional Parameters. All settings must be valid.
2. Check Software Revision

a. Check microprocessor software revision. Upgrade to the latest revision of software. The latest revi-
sion may contain Configurations that were not present in older revisions.
b. Check Functional Parameters. All settings must be valid. Send desired settings to microprocessor
using the latest version of TRU-Tech or a USB data transfer device. (Do NOT use the display
mounted keys.)
c. Check Configurations. All settings must be valid. Send desired settings to microprocessor using
the latest version of TRU-Tech or a USB data transfer device. (Do NOT use the display mounted
keys.)
7–73 62-11637
00255 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR
• ACTIVATION: If alarm 21100 “NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY” is not active and main micropro-
cessor input and/or output board configuration is incorrect.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when board communications are valid, or alarm reset or Alarm may be
manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Software Revision - Check microprocessor software. Unit should have the software upgraded to
the latest version, provided for Carrier Transicold dealers on the TransCentral site.
02000 UPDATE SOFTWARE

• ACTIVATION: The software version in one or more of the modules is not compatible with the remainder of
the control system.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when all module software versions are compatible. Or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Reload Software - Unit should have the software upgraded to the latest version, provided for Carrier
Transicold dealers on the TransCentral site.
62-11637 7–74
02003 DISPLAY MODULE ERROR
• ACTIVATION: The APX Control system has detected 50 or more On/Off transitions of the SROS within a
4 minute period.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and Alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: The system can be temporarily reset by enabling Emergency Bypass Mode. The
system will be permanently reset after replacing the Display Module.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Enable Emergency Bypass Mode - This is a temporary solution that will only allow the system to func-
tion for 24 hours.
a. In the event of an alarm caused by a failure of the display module, the unit will go into shutdown. In
order to temporarily bypass this shutdown state, Emergency Bypass Mode can be activated, refer to
Section 3.21.
b. Once Emergency Bypass Mode has been activated, the unit will operate normally for 24 hours, a
countdown timer will be shown on the display. This 24 hour window of operation will keep the load
safe, and provide enough time to contact the nearest Carrier Transicold Service Center for repair of
the unit.
2. Remove and replace the Display Module, refer to Section 8.10.4
03001 ENGINE LOAD CALIBRATION

• ACTIVATION: Activate alarm if:
Condition 1 = At engine start if engine throttle sensor (Rack Position Sensor) value is less than 90%.
Condition 2 = After start if the sensor value does not drop below 90% within 5 seconds.
Condition 3 = At engine shutoff if the sensor value does not drop below 10% within 5 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. Control system will modulate CSMV as required.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Power And Wiring
a. Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. No physical damage to sensor. No damaged or corro-
sion in connections.
b. If required, power sensor by placing the unit in PC Mode, check for power. Voltage reading
between connector position 1 (positive) and position 2 (negative) should be 5 volts DC. Check
connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
c. Check for continuity from connector terminal 3 to ENCU-7. If good continuity is not present, check
connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
2. Perform Engine Load Calibration - Perform Engine Load Calibration as referenced in Section 8.5.13.
3. Replace Rack Position Sensor (RPS) - Replace sensor with known good component. Calibrate sensor
and ENCU. Refer to Section 8.5.13.
7–75 62-11637
04004 NO SETPOINT CHANGE
• ACTIVATION: Operator failed to press '=' key after entering a setpoint change
• RESET CONDITION: Setpoint change entered correctly.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Notes Section) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Enter setpoint change, and then press the “=” key. Refer to Section 3.7
05006 POWER ENABLE RELAY FUSE ALARM

• ACTIVATION: Fuses F8 - F13 must be in a failed state in order to trigger the Power Enable Relay (PER)
Fuse Alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Replace fuse or fix fuse issue.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Fuse F5
a. Visually check fuse. Verify correct fuse, and check fuse holder for damage, see Figure 2.7.
Replace fuse as required. Clear alarms, restart and check for repeat alarm(s).
b. Check voltage. Check voltage through the fuse, if fuse is blown, replace it.
c. Check wiring. Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corro-
sion in connectors.
2. Check Fuses F8 - F13

a. Visually check fuses. Verify correct fuse, and check fuse holder for damage, see Figure 2.7.
c. Check wiring. Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corro-
sion in connectors.
62-11637 7–76
05007 BAD F3 FUSE
• ACTIVATION: Stepper Board Fuse Alarm; Feedback from Stepper Board indicates fuse is missing or
blown. Signal must be present for at least 3 seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Fuse F3
c. Check wiring from PCM34 - SP-6 - ENCU - 2SVM22. Verify there is no physical damage to har-
ness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
05008 BAD F10 FUSE

• ACTIVATION: Output Board Fuse Alarm; Feedback from Output Board indicates fuse is missing or blown.
Signal must be present for at least 3 seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Fuse F10

c. Check wiring from PCM8 - 3MM34 - PCM9 - 3MM23. Verify there is no physical damage to har-
2. Check FP, FS, ENCU

a. Visually verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in
connectors.
b. Check for high amp draw. Refer to Section 2.11 for correct electrical values. Use ammeter.
7–77 62-11637
05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE
When operation of the engine is required the main microprocessor will provide a signal from terminal
3MM-9. This signal has been referred to as the “run relay”, based on pre-APX Control Systems that
had an actual relay in place. Whenever the term “run relay” is used in APX Control System discus-
sion, it is referring to the engine run output from 3MM-9 to the ENCU at terminal ENCU-44.
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the ENCU-44 terminal circuit. If this alarm is activated while
the circuit is energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any other time, the circuit
is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Wiring
a. Inspect main microprocessor 3MM & ENCU connectors. Verify there is no damage to module, and
no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize the circuit. Must have minimum 11
VDC at 3MM-9. If no voltage at 3MM-9, download data and replace main microprocessor. Refer to
Section 5.5.
c. With circuit still in Component Test Mode check voltage at ENCU-44. Must have minimum 11 VDC at
ENCU-44. If no voltage at ENCU- 44, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage,
d. Place the SROS in the OFF position and check continuity of the wiring from ENCU-19 to the
“ENCUGND” connector extending from the battery negative cable connection. Check connectors
2. Check ENCU - Replace ENCU with a known good component. Calibrate sensor and ENCU. Refer to Sec-
tion 8.5.13
62-11637 7–78
05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the clutch coil (CLH) circuit. If this alarm is activated while
the control system is calling for CLH to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm occurs at
any other time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for CLH to energize and the coil circuit is
normal, or when the control system calls for CLH to be de-energized and the circuit is not shorted or
Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Fuses
Check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms, restart and check
for repeat alarms.
2. Check Coil
Section 2.11 for specifications. View current draw in Unit Data. Verify the actual current is within the
specifications.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at CLH ter-
minal A and 3MM-11. Minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify
no damage, moisture or corrosion.
b. Check for ground at CLH terminal B (including SP-3) to GND RING1. Good ground. If not, check con-
7–79 62-11637
05014 CHECK STARTER SOLENOID CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the starter solenoid coil (SS) circuit. If this alarm is acti-
vated while the control system is calling for SS to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for SS to energize and the coil circuit is
normal, or when the control system calls for SS to be de-energized and the circuit is not shorted or Alarm
may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Starter Solenoid Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector terminal. Verify there is no damage to coil. Special connector at starter is
tight and locked. Harness connector is not damaged or corroded.
b. Check resistance of coil. Verify coil not open or shorted.

a. Place Start/Run - Off switch in the OFF position and then back into the Start/Run position. Follow-
ing buzzer, check for power at SS terminal and 3MM-12. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not,
b. Check starter. Refer to engine workshop manual.
05016 CHECK REMOTE AMBER LIGHT

• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the alarm (amber) light circuit (LB). If this alarm is acti-
vated while the circuit is energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any other
time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Light Bar Wiring - Inspect light bar & connector. No damage to light bar. No damage, moisture,
or corrosion in connector. Place the SROS in the OFF position and check: Fuses F5 & F11 in the PCM.
Continuity of the wiring from PCM-7 to LB-B. Continuity of the wiring from LB-G -including SP-2 to
ground. Continuity of the wiring from LB-H to 3MM-7. Verify correct fuse, see Figure 2.7. Check connec-
tors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
2. Check Light Bar - Check operation of 2-Light Bar. Refer to Section 8.10.6 for information on testing the
light bar.
62-11637 7–80
05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the engine preheat enable circuit (EPHT). If this alarm is
activated when the circuit is energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any
other time, the circuit is detected open.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check EPHT Wiring - Inspect 3MM and PCM connectors. Verify there is no damage to modules, and no
damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
2. Check Engine Preheat Enable Circuit

a. Using Component Test Mode, refer to Section 5.2.4, energize engine preheat circuit. Verify the cir-
cuit is energized and amp draw is displayed.
NOTICE
DO NOT leave the air intake circuit energized for the full 5 minutes if full amperage is shown,
as the intake air heater element life will be greatly shortened.
b. Check for power at 3MM-14. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, download data and replace main
microprocessor. For replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
c. Check for power at PCM-27. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check wiring and connectors
between 3MM-14 and PCM-27. Good continuity, no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
d. Replace PCM. Refer to Section 8.10.2.
3. Is the component functioning? Are there additional alarms?

a. If the component is functioning, and additional alarms are present (often within 3MM-01 - 3MM-12
or 3MM-13 - 3MM-18) check related fuses, wires, and connectors.
b. If the fuses/wires/connectors are OK, it indicates an internal problem with the MM or the PCM.
Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main Microprocessor Module
replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
c. If problem persists reinstall the old MM, and replace the PCM. Refer to Section 8.10.2.
7–81 62-11637
05018 CHECK POWER ENABLE CONTROL
• ACTIVATION: The Power Enable Control Circuit Feedback is sensed out of range.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check PER Relay on the Power Control Module - Refer to Figure 2.7
a. Check resistance of PER coil Refer to Section 2.11.
b. Check wiring No damage, moisture, or corrosion.
07008 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT2)

• ACTIVATION: Return Air Temperature Sensor 2 (RAT2) is not within range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL: If RAT2 is selected as control sensor, switch to RAT sensor.
1. Check Sensor

62-11637 7–82
07009 RETURN AIR SENSORS RAT & RAT2 OUT OF RANGE
• ACTIVATION: RAT2 is installed and configured. RAT and RAT2 show different air temperature readings of
greater than 3.6°F (2° C) for 10 consecutive minutes, or 25 out of 30 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: If RAT or RAT2 is selected as control sensor, switch to SAT sensor.
1. Check RAT & RAT2 Sensors

a. Inspect sensors & connectors. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or

7–83 62-11637
20100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY
NOTE
This alarm will be available in the inactive alarm list and download only. It is an indication that an
intermittent failure is occurring, causing a break in the circuit sufficient to activate the alarm.
• ACTIVATION: If alarm 21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO is not active and main
microprocessor cannot communicate with the display module over the CAN bus.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only, unit will continue to run. Module may display “LOSS OF COMMUNICA-
TIONS”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, or alarm may be manually reset by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check CAN bus
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM, 1SVM, DM and ENCU. Verify no damage or corrosion in
connections.
b. Check display LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS message is displayed.
c. Check for CAN circuit continuity:
CAN Hi; Check entire circuit, 1MM-2 to DM-2. If circuit is open, check individual paths as follows:
1MM-2 through SP-1 to 1SVM-5 & ENCU-23 and 1SVM-2 & DM-2
CAN Lo; Check entire circuit, 1MM-4 to DM-6. If circuit is open, check individual paths as fol-
lows:1MM-4 through SP-4, to 1SVM-7 & ENCU-24, and 1SVM-4 & DM-6
d. Check for good continuity. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage,
62-11637 7–84
20101 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO REMOTE DISPLAY
• ACTIVATION: Alarm 21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO is not active, the number
of remote panels installed is configured as 1, and no sync responses have been received from the
Remote Panel Module for 10 seconds.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when communication is restored, or alarm may be manually reset by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Does the Remote Panel Work? - If panel is working, this may be an intermittent alarm caused by a bad
connection. Check connection from Comm Module to Remote Panel. Verify no damage or corrosion in
connections.
2. Check for other CAN bus alarms - This alarm may accompany other alarms, complete troubleshooting
steps for alarms found. If repairs have been made and the other alarms have cleared, further trouble-
shooting may not be required.
3. Check for Power into Remote Panel - Check for battery power at pins C & D. Verify power.
4. Check CAN Circuit to Remote Panel - At the Remote Panel connector, check resistance between pin A
& pin B. Verify 120 ohms.
5. Replace Remote Panel with a Known Good Panel

a. If problem re-occurs replace the Comm Module.
b. If problem goes away replace the Remote Panel.
7–85 62-11637
21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO
NOTE
This alarm will be available in the inactive alarm list and download only. It is an indication that an
intermittent problem has occurred and a careful diagnosis is required.
• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate with any modules over the CAN bus.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm. Display module may display “LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, or alarm reset or Alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check CAN Bus
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM, 1SVM, DM and ENCU. Verify no damage or corrosion
in connections.
b. Check for CAN continuity:
CAN Hi; 1MM-2 through SP-1 to 1SVM-5 & ENCU-23 and 1SVM-2 & DM-2.
CAN Lo; 1MM-4 through SP-4, to 1SVM-7 & ENCU-24, and 1SVM-4 & DM-6.
Check for good continuity. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage,
2. Check for other CAN Bus Alarms - This alarm may accompany by other alarms, complete troubleshoot-
ing steps for alarms found. If repairs have been made and the other alarms have cleared, further trouble-
shooting may not be required. If this alarm reoccurs, check CAN bus as described in the proceeding step.
3. Perform and Analyze a Data Download
22100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO INPBD1

• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate internally.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown all modules except the display and alarm. (The alarm will only display if the dis-
play module is communicating.) Main microprocessor status LED will illuminate steady green (not pulsing).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when internal communication is restored, alarm reset, or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Replace Main Microprocessor - Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main
Microprocessor Module replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
62-11637 7–86
22101 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE LOW INP1
NOTE
This alarm is an indication that there is a short in the transducer or DC current transformer wiring and
the voltage supply in the main microprocessor is overloaded.
• ACTIVATION: Voltage from main microprocessor to the components is less than 4.5 VDC
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when voltage is correct, alarm reset or alarm may be manually reset by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
evaporator outlet & suction pressures with those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction
on comparison.
2. Check Wiring - If a transducer reading is not within a reasonable range of gauge reading, check wires to
sensors for short.
For CSP, check wiring from 2MM-20, 2MM-30 and 2MM-9.
For EVOP, check wiring from 2MM-25, SP-20 and 2MM-17.
For CDP, check wiring from 2MM-21, SP-20 and 2MM-10. For ECOP, check wiring from 2MM-28, SP-
20 and 2MM-14.
3. Check CT Wiring - Check wires to sensor for short. Check wiring from 2MM-29, 2MM-12 and 2MM-23 to
PCM.
4. Replace Main Microprocessor - Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main
7–87 62-11637
22102 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE HIGH INP1
NOTE
This alarm is an indication that there is a short in the DC current transformer wiring from another
(nominal 12 VDC) circuit into the transducer or CT sensor circuit.
• ACTIVATION: Voltage from main microprocessor to the sensors is greater than 5.5 VDC
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor voltage is correct, alarm reset or alarm may be manually
reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Transducer Wiring
Check wires to sensors for short.
For CSP, check wiring from 2MM-20, 2MM-30 and 2MM-9.
For EVOP, check wiring from 2MM-28, SP-7 and 2MM-17. 0
For CDP, check wiring from 2MM-21, SP-7 and 2MM-10.
2. Check CT Wiring - Check wires to sensor for short from another circuit. Check wiring from 2MM-29, 2MM-
12 and 2MM-23 to PCM.
22103 INPUT LOST CONFIGURATION

• ACTIVATION: Input Board reports an invalid configuration
• UNIT CONTROL: Required Shutdown.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Wiring - Check logic power connections. Check wiring at 1MM-6 & 1MM-1.
Microprocessor Module replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.
62-11637 7–88
23100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OUTPBD1
• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate internally.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown all modules except the display and alarm. (The alarm will only display if the dis-
play module is communicating.) Main microprocessor status LED will illuminate steady green (not pulsing).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when internal communication is restored, alarm reset or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Replace Main Microprocessor - Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main
23101 OUTPUT LOST CONFIGURATION

• ACTIVATION: Output Board reports an invalid configuration.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Wiring - Check logic power connections. Check wiring at 1MM-6 & 1MM-1.
7–89 62-11637
25100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO STP1
• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate with stepper valve module over the CAN bus.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shut down and alarm. The stepper valve module status LED may be on steady green
(not pulsing) or red.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, alarm reset or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Both Active and Inactive Alarms for other “NO COMM” Alarms
a. If more than one alarm, record all and proceed to step 2.
b. If this is the only “NO COMM” alarm, replace module.
2. Check CAN Bus
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM and 1SVM. Verify no damage or corrosion in connec-
tions.
b. Check CAN circuits:
CAN Hi: 1MM-2 through SP-1 to 1SVM-5
CAN Lo: 1MM-4 through SP-4, to 1SVM-7
CAN (+ 12 VDC): 1MM-8 to 1SVM-6.
CAN 12 VDC: negative: 1MM-3 to 1SVM-1.
3. Check System - Clear active and inactive alarms. Start unit and monitor for additional “NO COMM”
alarms.
25101 OVER CURRENT STP1

• ACTIVATION: The stepper current is reported to be too high by stepper board 1 (Indicated by Stepper
Output Voltage < 5V) for 3 seconds as timed at stepper board.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. Steppers on board with problem disabled (Powered OFF) until good power
reported from Stepper Board at which point they are re-enabled.
• RESET CONDITION: 10 Seconds of good current range reported from all steppers.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check wires - Check wiring to Stepper Valves to SVM. Verify there is no physical damage to harness,
and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
2. Check power - Check power at 2SVM-11 and 2SVM-22. Verify battery power.
62-11637 7–90
25102 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE STP1
• ACTIVATION: The stepper input voltage is reported out of valid range (9V to 17V) by stepper board 1 for
3 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. Steppers on board with problem disabled (Powered OFF) until good power
reported from Stepper Board at which point they are re-enabled.
• RESET CONDITION: 10 Seconds of good voltage reported from all steppers.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check voltages - Check input voltage at SVM1.
2. Check Fuse F3
b. Check voltage through the fuse. If fuse is blown, replace it.
c. Check wiring from PCM34 - SP-6 - ENCU - 2SVM-22. Verify there is no physical damage to har-
3. Disconnect Stepper Valve(s) - If alarm goes away check operation of suspected valve. Refer to Sec-
tion 8.9.8 / Section 8.9.9.
26100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO ENCU

• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate with the engine control unit over the CAN bus.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, alarm reset or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Both Active and Inactive Alarms for other “NO COMM” Alarms
a. If more than one alarm, record all and proceed to step 2.
b. If this is the only alarm, check for continuity:
CAN Hi: 1MM-2 through SP-1 to ENCU-23.
CAN Lo: 1MM-4 through SP-4, to ENCU-24.
c. Replace ENCU.
2. Check CAN Bus
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM and1SVM. No damaged or corrosion in connections.
b. Check for CAN continuity:
CAN Hi: 1MM-2 through SP-1 to ENCU-23.
CAN Lo: 1MM-4 through SP-4, to ENCU-24.
If good continuity is not present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, mois-
ture or corrosion.
3. Check System - Clear active and inactive alarms. Start unit and monitor for additional “NO COMM”
alarms.
7–91 62-11637
26101 ENGINE OVER HEAT ENCU
• ACTIVATION: Engine water temperature > or = 262°F (128° C)
• RESET CONDITION: If trigger on message not received for 5 seconds, alarm reset or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Refer to 00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE.
26102 WATER TEMP LOW ENCU

• ACTIVATION: Voltage of water temperature sensor is 0.1 V or less
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Refer to:
26103 WATER TEMP HIGH ENCU

• ACTIVATION: Voltage of water temperature sensor is 4.9 V or above
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Refer to:
62-11637 7–92
26104 BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH ENCU
• ACTIVATION: ECU recognition of battery voltage is above 18 V.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Refer to 00015 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH
26105 ENGINE OVERRUN ENCU

• ACTIVATION: Engine speed out of range
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Refer to:
00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM, 00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM
26106 SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1 LOW

• ACTIVATION: Voltage to sensor is below 4.0 V
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)

a. Check actual engine speed using a hand held tachometer and compare with speed shown in unit
data. Must be ± 20 rpm. Must be a steady reading.
b. Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. (See wiring schematic Section 10.3.) Verify there is no
physical damage to sensor, and no damage or corrosion in connections.
c. Check power from ENCU. Should read approximately +12 VDC from terminal ENCU-43 to
ENSSN-3.
d. Check power from ENCU. +5 VDC from terminal ENCU-29 to RPS-1
e. Check ground to ENCU. Check wiring from terminal ENCU-20 to ENSSN-1
f. Check signal to ENCU. Check wiring from terminal ENCU-2 to ENSSN-2
2. Check Rack Position Sensor (RPS). Refer to Section 8.5.13.
7–93 62-11637
26108 RACK POSITION SENSOR ABNORMAL
• ACTIVATION: Sensor voltage > 4.9 V or < 0.3V
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Rack Position Sensor (RPS) - Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. (See wiring sche-
matic Section 10.3.) No physical damage to sensor. No damaged or corrosion in connections.
2. Check Rack Position Sensor (RPS). Refer to Section 8.5.13
3. Refer to 26106 SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1 LOW
26109 ACTUATOR ABNORMAL ENCU

• ACTIVATION: Actuator current >3.0A or < 80mA
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine Operation: Required Shutdown.
Electric Operation: Will not activate in electric operation.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2 Section, page 7-2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to
see if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Refer to 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT
a. Check voltage from fuse F3 through PCM-34 and SP-6 to ENCU-22. Verify correct fuse, see Figure
2.7. Must have minimum 11 VDC with the battery connected and SROS in the OFF position.
RUN position. If no, energize the run relay output using component test mode (refer to Section
5.2.4) and retest.
c. Check for ground at ENCU-19 and ENCUGND-A (at the battery negative cable connection). If
62-11637 7–94
26110 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR ABNORMAL
• ACTIVATION: Engine speed out of range
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Refer to 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR
27200 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OPTIONAL COMM MODULE

• ACTIVATION: Alarm 21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO is not active, and Number
Of Comm Modules Configuration is set to 1, and no sync responses have been received from the Comm
Module for 10 seconds.
• RESET CONDITION: Sync response received from the Comm Module in the past 10 seconds, alarm
reset or alarm may be manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for other CAN bus alarms - This alarm may accompany other alarms, complete the trouble-
shooting steps for alarms found. If repairs have been made and the other alarms have cleared, further
troubleshooting may not be required.
2. Replace Comm Module
28001 NO COMM FROM FUEL SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: The fuel sensor is configured as 3rd party and no communications have been received
from the sensor for at least 15 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Communications have been received from the fuel sensor.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for proper APX Control System Configuration - Refer to Section 5.2.3 & Table 5–1.
2. Make sure that all third party configurations are correct and software is current.
3. Check Fuel Sensor and Wiring - Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. No physical damage to
sensor. No damaged or corrosion in connections.
7–95 62-11637
28002 NO COMM FROM DOOR SWITCH
• ACTIVATION: The door switch configuration is configured as 3rd Party and no communications have
been received for 15 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Communications have been received from the door switch.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
3. Check Switch and Wiring - Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. No physical damage to sensor.
No damaged or corrosion in connections.
28003 INVALID DOOR SWITCH

• ACTIVATION: The Door Switch configuration is configured as 3rd Party and data received from the switch
is invalid.
• RESET CONDITION: Valid data received from door switch.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
28004 INVALID REMS1

28005 INVALID REMS2
• ACTIVATION: The Remote Switch configuration is configured as 3rd Party and data received from the
switch is invalid.
• RESET CONDITION: Valid data received from remote switch.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
62-11637 7–96
SECTION 8 - SERVICE
8.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2

8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.3 PRE-TRIP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.4 EXTERNAL SURFACE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.5 ENGINE AND ENGINE RELATED SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
8.6 POWER TRAIN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.8 COMPRESSOR AND UNLOADER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 8
Service
! WARNING ! CAUTION
Unit may start automatically at any time Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of
even if the switch is in the OFF position. inert gas brazing procedures is manda-
Use proper lockout/tagout procedures tory for all Carrier Transicold refrigera-
before inspection/servicing. All unit tion units; otherwise compressor failure
inspection/servicing by properly trained will occur. For more information Refer to
personnel only. Technical Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert
Gas Brazing.
! WARNING
Beware of moving belt and belt driven
! CAUTION
components. R-452A is an A1 non-flammable refriger-
ant blend; however certain of its constitu-
ents are considered A2L mildly
! WARNING flammable.
When working with belts, beware of pinch For this reason, it is imperative that the
points. system of a Vector unit utilizing R-452A
refrigerant be reclaimed to a sufficient
vacuum to ensure all residual refrigerant
! WARNING is removed from the system.
Never use air or gases containing oxygen Follow the Removing Charge R-452A pro-
for leak testing or operating refrigerant cedure before performing any “Hot
compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air work,” including but not limited to braz-
or gases containing oxygen can lead to ing or welding on a unit that has been
explosion. charged with R-452A, to prevent flare up
of residual A2L refrigerant constituents.
Refrigerant must be reclaimed until
! WARNING equipment gauge indicates 20 inHG (-
Inspect battery cables for signs of wear, 0.6bar) of vacuum.
abrasion or damage at every Pretrip Refer to Section 8.7.2.7 Removing
inspection and replace if necessary. Also Charge R-452A .
check battery cable routing to ensure
Refer to the Service Bulletin SB06-16 for
that clamps are secure and that cables
additional information.
are not pinched or chafing against any
components. NOTE
To avoid damage to the Earth’s ozone layer,
! CAUTION use a refrigerant recovery system whenever
removing refrigerant. When working with
Disconnect batteries before doing any refrigerants you must comply with all local
electrical welding on unit or chassis to government environmental laws.
which unit is attached (trailer, container,
rail car, metal building, etc).
8–1 62-11637
8.1 Section Layout
Service and Maintenance procedures are presented in the following sections:
• Scheduled Maintenance - Section 8.2
• Pretrip Inspection - Section 8.3
• External Surface Service (automatic fresh air exchange, grille, surround, and doors) - Section 8.4
• Engine And Engine Related Systems Service - Section 8.5
• Refrigerant System Service - Section 8.7
• Compressor and Unloader Service - Section 8.8
• Refrigerant System Component Service Section 8.9
• Electrical System Component Service Including Display Module - Section 11.
Refer to the Table of Contents to locate specific topics.
8.2 Scheduled Maintenance

For the most reliable operation and for maximum life, this unit requires regular maintenance. This includes oil and
filter changes, fuel and air cleaner replacement, coolant replacement and Pretrip inspections. Maintenance is to be
performed in accordance with the procedures provided in Table 8–1.
8.3 Pretrip Inspection-

Pretrip inspection should be performed before every trip and at regular maintenance intervals. Pretrip procedures
are provided in the Trailer Refrigeration Pretrip Inspection document 62-90483.
62-11637 8–2
Table 8–1 Maintenance Schedule
! WARNING
System Operation Reference Section
a. Pretrip Inspections
1. Pretrip Inspection: Before starting Section 8.3
2. Pretrip Inspection: After starting Section 8.3
3. Run Microprocessor Pretrip: Before loading Section 3.6
4. Check Engine Hours Section 3.16

b. Every Service Interval or Yearly
Engine 1. Check engine oil and filter change interval (refer to Section d. Section d.
of this table)
2. Check low oil pressure switch Check
3. Clean crankcase breather Section 8.5.16
4. Check fuel injectors every 1,500 hours* Engine Manual
5. Check injection pump every 3,000 hours* Engine Manual
6. Check and adjust engine valves every 4,000 hours Engine Manual
Fuel System 1. Clean mechanical and electric (if equipped) fuel pump screens Section 8.5.3 and
Section 8.5.4
2. Change fuel filter Section 8.5.5
3. Check fuel heater (if equipped) Section 8.5.8
Cooling System 1. Check coolant change interval (refer to Section e. of this Section 8.5.14
table). If replacement is not required, check antifreeze
concentration using a refractometer (Carrier Transicold part
number 07-00435-00)
2. Clean condenser/radiator surfaces Section 8.5.14
3. Check water pump Check
4. Check water temperature sensor Check
Exhaust System 1. Check mounting hardware
Check
2. Check muffler and exhaust pipes
Air Intake System 1. Change air cleaner element
Section 8.5.10
2. Check and reset air cleaner indicator
Starting Circuit 1. Clean battery connections and cables for chafing, rub spots Check/Replace
and corrosion
Check/Replace
2. Check battery hold down clamps
Check
3. Check battery condition
Check
4. Check starter operation
Charging Circuit 1. Check alternator brushes, replace if needed
Section 8.9.19
2. Check alternator output
*Based upon EPA 40 CFR Part 89
8–3 62-11637
Table 8–1 Maintenance Schedule
! WARNING
System Operation Reference Section
Unit 1. Check unit mounting bolts Check
2. Check engine and compressor mounting bolts Check
3. Check door latches and hinges Section 8.4.4
4. Check all belt tensions, adjust as necessary Check
5. Check gearbox and fanshaft for oil leaks Check
6. Check fanshaft, idler and gearbox bearings Check
7. Check clutch air gap, adjust as required Section 8.6.4

Refrigeration 1. Check compressor drive coupling Section 8.6
System
2. Check defrost air switch and calibrate as necessary Section 8.9.13
3. Check and clean the evaporator coil and all defrost drain Section 8.9.1
hoses
Check
4. Install manifold gauge set and check refrigerant pressure
Section 3.6
5. Run APX Control System Pretrip
Section 3.11
6. Check manual defrost operation
Electrical 1. Check unit switches and electrical connections
System
2. Check condition of all modules
Check/Replace
3. Check Engine Wiring Harness for chafing, rub spots and
corrosion
c. 5 year or 12,000 Hour Maintenance
Coolant 1. Drain and flush cooling system

Section 8.5.14
System 2. Refill with Extended Life Coolant
d. Oil Change Intervals
Oil Type Oil Change / ESI Filter Change
Petroleum 3000 hours or two years (Maximum oil drain interval is two years.)
Mobile Delvac 1* 4000 hours or two years (Maximum oil drain interval is two years.)
* Mobil Delvac1 is the only approved synthetic oil
These maintenance schedules are based on the use of approved oils and regular Pretrip inspections of the unit.
Failure to follow the recommended maintenance schedule may affect the life and reliability of the refrigeration unit.
62-11637 8–4
8.4 External Surface Service
Procedures for servicing or maintaining the automatic fresh air exchange, grille, surround, doors, door latches and
display module are provided below.
8.4.1 AutoFresh Fresh Air Exchange

Figure 8.1 Automatic Fresh Air Exchange
1 2 3 4 5
6
8
2
7
1. Cover 5. Inlet Connection
2. Gasket 6. Outlet Connection
3. Housing 7. Solenoid Hardware
4. Solenoid 8. Cover Hardware
8.4.1.1 Replace Cover and/or Cover Gaskets

1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position and
disabling the starter.
2. Loosen outermost cover mounting nut (8, Figure 8.1) to unlock hardware and remove hardware holding
cover (1) in place.
3. Slide cover off solenoid shaft (4), remove and replace gaskets (2). Slide cover in place against inner hard-
ware to ensure cover gasket is slightly compressed to form a good seal. If required, adjust inner hardware
and re-lock in place.
4. Install outer hardware (two plain washers, a lock washer and two nuts). Torque nut against cover lock
washer to 120 inch/lbs (13.6 Nm) and then re-lock outer nut.
5. Re-enable the starter, start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
8.4.1.2 Replace Solenoid

2. Remove cover in accordance with preceding step. Loosen innermost cover mounting nut to unlock and
remove remaining cover hardware.
3. Disconnect the solenoid connector, remove hardware (7) attaching old solenoid and bring new solenoid in
place. Torque mounting hardware to 120 inch/lbs (13.6 Nm), and reconnect connector.
4. If housing (3) is replaced, torque all mounting hardware to 120 inch/lbs (13.6 Nm).
5. Reinstall and adjust cover in accordance with preceding step.
8–5 62-11637
8.4.2 Remove Grille Insert Figure 8.2 Grille Insert Removal and Door Latch
Maintenance
NOTE
If difficulty is experienced when attempting Grille Insert
to remove the grille mounting bolts, the grille Grille Insert Mounting Bolts
may be removed with the surround attached
to allow access to the mounting clips. (Refer Surround
to Section 8.4.3.)
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF
position and disabling the starter.
2. Remove the three grille insert mounting bolts on
each side of the grille insert (Figure 8.2).
3. Remove the two grille insert mounting bolts on
top of the grille insert.
4. The grille is fitted with locating tabs along the
bottom. To remove, swing insert down and lift
out of locating slots.
5. Reverse above steps to install grille insert.
6. Re-enable the starter, start unit and run Pretrip
to check operation.
Lubricate Latches and Pins
8.4.3 Remove Surround

Figure 8.3 Surround Removal
NOTE
It is not necessary to remove the grille Mounting Bolts
before removing the surround.

2. Open both side and front doors.
3. Remove the bolts that secure the surround to
the unit (see Figure 8.3).
4. Reverse above steps to install surround.
5. Re-enable the starter, start unit and run Pretrip
to check operation.
Mounting Bolts
Remove Decal Plate to
Access Unit Mounting Stud
62-11637 8–6
8.4.4 Door Latch Maintenance and Cable Replacement
8.4.4.1 Door Latch Maintenance

Proper maintenance is important for smooth operation of the latch assemblies and the latch pins that are mounted
on the unit frame (see Figure 8.2). In order to keep the movable parts clean and lubricated, the use of a de-greas-
ing cleaner and LPS 2 lubricant is recommended. This lubricant should be available at any local automobile and
truck parts supplier.
8.4.4.2 Cable Replacement
1. Remove circular clip that secures the cable to the paddle assembly (see Figure 8.4.)
2. Slide cable from paddle and rotate other end out of latch assembly.
NOTE
The side door lower cable is inserted through the upper cable eyelet. The lower cable is to be removed
to gain access to the upper cable.
3. Reverse above steps to install new cable.
Figure 8.4 Door Latch Cable Removal
1
2
1. Paddle Assembly (Typical, Front and Side Doors)

2. Circular Clips (Typical, Front and Side Doors)
3. Lower Cable Upper Connection (Side Doors Only)
4. Upper Cable (Side Doors Only)
8–7 62-11637
8.5 Engine and Engine Related Service
Procedures for servicing the engine, fuel system, engine cooling system and air cleaner are provided in the
following sub-paragraphs.
8.5.1 Fuel System

The fuel system consists of the fuel tank, mechanical fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel injection pump, the injectors and
interconnecting tubing. The fuel system may also be equipped with an optional electric pump and/or optional
electric fuel heater.
Two fuel system configurations are available, the standard extended life spin-on filter system and the extra heavy-
duty suction side filter system (see Figure 8.5).
Figure 8.5 Fuel System Diagram
6SLQ2Q)LOWHU6\VWHP 6XFWLRQ6LGH)LOWHU6\VWHP
10
10
15 9
11
12 11
9
14
8 7
8
13
6
2
7
3 5
4
6 4 2
5 12
1
13
1
1. Fuel Tank 9. Injection Pump

2. Supply Line 10. Injector Nozzles
3. Electric Pump 11. Bleed Screw
4. Mechanical Pump 12. Return Line
5. Water Drain Valve 13. Level Sensor
6. Fuel Heater 14. Vent Cap
7. Filter 15. Fuel Head Assembly
8. Filter or Fuel Head Leak-Off Line
62-11637 8–8
8.5.2 Priming the Fuel System
The mechanical fuel pump (Figure 8.6) is mounted on the engine next to the injection pump. This pump has a
manual plunger for priming the fuel system when the fuel tank has been run dry.
1. If bleeding a spin-on system, considerable effort may be saved by changing the filter and filling the new
element with clean diesel fuel before priming the remainder of the system. Refer to Section 8.5.5. If
bleeding a suction side filter system remove the vent cap from the filter bowl and add fuel until level is about
even with the top of the filter element, reinstall cap. Do not allow fuel level to fall below the visible level in the
bowl as the bleeding procedure is accomplished, add more fuel if required.
2. Turn the bleed valve (red) counter-clockwise until fully opened.
3. Turn the top of the manual plunger counter-clockwise to unlock it. S-L-O-W-L-Y (up/down once per second)
pump the manual plunger until positive pressure (resistance) is felt. This may take up to 200 strokes. This
will indicate fuel flow.
4. Continue to pump S-L-O-W-L-Y (up/down once per second) approximately 100 more strokes to fill the filter
and bleed the air out of the lines.
5. Start engine. It may be necessary to continue to pump until the engine starts.
NOTICE
Running the engine for an extended period of time with the manual plunger up can cause a
priming pump failure
6. Depress and turn the top of the manual plunger clockwise to lock in place.
7. When engine is running smoothly, turn bleed valve clockwise until fully closed. If bleeding a suction side fil-
ter system, loosen the vent on the cover until fuel level lowers to the collar clamp then hand tighten vent.
Figure 8.6 Fuel Bleed Components
4
1
1. Mechanical Fuel Pump

2. Manual Plunger
3. Bleed Valve
4. Injection Pump
8–9 62-11637
8.5.3 Mechanical Fuel Pump Screen, Check/Replace
The fuel screen (Figure 8.7) may become plugged or restricted with foreign particles or wax as a result of using the
wrong grade of fuel or untreated fuel in cold weather. This will cause the engine to lose power. The screen must be
cleaned on a regular schedule such as unit Pretrip or when the oil and fuel filters are changed.
Figure 8.7 Mechanical Fuel Pump
Screen
Nut
Copper
Rings
Banjo
Fitting Nut
2. Turn nut (Figure 8.7) counter-clockwise to loosen and remove it.
3. Remove banjo fitting and let it hang loose. Discard copper rings and replace with new ones.
4. Turn screen counter-clockwise and remove. Check and clean, or replace as required.
5. To install reverse above steps.
6. Re-enable the starter, start unit and check for leaks.
8.5.4 Electric Fuel Pump Screen Check/Replace

2. Remove bowl ((Figure 8.8).
3. Remove gasket and screen. Figure 8.8 Electric Fuel Pump
! WARNING
Use the required protective eye wear and
clothing when working with solvents.
4. Wash screen in cleaning solvent and blow out

with air pressure. Clean bowl. Screen
5. To install, reverse above steps.
Gasket
6. Re-enable the starter, start unit and check for
leaks.
Bowl
62-11637 8–10
8.5.5 Spin–On Fuel Filter Replacement
2. Place a shallow pan under Filter (Figure 8.5) and open Water Drain Valve to drain contents.
3. Remove water separator and O-ring or heater bowl and then remove element.
4. Install water separator on new element using new O-ring or heater bowl on new element using new gasket.
5. Fill new element with clean diesel fuel, lubricate the seal and install. Tighten firmly by hand.
8.5.6 Suction Side Fuel Filter Replacement
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by Figure 8.9 Suction Side Fuel Filter
Collar
NOTE
Vent Cap
If required, use a lock collar wrench (Carrier
Transicold part number 07–00423–00) to Vent Cap Seal
loosen the collar or vent cap. Do not use the
wrench to install vent cap or collar, hand
tighten only.
2. Place a shallow pan under filter (Figure 8.9). Cover
Remove the vent cap and open the drain valve
to drain the fuel below the collar level.
3. Remove the collar then remove the clear cover. Cover Seal
4. Remove filter element spring, cover seal and Spring
vent cap seal. Dispose of the filter element and
seals properly.
5. Using a clean shop rag, clean the cover, collar Filter Element
and threads on the filter body.
6. Install new filter element, cover seal and vent

cap seal. Install filter with spring at top and hand
tighten collar.
7. Prime the system by removing the vent cap from Check Valve
the filter bowl and add fuel until level is about
even with the top of the filter element. Reinstall
Heater
cap and hand tighten.
(If Equipped)
8. Re-enable the starter, start the engine and run
for one minute. Slowly open the vent cap and
allow the fuel level to drop to about one inch
above the collar.
9. Hand tighten the vent cap.
Drain Valve
8–11 62-11637
8.5.7 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS)
An optional Fuel Level Sensor (Figure 8.10) supplies an input signal to the control system as to the percent of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank.
The control system will activate alarm 00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING when fuel level reaches 15%, and (if
configured to do so) shuts the engine down when fuel level reaches 10%. The fuel level is also displayed in Unit Data.
8.5.7.1 Check the Fuel Level Sensor:

2. Verify that the wiring is correct, cable shield is properly grounded and condition of connectors. No damage
to sensor; no damage, moisture or corrosion in connectors.
3. Energize sensor circuit, (MM calling for engine operation). Check power (approximately 12 VDC) from PCM-
22 (9, Figure 8.10) through to connector (13). Check ground from 2MM-24 (8) through connector (12).
Check signal (greater than 0.24 VDC and less than 5VDC) at 2MM-13.
4. If checks in the preceding step are OK, remove the fuel level sensor, focus tube andand gaskets. With the
trailer level, verify that the fuel level sensor flange is within one-half bubble of level using a 24 inch level.
Adjust tank mounting as required.
Figure 8.10 Fuel Level Sensor
7 10 11 14
8 11 10 15
1
2
3 5
4 16 17
9 12
13 12
6
1. Fuel Level Sensor 10. White Wire (Connection C)

2. Gasket 11. Black Wire (Connection B)
3. Focus Tube 12. Red Wire (Connection A)
4. Sensor Flange 13. Ground (Shield)
5. Fuel Level Sensor Flange 14. Yellow Wire (Connection C)
6. Fuel Tank 15. Black Wire (Connection B)
7. Wire FLSC to 2MM-13 (Connection C) 16. Red Wire (Connection A)
8. Wire FLSB to 2MM-24 (Connection B) 17. Wires From Sensor
9. Wire PCM-22 to FLSA (Connection A)
-----
NOTICE
Torque fuel level sensor mounting screws to 15 to 18 inch/lbs (1.7 to 2.0 Nm). DO NOT over
tighten, as little as 20 inch/pounds (2.3 Nm) will damage the sensor.
5. Using new gaskets, reinstall fuel level sensor components. The mounting holes are not symmetrical, there is
an alignment hole in the sensor, alignment holes and index dimples in the gaskets and an alignment notch in
the focus tube flange to assist in aligning the components. Install mounting screws and washers in all
mounting holes and bring to finger tight. Tighten in accordance with the instructions provided in the preced-
ing NOTICE.
6. With the fuel tank empty the output reading should be approximately 0.25 VDC.
7. With the fuel tank full, the output reading should be approximately 4.75 VDC.
62-11637 8–12
8.5.8 Fuel Heater
The optional Fuel Heater (Figure 8.5) applies heat to the fuel in the fuel filter. Heating the fuel dissolves/prevents
paraffin wax crystals (and ice) that form when diesel fuel is chilled thus enabling the water separator to work more
efficiently and to prevent the filter from plugging with wax and/or ice crystals. When the ambient air sensor is read-
ing 77°F (25°C) or higher, the APX Control System will not enable this circuit. Also, the heater is fitted with an inter-
nal temperature switch (FHTS - see schematic diagram, Section 10). The heater used in spin on type filter
systems closes on a temperature fall, to energize the heater element at temperatures below 45°F (7.2°C), and
opens on a temperature rise to de-energize the heater element at 75°F (23.9°C). The heater used in suction side
filter systems closes at temperatures below 53 ± 7°F (11.7 ± 3.9°C).
8.5.8.1 Test the Fuel Heater:
1. Using Unit Data (refer to Section 3.14), check to ensure the Ambient Air Temperature reading is below 77°F
(25°C), if the reading is below this temperature the fuel heater relay (FHR) should be energized. If the relay
does not energize, check for power from PCM fuse F10 to the relay coil + terminal and ground from the coil
negative connection through PCM-17 to 3MM-17.
2. With the relay contacts closed, check for power from F7, through the relay contacts, fuse F14, through PCM-
14 and 3 through SP-8 to the fuel heater connector at terminal A. Check also for ground from the fuel heater
connector terminal B through SP-3 to GND1RING1.
3. If the wiring is good and the fuel heater temperature is below the actuation temperature of 77°F (25°C),
replace the fuel heater. If the wiring is good but the fuel heater temperature is above the actuation tempera-
ture, the internal temperature switch may be open. Retest at a temperature below the actuation temperature
as soon as conditions allow.
4. Start unit and check for leaks.
8.5.9 Engine Oil And Oil Filter
8.5.9.1 Check Engine Oil Level

1. Warm up the engine and then stop it by placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
2. Unscrew the cap/dipstick (Figure 8.11). Wipe the dipstick clean and insert the cap into the oil fill tube with-
out threading into tube.
3. Remove the dipstick again and check oil level. DO NOT add oil if the level is in the “safe” range. If needed,
add oil as indicated by markings on dipstick until level is in the “safe” range.
4. After checking or adding oil as necessary, ensure cap is threaded back onto oil fill tube.
Figure 8.11 Engine Oil Level
Cap
Dipstick
QTS 1 2 SAFE
8–13 62-11637
8.5.9.2 Change Engine Oil
1. Warm up the engine and then stop it by placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by disabling the starter.
3. If available, install oil drain tool (CTD part number 68-15763-01) (Figure 8.12.)The Oil Drain Tool not only
directs the oil over the door latch pin bracket and bottom panel on units so equipped, but also holds a typical
drain bucket in place while the oil is draining from the engine.
4. Remove drain plug, drain engine oil. Replace plug and refill engine with oil. Continue with step c. and
change oil filter.
Figure 8.12 Oil Drain Tool
8.5.9.3 Change Engine Oil Filter

1. If not continuing from the previous step, warm up the engine and then stop it by placing the START/RUN-
OFF switch in the OFF position.
2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by disabling the starter.
3. Remove oil filter. Ensure filter mounting is clean.
NOTICE
When changing oil filter, the new filter should be primed (partially filled) with clean oil if
possible. If the filter is not primed, the engine may operate for a period with no oil supplied to
the bearings.
4. Lightly oil gasket on new filter before installing. Tighten 3/4 to 1 turn after seal makes contact.
8.5.10 Air Cleaner

The air cleaner should be inspected regularly for leaks. A damaged air cleaner or hose can seriously affect the per-
formance and life of the engine. The air cleaner is designed to remove contaminants from the air entering the
engine. An excessive accumulation of contaminants in the air cleaner will impair its operation; therefore, a service
schedule must be set up and followed.
An air cleaner service indicator is connected to the intake manifold. Its function is to indicate when the air cleaner
filter element requires replacement. During operation, when a plugged air filter element causes the intake manifold
pressure to drop to 20” (500 mm) WG, the indicator will move to the red line. The filter element should then be
replaced and the indicator reset by pressing the reset button.
2. Check all connections for mechanical tightness. Be sure filter outlet pipe is not fractured.
3. Release 2 clips on air cleaner housing and remove the cover.
4. Remove filter element, wipe inside of air cleaner housing clean inspect filter element and replace if required.
62-11637 8–14
5. Wipe inside of the cover and re-install.
6. Re-secure 2 clips on air cleaner housing.
7. Re-enable the starter, start unit and check for leaks. Reset air cleaner service indicator.
8.5.11 Engine Preheater

Current draw for the preheat circuit is checked during Pretrip (Section 3.6). Refer to Section 2.11 for proper
amperage and resistance values.
8.5.11.1 Engine Preheater (EPH) Troubleshooting Figure 8.13 Engine Preheater

+7HUPLQDO
2. Disconnect the lead.
3. Measure the resistance between the + terminal

and the heater body. Refer to Section 2.8 for +HDWHU%RG\
correct resistance value.
4. If the resistance is infinite or zero, the engine

preheat element is faulty and must be replaced.
8.5.11.2 Replace Engine Preheater
2. Remove the inlet hose.
3. Disconnect the lead.
4. Remove the flange, engine preheater and gaskets.
NOTE
To avoid short-circuiting the heater, ensure the heater and heater elements are vertical when
assembling to the intake manifold. The plus terminal is to be mounted towards the front of the unit.
5. Clean gasket surfaces and reinstall engine preheater and flange using new gaskets. Torque flange bolts to
15 to 20 ft/lbs (20.3 to 27.1 nm).
8–15 62-11637
Figure 8.14 Engine Control System
1, 2 3 4
1. Engine Preheater (EPH) 4. Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA)

2. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor 5. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
(ENCT) (Behind Engine Preheater) 6. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)
3. Rack Position Sensor (RPS) 7. Engine Control Unit (ENCU)
-----
8.5.12 Engine Control System

The engine is controlled by the engine control unit (ENCU), the fuel/speed actuator (FSA), the engine speed
sensor (ENSSN), the rack position sensor (RPS), the engine oil pressure switch (ENOPS) and the engine coolant
temperature sensor (ENCT). Refer to Figure 8.14.
• The ENCU starts, stops and controls engine • The ENOPS is connected to the engine oil pump
speed by varying the position of the FSA rod. It outlet. It provides an open or closed signal to the
also provides oil pressure, coolant temperature, ENCU.
engine load and speed signals to the APX
• The RPS provides the position of the rack to the
Control System over the CAN.
ENCU.
• The FSA combines the fuel shutoff solenoid and
• The ENCT provides the engine coolant
speed control solenoid into one component;
temperature signal to the ENCU.
opening and closing the fuel rack (throttle) in
accordance with signals from the ENCU. • If any of these components is not functioning
c o r r e c t l y, a c o r r e s p o n d i n g a l a r m w i l l b e
• The ENSSN provides the speed signal to the
activated.
ENCU.
8.5.13 Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Calibration

The Rack Position Sensor calibration procedure is a software function that can only be initiated in Technician
Mode. This calibration procedure should be performed after replacing the Engine, the ENCU, or the Rack Position
Sensor.
To Start the Rack Position Sensor Calibration Procedure:
1. Put the system into Technician Mode, refer to Section 5.2.
2. Select the Component Calibration Mode soft key.
3. Press “=” to start the Rack Position Sensor calibration.
During calibration, the display will show the Engine Load (percent), RPM, current calibration offset (the offset in the
Engine ECU), and calibration status.
The RPS is calibrated at an engine speed of 1700 - 1780 RPM. In order to reach the required engine speed, the
system will incrementally increase engine load.
62-11637 8–16
If engine speed is not low enough to calibrate the sensor (1700 – 1780 RPM), the system will indicate that the load
is too low for calibration. In this case you will have to manually increase the system load by slowly blocking the con-
denser coil until the load is increased enough for the engine to reach calibration RPM, the calibration should com-
plete successfully.
If the Engine Speed still does not reach 1700-1780 RPM, a Gate Valve Assembly can be used to restrict engine air
intake using the following steps:
2. Disconnect the air intake hose (if applicable) from the air cleaner inlet and install the gate valve assembly to
the air cleaner inlet. Make sure the gate valve is fully open.
3. Remove the kazoo from the air cleaner and install the plug in its place.
4. Re-enable the starter and start the unit.
5. Slowly close the gate valve to reduce flow and bring engine speed between 1700 and 1780 RPM. Once
proper RPM is achieved, the calibration process will begin.
After the calibration process is finished, the system will indicate that the calibration was successful, and the engine
will shut down.
8.5.14 Cooling System
8.5.14.1 Cleaning and Flushing

Air flows through the condenser and then the radiator. The cooling surfaces must be clean and the interior of the
radiator must be clean for adequate cooling.
NOTICE
Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself will damage
the cooling system. Always add pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water to radiator / engine.
Never exceed more than a 60% concentration of anti-freeze. Use a low silicate anti-freeze
meeting GM specifications GM 6038M for standard life coolant or use Texaco Havoline
extended life coolant or any other extended life coolant which is Dexcool approved and has 5/
150 (5 years / 150,000 miles) on the label.
2. Remove all foreign material from the condenser and radiator by reversing the normal air flow. (Air is pulled
in through the front and discharges over the engine.) Compressed air or water may be used as a cleaning
agent.
! WARNING
Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant system; if the cap must be removed, do so very
NOTE
Draining the coolant from the engine petcock will leave approximately 1 quart (.9 liters) of coolant in
the block.
3. Drain coolant completely by removing radiator cap and then the lower radiator hose or drain plug located at
the opposite end of the radiator.
NOTICE
NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT ENGINE, however hot water can always be added to
a cold engine.
8–17 62-11637
4. Install hose or drain plug and fill system with clean, untreated water.
NOTE
Only clean water should be used to flush the cooling system. Do not use any radiator flush or deter-
gents to clean the radiator.
5. Start the engine and drain system while warm. Rinse system three times after it has cooled down. Refill sys-
tem with water.
6. Run engine to operating temperature. Drain system again and fill with 50/50 water/anti-freeze mixture. (refer
to the Notice at the beginning of this section.)
7. Reinstall the negative battery cable, start unit and check for leaks.
8.5.14.2 Radiator Replacement

2. To access the radiator, remove the surround with grill attached, refer to Section 8.4.3. Then remove the
condenser fan support bracket at the top of the frame.
3. Drain coolant into a suitable container by removing coolant bottle cap and then the engine drain plug (see
Figure 8.15).
4. Remove condenser fan, refer to Section 8.6.3, and then remove the lower fan shroud.
5. Remove the rear condenser frame mounting bolts and slide the frame back.
6. Remove the radiator inlet, outlet, and coolant bottle hoses at the radiator fittings. Remove top radiator
mounting brackets.
7. Lift curb side of radiator and work coolant bottle and outlet fitting between frames. Using a catch pan at the
radiator inlet, lift radiator vertical. Work inlet fitting between frames at the curb side, in the same manner as
the outlet fitting, and remove radiator through the top of the unit.
8. Re-assemble in reverse order of removal. Torque frame and radiator mounting bolts 36 to 60 inch/lbs (4.1 to
6.8 Nm) and condenser fan support bracket bolts 95 to 119 inch/lbs (10.7 to 13.4 Nm).
9. Fill radiator with 50/50 water/anti-freeze mixture.
10. Reinstall the negative battery cable, start unit and check for leaks.
62-11637 8–18
Figure 8.15 Radiator Assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Front Condenser Frame and Condenser

2. Gasket (Typical)
3. Radiator
4. Radiator Mounting Bracket
5. Radiator Mounting Bracket Bolts
6. Rear Condenser Frame
7. Rear Condenser Frame Mounting Bolts
8. Engine Drain Plug
-----
8–19 62-11637
8.5.15 Water Pump/Alternator Belt Figure 8.16 Water Pump/Alternator Belt
The water pump/alternator belt is driven by a sheave 1
on the engine crankshaft. Frayed, cracked or worn
belts must be replaced. Adjustment is achieved by 2
altering the position of the alternator.
! WARNING 3
Beware of moving belt and belt driven
components.
4
! WARNING
5
When working with belts, beware of pinch
points. 6
When replacing a belt, avoid excessive force when 7
applying tension to the belt to prevent damage to the
water pump bearings.

placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF 1. Rain Shield
position and removing the negative battery 2. Pivot Bolt
cable. 3. Alternator
2. Loosen pivot bolt and adjusting bolt, and 4. Adjustment Bolt
remove old belt (Figure 8.16). Place new belt on 5. Water Pump
sheaves and then loosely position alternator. 6. Water Pump/Alternator Belt
7. Crankshaft Sheave
3. Check the center alignment of the engine drive, alternator and water pump sheaves to ensure proper
alignment. Pulley misalignment will create excess belt wear and shorten alternator bearing life. The center
line of all three sheaves must be in line.
4. Pivot alternator to place tension on belt using

hand force only. Do not use pry bar or excessive Replacement Belt Ten-
force as it may cause bearing failure. Check belt Replacement Belt Initial
sion After 15 Minutes of
tension, using belt tension tool Carrier Tension
Running Time
Transicold part number 07-00203-00 or 07-
00253-00, in accordance with the following Lbs Nm Lbs Nm
chart. Tighten pivot bolt 80 to 90 ft/lbs (108.5 to 45 to 55 62 to 76 45 to 55 62 to 76
122.0 Nm) and adjustment bolt 14 to 19 ft/lbs
(19.0 to 25.8 Nm).
5. Reinstall the negative battery cable, run unit for15 minutes. Remove negative battery cable, recheck belt
tension and then reconnect negative battery cable.
-----
62-11637 8–20
8.5.16 Crankcase Breather Figure 8.17 Engine Crankcase Breather
The engine uses a closed type breather with the Breather Valve
breather line attached to the cylinder head cover (Fig- Breather Cover
ure 8.17). The breather assembly should be cleaned Screw
once a year or at every oil change interval (whichever
comes first) (Table 8–1).
Breather Tube
8.6 Power Train Service
! WARNING
Beware of moving belt and belt driven components.
! WARNING
When working with belts, beware of pinch points.
The power train (Figure 2.4) is a belt drive system that transfers power from the engine to the condenser and
evaporator fans. The system consists an upper and lower belt, gear box, fanshaft and clutch. Service instructions
for the power train system are provided in the following sub paragraphs.
NOTE
Coverage of the water pump/alternator belt is provided in Section Figure 8.15 while coverage of the
alternator is provided in Section 8.9.19.
Figure 8.18 Lower Belt
Lower Belt Lower Idler Lower Belt Lower Idler

Drive Adapter
Pivot Bolt
Match Mark
Flywheel
Flywheel
Drive Adapter
Drive Adapter Attaching
Bolts & Washers
Figure A Figure B
8–21 62-11637
8.6.1 Lower Belt Replacement
To remove and reinstall the lower belt, refer to Figure 8.18.
2. Match mark drive adapter to flywheel at position shown for ease of reassembly.
3. Loosen the lower idler pivot bolt and slide adjustment bolt to release belt tension.
4. Remove six bolts, securing drive adapter to flywheel.
5. Insert two of the six bolts into the threaded holes (jacking holes) provided on drive adapter. Tighten these
bolts evenly to push the drive adapter from the flywheel. After separating the adapter from the flywheel,
remove the two bolts from adapter. Insert a pry bar between flywheel and drive adapter and slide the
adapter toward the compressor enough to change the belt as shown in Figure 8.18 Figure B. Remove and
replace belt.
6. Reinstall by prying the adapter back toward the engine flywheel or use 5/16-18 x 2-1/2 lg bolts in every other
hole of adapter and take up evenly on the bolts until the original 5/16-18 x 1 lg bolts engage flywheel.
7. Apply thread sealer (Loctite #262) to the bolts. Take up on all bolts evenly and then torque bolts 26 to 30 ft/
lbs (35.3 to 40.7 Nm).
8. Fit new belt in grooves and check the center alignment of the drive adapter, upper idler and gearbox
sheaves to ensure proper alignment. Pulley misalignment will create excess belt wear and shorten alterna-
tor bearing life. The center line of all three sheaves must be in line.
9. Pivot idler to place tension on belt and set belt tension, using belt tension tool Carrier Transicold part num-
ber 07-00203-00 or 07-00253-00, in accordance with the following chart. Tighten idler pivot and adjustment
slide bolts.
Replacement Belt Initial Replacement Belt Ten-

Tension sion After 15 Minutes of
Running Time
Lbs Nm Lbs Nm
140 to 150 190 to 203 70 to 80 95 to 108
10. Reinstall the negative battery cable and run unit for 15 minutes.
11. Remove battery negative cable, recheck belt tension and then reconnect negative battery cable.
62-11637 8–22
Figure 8.19 Upper Power Train
1 7
2 3
13
4
5 7
6 8 10 12
11
25
26
14 15 23 24
21
16 17 18 19 20 22 3
1. Condenser Fan 14. Armature Retaining Bolts and Washers

2. Clutch 15. Key (Round End)
3. Fanshaft 16. Armature
4. Upper Belt 17. Rotor Retaining Nut
5. Upper Idler 18. Clutch Rotor
6. Gear Box 19. Rotor Spacer
7. Evaporator Fan 20. Coil
8. Seal Ring 21. Key (Square End)
9. Compression Ring 22. Fanshaft bolts and washers
10. Seal Ring Clamp 23. Shims
11. Bushing 24. Vent Fitting
12. Bushing Bolts and Washers 25. Vent Tube
13. Nozzle Cover 26. Fan/Clutch Bolts and Washers
-----
8–23 62-11637
8.6.2 Upper Belt Replacement
To remove and reinstall the upper belt, refer to Figure 8.19:
2. Loosen the Upper Idler pivot bolt and release tension.
3. Open the front doors.
4. Remove the top five bolts that secure the surround to the unit (Figure 8.3).
5. Remove the upper frame support.
6. Pull the unattached surround towards the front of the unit to gain access to the upper frame support.
Figure 8.20 Surround
7. Remove the upper fan shroud bolts, and remove the shroud.
Figure 8.21 Upper Frame Support
8. Remove three bolts (27) that secure condenser fan (1) to clutch rotor (19). Slide the fan away from the
clutch (2) sufficient to remove the belt.
9. Remove the belt.
10. Reinstall by sliding belt into clutch groove, reposition fan and securing with the three bolts. Torque bolts 18
to 22 ft/lbs (24.4 to 29.8 Nm).
11. Fit belt in place in grooves and check the center alignment of the clutch, upper idler and gearbox sheaves to
ensure proper alignment. Pulley misalignment will create excess belt wear and shorten alternator bearing
life. The center line of all three sheaves must be in line.
62-11637 8–24
12. Pivot the idler to place tension on belt using hand force only. Do not use pry bar or excessive force as it may
cause bearing failure. Use a 10” adjustable wrench to pivot idler and set belt tension. Use belt tension tool
Carrier Transicold part number 07-00203-00 or 07-00253-00, in accordance with the following chart. Tighten
upper idler pivot bolt.
Replacement Belt Ten-

Replacement Belt Initial
sion After 15 Minutes of
Tension
Running Time
Lbs Nm Lbs Nm
140 to 150 190 to 203 70 to 80 95 to 108
13. Reinstall upper fan shroud and upper frame support.

14. Reinstall the five upper mounting bolts to secure the surround (Figure 8.3).
15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Run unit for 15 minutes. Remove battery negative cable, recheck belt
tension and then reconnect negative battery cable.
8.6.3 Condenser Fan

To remove and reinstall the condenser fan, refer to Figure 8.19.
2. Remove the upper frame support and upper fan shroud.
3. Remove the three Fan/Clutch Bolts that secure the condenser fan to the clutch rotor and remove from unit.
4. Slide new fan in place and secure with three bolts. Torque 18 to 22 ft/lbs (24.4 to 29.8 Nm).
5. Reinstall shroud. Torque all shroud bolts 36 to 70 inch/ lbs (4.1 to 6.8 Nm). Reinstall upper frame support,
torque bolts 96 to 120 inch/lbs (10.8 to 13.6 Nm).
6. Reinstall the negative battery cable, start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
8.6.4 Clutch
To remove and reinstall the clutch, refer to Figure 8.19.
2. Remove the upper belt and condenser fan. Refer to Section 8.6.2 and 8.6.3.
NOTE
When working with the clutch it is important to note that the armature retaining bolt and rotor retaining
nut are both left hand thread. Turn clockwise to remove.
3. Place the three pins of a spanner wrench (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00396-01) into the holes on
the face of the armature. Place the tool handle between the fanshaft frame support and pod (10 o’clock posi-
tion) to prevent rotation, then loosen and remove the armature retaining bolts and washers. Ensure the key
is not lost during disassembly. If required, a standard 5/8-11 X 1 inch long right hand thread bolt can be
threaded through the center to jack the armature off the shaft.
4. Using a spanner socket (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00303-02) remove the rotor retaining nut, rotor
and rotor spacer.
5. Disconnect the coil connector and remove the coil. Note assembly sequence of shims on fanshaft housing
for re-assembly.
6. Procure kits (clutch, coil or mounting) for reassembly as required.
7. Place shims onto the fanshaft. Slide coil in place with harness on the bottom, at the 6 o’clock position.
8. Using new spacer, install rotor and spacer onto fanshaft. Thread rotor retaining nut onto fanshaft and, using
spanner socket, tighten 80 to 85 ft/lbs (108 to 115 Nm).
8–25 62-11637
9. Ensuring key is properly positioned. If force is required to install key, support the shaft while tapping key into
groove. Install armature onto fanshaft. With spanner wrench in position, thread new armature bolt and
washer into fanshaft and tighten 25 to 30 ft/lbs (33.9 to 40.7 Nm).
10. Using air gap measuring tool (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00432-00) check gap. (Refer to Technical
Instruction 98-50180 for air gap tool usage instructions.) The gap should be between 0.015 and 0.095 inch
(0.38 and 2.3 mm).
11. If the gap is less than 0.015, remove enough shims to increase the gap to approximately 0.020 inch (0.25
mm). Shims (Carrier Transicold part number 50-00232-30) are 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) each. If the gap is
more than 0.090 inch add enough shims to reduce the gap to approximately 0.020 inch.
12. Reinstall the condenser fan and upper belt. Refer to Section 8.6.2 and 8.6.3.
8.6.5 Evaporator Fan

To remove and reinstall the evaporator fan refer to Figure 8.19.
2. Remove the bulkhead and air chute (if equipped) and then remove the evaporator back panel.
3. Mark insertion depth on supply air sensor (SAT) to aid in reassembly and remove from the nozzle cover.
Care should be taken to prevent cutting wires on the evaporator coil.
4. Remove the bushing bolts from the split taper bushing, insert them into the threaded holes and tighten
evenly to push fan away from the bushing. Ensure key is not lost during disassembly.
5. To reinstall the evaporator fan, ensure key is properly positioned. If force is required to install key, support
the shaft while tapping key into groove. Slide the fan onto the fanshaft, and install the bushing with screws
finger tight.
6. Position so that fan just touches pod. This will set approximate gap between fan and pod as bushing is tight-
ened. Tighten bolts evenly and then torque 11 to 14 ft/lbs (14.4 to 19.0 Nm).
7. Reinstall nozzle cover. Ensure there is even clearance between evaporator fan and pod and between evap-
orator fan and nozzle cover (approximately 1/4 inch both sides). Nozzle cover center venturi lip should over-
lap into evaporator fan inside diameter slightly. Torque bolts to 66 to 80 inch/lbs (7.5 to 9.0 NM).
8. Reinstall supply air temperature sensor and air chute/ bulkhead as required.
8.6.6 Fanshaft
To remove and reinstall the fanshaft refer to Figure 8.19.
2. Remove the upper belt, condenser fan, clutch and evaporator fan. Refer to Section 8.6.2 through 8.6.5.
3. Remove the seal ring clamp, compression ring and carefully peel seal ring from pod (use a putty knife if
required).
4. Remove vent hose and 1/8 inch barbed fitting from fanshaft front hub. Install a plug to prevent oil from spill-
ing out during removal.
62-11637 8–26
5. Remove the four fanshaft bolts and washers securing the fanshaft in place and remove shaft.
6. Check oil level in fanshaft. With the vent connection at the top, oil is to be at the level of the oil level plug
located in the housing. Add oil as required. Apply thread sealer and re-install level plug in vent to prevent oil
from spilling out during installation. Refer to Section 2.10 for fanshaft oil specification and capacity.
7. To aid in fanshaft alignment, install two 3/8 -16 x 1-1/2 inch studs (bolts with heads cut off) in place of the
fanshaft mounting bolts. Reinstall with the vent opening at the top and secure with two bolts and washers.
Remove studs and install remaining two bolts and washers. Torque bolts 21 to 23 ft/lbs (28.5 to 31.2 Nm).
8. Apply thread sealer and re-install 1/8 inch barbed fitting and vent hose in front hub. Torque to 120 inch/lbs
(13.6 Nm)
9. Reinstall and reseal seal ring, compression ring and clamp. Torque compression ring/seal ring bolts 45 to 50
inch/lbs (5.1 to 5.7 Nm). Suggested torque for the clamp is 38 inch/lbs (4.3 Nm), maximum torque is 50 inch/
lbs (5.7 Nm).
10. Reinstall the upper belt, condenser fan, clutch and evaporator fan. Refer to Section 8.6.2 through 8.6.5.
8.6.7 Gearbox
To remove and reinstall the gearbox (right angle drive) refer to Figure 8.19.
2. Remove the lower and upper belts. Refer to Section 8.6.1 and 8.6.2.
3. Note location of sheaves. The input sheave is the larger diameter, while the fan drive sheave is the smaller.
To remove a sheave, remove the two bolts from the split taper bushing, insert them into the threaded holes
and tighten evenly to push sheave away from the bushing. Ensure the key is not lost during disassembly.
4. Remove vent hose and 1/8 inch barbed fitting from gearbox. Install a plug to prevent oil from spilling out
during removal.
5. Remove gearbox and drive mounting plate and then remove mounting plate if required.
6. Check oil level in gearbox. With the vent connection at the top, oil is to be at the level of the oil level plug
located in the side of the housing. Add oil as required, apply thread sealer and re-install level plug. Reinstall
plug in vent to prevent oil from spilling out during installation. Refer to Section 2.10 for gearbox oil specifica-
tion and capacity.
7. Re-install by reversing preceding steps. Torque mounting plate to gearbox bolts 16 to 18 ft/lbs (21.7 to 24.4
Nm), mounting plate to frame bolts 30 to 32 ft/lbs (40.7 to 43.4 Nm), bushing bolts 10 to 11 ft/lbs (13.6 to
14.9 Nm), and fitting 22 to 31 ft/lbs (29.8 to 42 Nm).
8–27 62-11637
8.7 Refrigerant System Service
Service of refrigerant system equipment, refrigerant charge, leak checking and evacuation.
Figure 8.22 Typical Refrigerant System Service Equipment
13
14 12 1. Vacuum Pump
11 2. Vacuum Indicator
15 10 3. Refrigerant Cylinder
4. Refrigerant Recovery Unit
5. Valve
6. Manifold Gauge Set
9 7. Suction Service Valve
8. Heat Exchanger
16 9. Evaporator
10. Evaporator Expansion Valve
8 11. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)
7 12. Subcooler
17 6 13. Condenser
5
14. Receiver
4 15. Liquid Line Service Valve
3 16. Discharge Service Valve
1 17. Compressor
Figure 8.23 Four Port Manifold Gauge Option
62-11637 8–28
8.7.1 Refrigerant System Service Connections
To service the refrigerant system, service equipment is connected at the compressor discharge service valve, com-
pressor suction service valve and/or the liquid line service valve.
When connecting to a valve, backseat the valve (turn counterclockwise) to close off gauge connection and attach service
line to the valve. Open valve 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise) and then purge the service line. See Figure 8.22 for an example
of a typical connection setup. See Figure 8.23 for 4-Port Manifold Gauge option.
NOTE
To avoid damage to the Earth’s ozone layer, use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing
refrigerant from a refrigeration system. When working with refrigerants you must comply with all local
government environmental laws, U.S.A. EPA section 608.
8.7.2 Servicing the Refrigerant Charge

Servicing of the refrigerant charge includes: checking the charge level, checking for noncondensibles, removing
the charge, pumping down the low side, pumping down the compressor, adjusting the charge level and adding a
complete charge. Procedures for charge service are provided in the following sub paragraphs.
8.7.2.1 Checking Charge Level

Check the refrigerant charge before adding any refrigerant to the system. Only add refrigerant if charge is low. If
charge is low, leak checking must be performed (see Section 8.7.3) and all leaks repaired before adding refriger-
ant.
1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of discharge pressure. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Figure 8.23.
2. Start unit in Continuous Operation. Adjust setpoint so that unit is running in high speed, fully loaded and oper-
ating in cooling. Run approximately ten minutes - until the refrigeration system is warmed up and the refriger-
ated compartment temperature is approaching setpoint.
3. Partially block off air flow to condenser coil so discharge pressure rises to 230 psig (15.7 bar).
4. Check the receiver sight glasses to determine charge. The system is correctly charged when the lower sight
glass is not empty and the upper sight glass is not full.
5. If the system appears to be overcharged or under charged, adjust charge. Refer to following step f.
8.7.2.2 Checking For Noncondensibles

1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of suction and discharge pressure. Refer to Figure 8.22 or
Figure 8.23.
2. Stabilize the system to equalize pressure between the suction and discharge side of the system. The refrig-
erant system needs to be off for several hours.
3. Measure temperature at the copper tubing leaving the condenser (not the sub-cooler).
4. Record compressor discharge pressure.
5. Determine saturation pressure as it corresponds to the condenser temperature using the temperature pres-
sure chart (Table 8–5).
6. If gauge reading is not close to the calculated saturation pressure in step 5, noncondensibles or mixed
refrigerants are present.
7. Remove refrigerant. Refer to step c., Removing Charge.
8. Leak check, evacuate and recharge the system.
8–29 62-11637
8.7.2.3 Removing Charge R-404A
1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of suction and discharge pressure. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Figure
8.23.
! WARNING
Only a refrigerant cylinder containing R404A should be connected to this refrigeration unit in
order to pressurize the system. However, dry nitrogen may be used to increase pressure. Any
other gas or vapor will contaminate the system and require additional removal and evacuation.
2. Place the unit in Service Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.5). Ensure that the operator message panel displays
“RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” during the refrigerant removal procedures. If the control system
switches to charge mode during the process, switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”.
3. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean refrigerant recovery cylinder as shown in Figure 8.22 or
Figure 8.23 and remove any remaining refrigerant from the system.
4. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the refrigerant recovery unit.
5. After making necessary repairs, leak check, evacuate and recharge the system.
8.7.2.4 Removing Charge R-452A
! WARNING
R-452A refrigerant is an A1 non-flammable refrigerant blend which includes some mildly
flammable constituents. As such, please follow all proper service and maintenance
procedures.Ensure that proper evacuation procedure is strictly followed before performing
any “hot work,” including, but not limited to brazing or welding, on these units to prevent flare-
up of residual refrigerant.
• Refrigerant must be reclaimed until manifold gauge set indicates -20 inHG (-0.67bar/ -9,82 Psia) of vac-
uum.
• Before performing any service work, make sure the Start-Stop switch is off.
• When repairing a leak on the refrigeration circuit, ensure the minimum pressure is reached per the recov-
ery machine and ensure a nitrogen purge procedure is used during the unbrazing operation.
• In the event of brazing on the low side, store the refrigerant in the receiver and follow the reclaim proce-
dure on the low side of the system.
62-11637 8–30
Figure 8.24 Four Port Manifold Gauge Option
8.7.2.5 Unit Connection
Figure 8.25 Unit Connection
8–31 62-11637
1. Connect the manifold gauge set to the unit (refer to Figure 8.25)
• Hose A to low-pressure compressor service valve
• Hose B to vacuum pump
• Hose C to high-pressure compressor service valve
• Hose D to high-pressure receiver king valve
2. Start the vacuum pump.
3. Open the manifold gauge valves (1,2,3,4).
4. Open the hose B service valve and wait for one minute.
5. Check the manifold gauge values. Readings must be at the lowest and most stable.
6. Close hose B service valve.
7. Stop the vacuum pump.
8. Disconnect the vacuum pump.

The manifold gauge (I) is installed
Before continuing with the next steps:

• Ensure the manifold installation procedure is completed correctly.
• Ensure all unit valves are opened
• Ensure there are no refrigerant traps
• Place the unit in service mode ((Refer to Section 5.2.5)
• Ensure the microprocessor display reads: “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”
62-11637 8–32
8.7.2.6 Recovery System Installation
Figure 8.26 Recovery System
1. Connect recovery machine to hose (B).
2. Place the R-452A recovery bottle onto the scale and note the weight.
3. Check the admissible charge indicated in the R-452A recovery bottle information.
4. Connect the liquid valve (E) of the R-452A recovery bottle to the recovery machine.
5. Adjust high- and low-pressure compressor service valves to the mid-seat position.
6. Adjust receiver king valve (liquid line service valve) to the mid-seat position.
7. Open hoses A,B,C,D service valves.

The system is ready for recovery.
8.7.2.7 R-452A Liquid Recovery
1. Open liquid valve (E) and start the recovery machine.
2. Open hose B service valve.
3. Open the manifold gauge valve (2,3). The R-452A liquid will be transferred from the unit receiver to the R-
452A recovery bottle.
4. Check weight on the scale. The R-452A recovery bottle weight must be stable.
6. Stop the recovery machine.Close liquid valve (E).

The R-452A liquid is recovered
1. Disconnect the R-452A recovery bottle from the recovery machine.
2. Connect the vapor valve (F) of the R-452A recovery bottle to the recovery machine.
The system is ready for vapor recovery
8–33 62-11637
8.7.2.8 R-452A Vapor Recovery
1. Open vapor valve (F).
2. Start the recovery machine.
3. Open hose B service valve.
4. Open the manifold gauge valve (1,4)

The R-452A vapor will be transferred from the compressor to the R-452A recovery bottle.
5. Check the pressure values indicated on the two manifold gauges.
• Wait until the dials from the two manifold gauges indicate -0,67 bar (-20 inHg)
• In order to prevent flare-up or residual refrigerant, do not move to the next step before reaching -0,67 bar
(-20 inHg). This specific effect must be taken into consideration especially in cases of working in heights
where there may be a fall risk.
The R-452A is recovered
7. Close the two manifold gauge service valves.
8. Stop the recovery machine.
9. Wait for 15 minutes.

• If after 15 minutes the pressure has risen, repeat the recovery procedure starting with step 1.
• If -0,67 bar (-20 inHg) is maintained, proceed to step 10.
10. Disconnect the recovery machine and dispose of the R-452A recovery bottle according to local regulation.
End of recovery procedure
Purge with Nitrogen.
For more information about nitrogen instruction, refer to Carrier Transicold document #98-60068-00 (Brazing
Instructions).
8.7.2.9 Pumping Down The Low Side
Components on the low side of the refrigeration system (filter drier, EVXV, evaporator coil, CSMV, heat exchanger,
suction line etc.) may be serviced or replaced without having to completely remove the refrigerant charge from the
system by pumping down the low side and temporarily storing the refrigerant in the condenser and receiver.
1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of suction and discharge pressure. Refer to Figure 8.22.
2. Start the unit.
3. Frontseat the liquid line service valve.
4. Shutdown the unit when suction pressure drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar). There should be very little refrigerant
remaining in the low side of the system at this point.
5. Monitor the gauges. Suction pressure should not rise rapidly. If suction pressure continues to rise, the liquid
line service valve or bypass check valve may not be closing properly. In this case, the low side cannot be
pumped down and the entire refrigerant charge must be removed from the system. (Refer to preceding step
c.)
6. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position and dis-
abling the starter.
7. Frontseat (close by turning clockwise) the discharge service valve and the refrigerant will be trapped
between the compressor discharge service valve and the liquid line service valve.
62-11637 8–34
8. Before opening up any part of the low side of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on
the pressure gauge. If the pressure is below 0 psig/ bar slowly open the liquid line service valve slightly and
then frontseat the valve again. Repeat as necessary in order to raise the pressure above zero.
9. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean refrigerant recovery cylinder to the suction and discharge
service valves and remove any remaining refrigerant from the low side. DO NOT bring the low side pressure
below 0 psig/bar.
10. After making necessary repairs, leak check and evacuate the low side of the refrigeration system. Refer to
Section 8.7.3 and 8.7.4.
8.7.2.10 Pumping Down the Compressor

The compressor or any of the components attached to it (unloaders, high pressure switch, discharge and suction
pressure transducers, discharge temperature sensor, compressor heads and oil, etc.) may be serviced or replaced
by pumping the compressor down, and isolating the compressor from the rest of the system.
1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of suction and discharge pressure. Refer to Figure 8.22 or
Figure 8.23.
2. If the compressor is operational, start the unit and slowly frontseat the suction service valve. shutdown
the unit when the suction pressure drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar). Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position and disabling the starter. Frontseat the discharge
service valve to isolate compressor. There should be very little refrigerant remaining in the compressor at
this point.
3. If the compressor is not operational, Ensure the unit will not start automatically by placing the START/
RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position and disabling the starter. Frontseat both the discharge and suction ser-
vice valve to isolate the compressor.
4. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean refrigerant recovery cylinder to the suction and discharge
service valves and remove any remaining refrigerant from the compressor. DO NOT bring the compressor
pressure below 0 psig/bar.
5. After making necessary repairs, leak check and evacuate the compressor. Refer to Section 8.7.3 and 8.7.4.
8.7.2.11 Adjusting the Charge Level

Adjustment of the charge level may be required when there has been a leak or the system was not correctly
charged during a previous service.
1. Check charge level by performing the procedures of the preceding step a.
2. If charge removal is required: connect a clean evacuated refrigerant recovery cylinder to the liquid line
service valve. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Midseat liquid line service valve and monitor the liquid refriger-
ant flow into the cylinder. If the unit is operating, close the cylinder valve and backseat the liquid line service
valve when the ball in the upper sight glass drops to the bottom of the glass. It the unit is not operating,
when approximately 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) have been removed close the cylinder valve and backseat the liquid line
service valve. Proceed to step 7.
3. If charge is to be added: place refrigerant cylinder on a scale and connect a charging line and gauge from
cylinder to liquid line service valve. Start unit in Continuous Operation with a setpoint lower than refrigerated
compartment temperature. Wait until unit switches to high speed operation. Run approximately ten minutes.
4. Note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
5. Frontseat the liquid line service valve (turn clockwise) and watch the pressure on the manifold gauge. When
the pressure falls below the pressure in the refrigerant cylinder [or to 50 psig (3.4 bar)], open the cylinder
valve and monitor the liquid refrigerant to flow into the unit.
6. When approximately 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) have been added, close the cylinder valve, and backseat the liquid line
service valve.
7. Recheck for the correct refrigerant charge. (Refer to preceding step a.) Repeat preceding steps as required.
When charge level adjustment is complete, remove refrigerant service equipment.
8–35 62-11637
8.7.2.12 Adding a Complete Charge
1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. Refer to Section 8.7.4.

2. Determine charge required for this unit (refer to the model/serial number nameplate or Table 2–1) and pro-
cure a refrigerant cylinder with sufficient weight of refrigerant. Place cylinder on a scale and connect the
charging line from cylinder to the liquid line service valve.
3. Note weight of the refrigerant cylinder.
4. Open the liquid valve on the cylinder. Midseat the liquid line service valve and allow liquid refrigerant to flow
into the unit until the correct weight of refrigerant has been added.
NOTE
It is possible that all the required liquid may not be pulled into the receiver, as outlined in step 4. In this
case, add the additional refrigerant in accordance with the charge adjustment procedures, refer to pre-
ceding step f.
5. When the scale indicates that the correct charge has been added, close the liquid valve on the cylinder and
backseat the liquid line service valve. Remove charging hose.
8.7.3 Leak Checking
! WARNING
The condition that the system may be in when leak checking is required include; when the system is charged,
when the system is without charge, when the low side has been pumped down and when only the compressor is to
be leak checked. Procedures for each condition are provided in the following subsections.
8.7.3.1 Leak Checking a Charged System
NOTE
Service Mode is not required for this procedure.
2. Verify that the suspected leak area (high or low side) has sufficient pressure (minimum 20 psig = 1.4 bar) to
detect the leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required. The smaller the leak, the greater the pres-
sure required.
3. The recommended procedure for finding leaks from a system is with an electronic leak detector. Checking
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a general
area has been located.
4. Some leaks may be repaired by simply tightening a connection. Others may require removal of the charge,
refer to Section 8.7.2.
62-11637 8–36
8.7.3.2 Leak Checking a System Without Charge
The refrigeration system must be leak checked once it is closed and all repairs complete.
2. Connect refrigerant system equipment if not already connected. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Figure 8.23.
! WARNING
Only a refrigerant cylinder containing R-404A or R-452A should be connected to this
NOTICE
Do not vapor charge R-404A or R-452A. Only liquid charging through the liquid line service
valve is acceptable.
3. Ensure that the operator message panel displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” during the pressur-
izing and leak checking procedures. Refer to Section 5.2.5. If the control system switches to Charge Mode
during the process, switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”.
4. Pressurize the system 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar) with refrigerant at the liquid line service valve.
! WARNING
explosion may occur. Refer to Figure 8.43.
5. Connect a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Use the dry nitrogen to increase the pressure as necessary 20 to 150
psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required. The smaller the
leak, the greater pressure is required.
7. Once leak checking is complete, remove the refrigerant/nitrogen vapor out of the system.
8. If no leaks are found the system is ready for evacuation, skip to Step 11.
9. If any leaks are found they must be repaired before proceeding.
10. Repeat steps 4 - 9 as necessary.
11. Evacuate the system after all leaks are repaired. Refer to Section 8.7.4.
8–37 62-11637
8.7.3.3 Leak Checking with Low Side Pumped Down
The low side of the system must be leak checked once it is closed and all repairs complete.
! WARNING
2. Connect refrigerant system equipment if not already connected. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Figure 8.23.
NOTICE
Do not vapor charge R404A or R452A. Only liquid charging through the liquid line service valve
is acceptable.
3. Ensure that the operator message panel displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” during the pressur-
izing and leak checking procedures. Refer to Section 5.2.5. If the control system switches to Charge Mode
4. Pressurize the low side of the system 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar) with refrigerant from the high side by turn-
ing the liquid line service valve off frontseat for a few seconds and then returning to frontseat.
! WARNING
5. Connect a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Use the nitrogen to increase the low side pressure 20 to 150 psig (1.4 to
10.2 bar) to detect the leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required. The smaller the leak, the
greater the pressure required.
7. Once leak checking is complete, remove the refrigerant/nitrogen vapor from the low side of the system.
8. If no leaks are found the low side of the system is ready for evacuation. (Skip to Step 11)
10. Repeat steps 4 - 9 as necessary.
11. Disconnect the nitrogen cylinder. Evacuate the low side of the system after all leaks are repaired. Refer to
Section 8.7.4.
62-11637 8–38
8.7.3.4 Leak Checking Compressor
The compressor and its associated switches, transducers, etc. must be leak checked once the compressor is
closed and all repairs complete.
2. Connect refrigerant system service equipment to the suction and discharge service valves, if not already
connected. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Figure 8.23.
! WARNING
NOTICE
Do not vapor charge R-404Aor R-452A. Only liquid charging through the liquid line service
valve is acceptable.
3. Pressurize the compressor 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar) by opening the suction service valve for a few sec-
onds, then closing (frontseating) it again.
! WARNING
4. Connect a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Use the nitrogen to increase the compressor pressure 20 to 150 psig (1.4
to 10.2 bar) to detect the leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required. The smaller the leak, the
greater pressure required
5. The recommended procedure for finding leaks from a compressor is with an electronic leak detector. Check-
ing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a gen-
eral area has been located.
6. Once leak checking is complete, remove the refrigerant/nitrogen vapor from the compressor.
7. If no leaks are found the compressor is ready for evacuation. (Skip to Step 10)
9. Repeat steps 4 through 9 as necessary.
10. Disconnect the nitrogen cylinder. Evacuate the compressor after all leaks are repaired. Refer to Section
8.7.4.
8–39 62-11637
8.7.4 Evacuation and Dehydration
Moisture is detrimental to refrigerant systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have many
undesirable effects such as copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freeze-up” of the expansion valve, and forma-
tion of acids, resulting in metal corrosion. Proper evacuation of the system will remove any moisture from inside the
system.
NOTES
• Essential tools to properly evacuate any system include a good vacuum pump (5 cfm/8mH) volume
displacement (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00176-11) and a good vacuum indicator such as a
thermocouple vacuum gauge (micrometer). (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00414-00)
• The use of a compound gauge is not recommended for use in determining when the evacuation process is
completed because of its inherent inaccuracy.
• Standard service hoses are not recommended for evacuation purposes. Evacuation hoses are recom-
mended for this procedure.
8.7.4.1 Evacuation of the Complete System

1. Evacuate only after leak check. Refer to Section 8.7.3.
2. If possible keep the temperature of the major components (condenser, evaporator, compressor and
receiver) above 60°F (15.6°C) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the temperature is lower than 60°F
(15.6°C), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat lamps, heat guns or alternate sources of
heat may be used to raise system temperature.
3. The recommended method to evacuate the system is to connect three evacuation hoses with vacuum pump
and vacuum indicator. Refer toFigure 8.22 or Figure 8.23.
4. Ensure that the operator message panel displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” during the evacua-
tion and dehydration procedures. Refer to Section 5.2.5. If the control system switches to Charge Mode
5. Backseat (turn counter-clockwise) the liquid line service valve, suction service and discharge service valve.
6. With the unit service valves closed (back seated) and the vacuum pump and vacuum indicator valves open,
start the pump and draw a deep vacuum. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. This opera-
tion is to test the evacuation setup for leaks. Repair if necessary.
7. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves. Ensure that the operator message panel displays
“RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”.
NOTE
The service valve caps help minimize leakage through valve stems during midseat operation.
8. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the vacuum indicator indicates 2000 microns. Close the vacuum
pump valve and shut off the pump. Wait a few minutes to ensure the vacuum holds.
9. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen through the discharge service valve. Raise system pressure to approxi-
mately 2 psig (0.1 bar). Ensure that the control system does not switch to the Charge Mode. If this occurs,
switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/ EVAC MODE” Refer to Section 5.2.5.
10. Purge nitrogen from system at the suction service valve.
11. Open the vacuum pump valve and start the pump. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the vacuum pump
valve and shut off the pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds below 2000 microns.
12. If vacuum holds below 2000 microns continue to step 14. If vacuum rises above 2000 microns continue to
step 13.
13. Repeat steps 8 through 11 until the vacuum stays below 2000 microns.
14. Once the system holds a good vacuum, it is ready to be charged with refrigerant. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
62-11637 8–40
8.7.4.2 Evacuation of the Low Side
1. Evacuate only after a low side leak check. Refer to Section 8.7.3
2. If possible, keep the temperature of the major components (condenser, evaporator, compressor and
receiver) above 60°F (15.6°C) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the temperature is lower than 60°F
(15.6°C), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat lamps, heat guns or alternate sources of
heat may be used to raise system temperature.
3. The recommended method to evacuate the system is to connect three evacuation hoses with vacuum pump
and vacuum indicator. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Figure 8.23.
4. Ensure that the operator message panel displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” during the evacua-
tion and dehydration procedures. Refer to Section 5.2.5. If the control system switches to Charge Mode
5. Leave the liquid line service valve and the discharge service valve frontseated and then midseat the suction
service valve.
6. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the
vacuum pump valve and shut off the pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds.
7. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen through the liquid line service valve. Raise system pressure to approxi-
mately 2 psig (0.1 bar). Ensure that the control system does not switch to the Charge Mode. If this occurs,
switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE.” Refer to Section 5.2.5.
8. Purge nitrogen from the low side of the system at the suction service valve.
9. Open the vacuum pump valve and start the pump. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the vacuum pump
valve and shut off the pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds below 2000 microns.
10. If vacuum holds below 2000 microns continue to step 12. If vacuum rises above 2000 microns continue to
step 11.
11. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until the vacuum stays below 2000 microns.
12. Once the system holds a good vacuum, open the compressor discharge service valve and the liquid line
service valve.
13. Re-enable the starter, start unit and check the refrigerant charge. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
8–41 62-11637
8.7.4.3 Evacuation of the Compressor
1. Evacuate only after a compressor leak check. Refer to Section 8.7.3.
3. If possible keep the temperature of the compressor above 60°F (15.6°C) to speed evaporation of moisture.
If the temperature is lower than 60°F (15.6°C), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps, heat guns or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise compressor temperature.
4. Connect evacuation equipment to the compressor suction and discharge service valves. Refer to Figure
8.22 or Figure 8.23.
5. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate compressor to 500 microns. Close the vacuum pump valve and shut off
the pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds. This checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
6. Once the compressor holds a good vacuum, open the compressor suction and discharge service valve to
allow refrigerant to enter the compressor.
7. Re-enable the starter, start unit and check the refrigerant charge. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
8.8 compressor and Unloader Service
8.8.1 Repair or Replacement Determination

Certain operating conditions or refrigeration system components may be misdiagnosed and subsequently lead to the
determination that the compressor requires replacement. These conditions or components should be checked prior to
replacing a compressor and after a replacement compressor is installed to prevent replacement compressor damage.
To determine if compressor replacement or repair is required, do the following:
1. If the compressor is operational, check the refrigerant charge. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
2. If the compressor is operational, check operation of the unloaders. Refer to Section 8.8.5.5.
3. If the compressor is operational, check the system components as follows:
a. Install gauges to allow reading of receiver, suction and discharge pressure. Refer to Figure 8.22 or Fig-
ure 8.23.
b. Start the unit in cooling so that compressor operates.
c. Frontseat liquid line service valve, shutdown unit when suction pressure drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar).
d. Monitor the gauges. If receiver pressure drops rapidly and the suction and discharge pressures rise rap-
idly the liquid line service valve or bypass check valve require replacement before the compressor can be
further tested.
e. Backseat the liquid line service valve and restart the unit. Slowly frontseat the suction service valve.
Shutdown the unit when suction pressure drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar).
f. Monitor the gauges. If suction and discharge pressures do not equalize rapidly, the compressor is not at
fault.
4. Check condition of and repair cylinder heads and valve plates. Refer to Section 8.8.3.
62-11637 8–42
8.8.2 Removal and Replacement of Compressor
1. Pumpdown the compressor or remove charge. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
3. Remove any interfering equipment attached to the end flange. Refer to Figure 8.27.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew service valve mounting cap screws all the way before breaking seal.
4. Loosen the suction and discharge service valve mounting bolts. Tap the valve bodies to break the seal and
then remove bolts.
5. Disconnect all low voltage connectors (UL1, UL2, CDT, CDP and HPS).
6. Loosen lower belt idler and remove belt from gearbox. Belt may be removed and reinstalled with the com-
pressor.
7. Block up the engine and remove compressor shockmount bolts.
8. Remove the 12 end flange bolts and lock washers. Attach a sling or other device to compressor (refer to
Section 2.9 for weight of compressor). Slide compressor sufficient to disengage compressor drive gear
from nylon drive gear. Remove compressor.
9. Inspect nylon drive gear for wear or sharp edges. Replace if required.
10. Remove oil from compressor for shipping. Test for acidity. If acid is present a system cleanup may be neces-
sary.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew replacement compressor lifting eyelet/blankoff plate mounting cap screws all
the way before breaking seal. Entrapped pressure could result in injury.
11. Loosen the suction and discharge lifting eyelet/ blankoff plate mounting bolts. Tap the center of the blankoff
plates to break the seal and then remove bolts, plates and gaskets.
12. If required add oil to the replacement compressor. Add only 5.0 pints (2.4 liters) of oil when first adding oil to
the compressor. This procedure is designed to compensate for excess oil that may have migrated with
refrigerant to other parts of the system during unit operation.
13. Exchange all external compressor components including the unloader coils, discharge and suction strain-
ers, switches, transducers, temperature sensors, fittings and compressor drive gear.
14. Install blankoff plates and plugs in original compressor for shipment.
15. Remove any remaining old gasket material from the discharge and suction service valve sealing surfaces.
16. Ensure belt is in end plate opening and around drive gear. Ensure correct alignment of compressor drive
gear and nylon gear as compressor is installed in unit. Use new lock nuts when replacing compressor
shockmounts. Refer to Figure 8.27 for mounting bolt torque information.
17. Reconnect all wiring per wiring schematic.
18. Clean or replace strainers as required and, using new gaskets, install service valves. Torque discharge ser-
vice valve mounting bolts 20 to 30 ft lbs (27 to 40.7 Nm). Torque suction service valve mounting bolts 55 to
80 ft lbs (74 to 108 Nm).
8–43 62-11637
Figure 8.27 Compressor
4
7 Torque 26 to 30 ft/lbs
(35.3 to 40.7 Nm)
6
8 9
Torque 30 ft/lbs (40.7 Nm) then, bend

10 locking tabs against flat of bolt head
11
12 Torque 26 to 30 ft/lbs (35.3 to 40.7 Nm)
13 Torque 90 to 120 ft/lbs (122 to 163 Nm)
1. Compressor
2. Discharge Service Valve and Strainer/Flange
3. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT)
4. Unloader Coils (UL1 and UL2)
5. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (CDP) and High Pressure Switch (HPS)
6. Lower Belt
7. End Flange Bolt and Lock Washer
8. End Flange
9. Nylon Drive Gear
10. Compressor Drive Gear, Key, Special Washer and Bolt.
11. Suction Service Valve and Strainer/Flange
12. Oil Fill Port
13. Shockmount (Location)
-----
19. Reinstall and tension lower belt. Refer to Section 8.6.1.
20. Reinstall all components and clamps removed from end plate, battery and battery connection(s).
21. Leak check, evacuate and dehydrate, and charge system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2, 8.7.3 and
8.7.4.
62-11637 8–44
8.8.3 Cylinder Head and Valve Plate Service
1. Pumpdown the compressor. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew cylinder head mounting cap screws all the way before breaking seal.
3. Loosen cylinder head cap screws. Tap the head lightly with a wooden or lead mallet to break the seal and
relieve any remaining pressure. Be careful not to drop the head or damage the gasket sealing surface.
Remove cylinder head cap screws and gasket. Refer to Figure 8.28
Figure 8.28 Cylinder Head and Valve Plate
12 11 9 8 4 3 2
10 6 1
7
5
4
5 6
Typical Arrangement - Center Head Shown
7
10 8
11 12
1. Cap screw 7. Discharge Valve

2. Cylinder Head 8. Valve Plate
3. Cylinder Head Gasket 9. Valve Plate Gasket
4. Capscrew 10. Suction Valve
5. Lockwasher 11. Suction Valve Spring
6. Discharge Valve Backer 12. Dowel Pin
-----
4. If removing the center head, remove the discharge valve mounting hardware.
5. If required, free the valve plates from the cylinder deck by using the discharge valve cap screws, without
washers, as jack screws through the outermost tapped holes in the valve plate after the valve stops and
valves have been removed. Remove the valve plate gasket.
6. Inspect the parts of the cylinder head and/or the valve plate:
a. Inspect cylinder head gaskets for proper alignment and center web blow-out.
b. Inspect the discharge valves for loose or damaged valve stops, or any debris that may affect the proper
operation of the valves.
c. Inspect for broken, cracked, or chipped discharge valves.
d. Inspect the side valve plate discharge check valves to ensure the pistons move and contact the plates.
e. Inspect for broken, cracked, or chipped suction valves.
f. Inspect the valve plate and the cylinder head for cracks.
g. Inspect valve plate gaskets for damage and wear.
h. Remove any oil on top of the pistons. Inspect the top of the pistons for damage. Check for debris, burned
and carbonized oil sludge, or mechanical failure.
8–45 62-11637
i. Inspect cylinder bores for excessive wear. Excessive wear for cylinder bores is defined as heavy and
uneven scratches, gouges, or chipping of the internal wall of the cylinder, with a depth greater than 0.025
inch, which are caused by foreign objects, other than a normal reciprocating movement of the pistons and
piston rings. If cylinder(s) are damaged, compressor replacement is required.
7. Discard valves and gaskets. Use only new valves and gaskets when assembling cylinder head and valve
plate assemblies.
8. If required, install the discharge valves and discharge valve stops with cap screws and lock washers onto
the valve plates. Torque cap screws to 12 to 16 ft/ lbs (16.3 to 21.7 Nm).
9. Turn the valve plate over.
10. Install the suction valve spring on the dowel pins with the spring ends bearing away from the cylinder head.
Refer to Figure 8.28.
11. Place suction valve on dowel pins.
12. Place the valve plate and new valve plate gasket (with flat side toward cylinder deck) on cylinder deck,
ensuring that the valve plate is properly positioned on the four dowel pins.
13. Using a small screwdriver, operate the suction valves to ensure that the valve tips are not being held by the
valve plate gasket. Refer to Figure 8.29.
Figure 8.29 Check Suction Valve
14. Install cap screws, cylinder head and new cylinder head gasket (with flat side toward valve plate), ensuring
that the gasket and cylinder head are properly positioned on the valve plate. Torque the cap screws, in a
diagonal pattern, 42 to 55 ft/lbs (57 to 74 Nm).
8.7.4.
8.8.4 Oil Pump and Bearing Head
1. Pumpdown the compressor. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
abling the starter.
3. Loosen the eight cap screws, tap the pump to relieve any remaining pressure and then remove the oil pump
bearing head assembly, gasket and thrust washer. Refer to Figure 8.30.
4. If it is determined that the oil pump is not operating properly, the entire oil pump and bearing head assembly
must be replaced. Replacement parts for the pump are not available except for the cover plate O-ring. How-
ever, in the event the pump requires inspection or cleaning, refer to Figure 8.31 for disassembly and reas-
sembly. Clean all parts; coat all moving parts with compressor oil before proceeding with reassembly.
62-11637 8–46
Figure 8.30 Oil Pump and Bearing Head Assembly Figure 8.31 Oil Pump
11 12
1
6
5
4
3
1 2 10
9
8
7
3
1. Cap screws
2 4 2. Cover
3. Eccentric Ring
4. Rotor
5. Idler
1. Oil Pump and Bearing Head 6. Shaft (Drive)
2. Thrust Washer 7. O-Ring
3. Oil Pickup Tube 8. Oil Pump and Bearing
4. Oil Inlet Port 9. Dowel Pin
----- 10. Relief Valve Assembly
11. Pins (2)
12. Thrust Washer
NOTICE
Ensure that thrust washer does not fall off dowel pins while installing oil pump.
5. Install the pump end thrust washer on the two dowel pins located on the bearing head. Refer to Figure 8.30.
6. Install the bearing head assembly with a new gasket on the compressor crankshaft. Carefully push oil pump
on by hand ensuring that the thrust washer remains on the dowel pins, the tang on the end of the drive
engages the slot in the crankshaft, and the oil inlet port on the pump is aligned with the oil pickup tube in the
crankcase. The oil pump should mount flush with the crankcase with the word “TOP” stamp on the pump ori-
ented straight up.
7. Align the gasket and the eight cap screws in the mounting flange. Torque cap screws, in a diagonal pattern,
30 to 50 ft/lbs (40.7 to 67.8 Nm).
8.7.4.
8–47 62-11637
8.8.5 Compressor Oil Level
8.8.5.1 Checking Compressor Oil Level
NOTICE
An overcharge of oil will reduce system capacity and possibly cause internal compressor
damage.
For this reason, Carrier Transicold re-manufactured compressors now contain a reduced oil charge to compensate
for oil remaining in the system. A level slightly below the minimum mark is acceptable until the oil level can be
checked using the following procedure:
1. Operate the unit in high speed, fully loaded cool for at least 15 minutes. Unplug wires to the unloaders if
necessary to ensure six cylinder operation.
NOTE
Check the oil sight glass on the compressor to ensure that no foaming of the oil is present after 15
minutes of operation. If the oil is foaming check the refrigerant system for flood-back of liquid refriger-
ant. Correct this situation before performing step 2.
2. After 15 minutes, initiate a defrost cycle. This will allow any residual oil to be returned to the compressor.
NOTE
Operate the unit in defrost for only 3-5 minutes. Do not allow the unit to terminate defrost automat-
ically. The sudden reduction of crankcase pressure at defrost termination could cause a temporary
increase in oil circulation and gave a false oil level reading.
3. After 3-5 minutes of defrost operation, turn the Figure 8.32 Oil Level in Sight Glass
unit off and wait 5-15 seconds. Observe the
compressor oil level in the sight glass (Figure
8.32). Oil level should be between the Minimum - Maximum
and Maximum marks.
- Minimum
62-11637 8–48
Adding Oil with Compressor in System
! CAUTION
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Polyol Ester Oil (POE). Buy quantities of one gallon or
less. When using this hygroscopic oil, immediately reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or
contamination will occur.
Two methods for adding oil are the Oil Pump Method and Closed System Method.
8.8.5.2 Oil Pump Method

One compressor oil pump that may be purchased is a Robinair, part number 14388. This oil pump adapts to a one
U.S. gallon (3.785 liters) metal refrigeration oil container and pumps 2-1/2 ounces (0.0725 liters) per stroke when
connected to the oil fill (Figure 8.27). There is no need to remove pump from can after each use.
When the compressor is in operation, the pump check valve prevents the loss of refrigerant, while allowing the
technician to develop sufficient pressure to overcome the operating suction pressure to add oil as necessary.
Backseat suction service valve and connect oil charging hose to oil fill. Purge the oil hose at oil pump. Add oil as
necessary.
8.8.5.3 Closed System Method
NOTICE
Extreme care must be taken to ensure the hose is immersed in the oil at all times. Otherwise air
and moisture will be drawn into the compressor.
In an emergency where an oil pump is not available, oil may be drawn into the compressor through the suction ser-
vice valve.
1. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section 8.7.2.With both manifold gauge set valves frontseated, leave
the suction connection connected to the compressor suction service valve port and connect the common
connection to a vacuum pump. Remove the discharge hose from the manifold gauge set; connect to the
compressor oil fill port (Figure 8.27) and immerse the other end in a container of refrigeration oil. Start the
vacuum pump throttle the manifold gauge set suction valve and pull a vacuum on the compressor while
watching the oil level in the glass. Fill to minimum mark on crankcase. Shutdown pump and remove oil fill
line from the oil fill port.
2. Break any remaining vacuum (raise to 0 psig/bar) with refrigerant remaining in the system (crack open the
suction service valve), or from a fresh cylinder of refrigerant. Evacuate the compressor crankcase to 500
microns. Remove service equipment, backseat suction and discharge service valves and recheck oil level.
8.8.5.4 Removing Oil From The Compressor
1. Check compressor oil level, refer to preceding step a. If the oil level is above the maximum mark on the
crankcase, oil must be removed from the compressor.
2. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
abling the starter.
4. Loosen the oil drain plug (Figure 8.27, item 10) and allow oil to seep out and bring the level to 1/8 glass.
Tighten the plug securely back into the compressor.
5. Leak check the oil drain plug. Refer to Section 8.7.3. Start compressor and recheck oil level.
8–49 62-11637
8.8.5.5 Unloaders
Unloader Checkout Procedure
1. Install a manifold gauge set on the compressor suction and discharge service valves and start unit in cooling
with compartment temperature at least 5°F (2.8°C) above setpoint. The compressor will be fully loaded
(both unloader coils de-energized). Note suction pressure.
2. Unplug both unloader coils.
3. Using a 12 VDC source, energize the front unloader (UL1). Note discharge and suction pressures. A rise of
approximately 3 psig (0.2 bar) will be noted on the suction pressure gauge. Discharge pressure should drop
approximately 5 to 15 psig (0.4 to 1.0 bar).
4. De-energize UL1 and note pressures. Suction pressure should drop and discharge pressure should rise by
same amount as in step 3 above.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the rear unloader (UL2). At the end of the test, reconnect both unloaders.
NOTE
If pressures do not change as indicated, check the unloader coil resistance (refer to Section 2.11).
Replace if coil is open or shorted. If either unloader coil energizes and the suction and discharge pres-
sures do not change, the unloader assembly must be checked.
8.8.5.6 Unloader Coil Replacement
NOTE
The coil may be removed while the compressor is under pressure.
1. Disconnect leads and lift coil (see Figure 8.33) off enclosing tube.
2. Verify replacement coil is the correct type, voltage and frequency.
3. Place new coil over enclosing tube. With wiring facing in the desired direction, ensure roll pin is fitted in one
of the detents in the bottom of the coil mounting. Coil is to snap into place with bottom in contact with the
enclosing tube nut. Connect wiring.
4. Check operation, refer to preceding step a.
Figure 8.33 Unloader Coil 1. Coil Assembly

2. Pin, Roll
1
3. Enclosing Tube Nut
13
4. Enclosing Tube
2
5. Bolts, Valve Body (3)
3
6. Washers (3)
12
4 7. Piston
11
5 8. Gasket
10
6 9. Valve Body
9 10. “O” Ring
11. Plunger
7 12. Plunger Spring
8
13. Installation/Removal Tool
62-11637 8–50
8.8.5.7 Replacing Unloader Valve Internal Parts
abling the starter.
3. Disconnect and remove coil.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew enclosing tube nut all the way before breaking seal. Entrapped pressure could
result in injury.
4. Loosen the enclosing tube nut (see Figure 8.33) using installation/removal tool supplied with repair kit. Ensure
tube is loose and seal is broken then remove tool, enclosing tube nut, enclosing tube, plunger with plunger
spring and o-ring.
5. Check plunger for restriction due to: (a) corroded or worn parts; (b) foreign material lodged in valve; (c) bent
or dented enclosing tube.
6. Install new parts. Do not over tighten enclosing tube assembly. Torque to 100 inch/lbs (11.3 Nm).
7. Remove tool and install coil, refer to preceding step b.
8.7.4.
8.8.5.8 Unloader Valve Replacement

2. Disconnect and remove coil.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew unloader valve body mounting bolts all the way before breaking seal.
3. Loosen the valve body mounting bolts. Tap the valve body to break the seal and then remove bolts and gas-
ket.
4. Remove small screen from inside the compressor head and ensure it is not obstructed. Clean or replace as
required.
5. Place a new gasket onto the replacement unloader valve body (with flat side toward the head) and, using
unloader ring pliers, (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00223-00) compress the unloader ring while insert-
ing the unloader into the compressor head.
6. One valve body mounting hole is offset to assist in correctly aligning the valve body and gasket. Insert
mounting bolts, align with gasket holes and mounting holes in head. Start bolts by hand and then toque
mounting bolts 12 to16 ft-lbs (1.3 to 1.8 Nm).
8.7.4.
8–51 62-11637
8.9 Refrigerant System Service
8.9.1 Evaporator Coil

The use of recycled cardboard cartons is increasing across the country. The recycled cardboard cartons create
much more fiber dust during transport than “new” cartons. The fiber dust and particles are drawn into the evapora-
tor where they lodge between the coil fins. If the coil is not cleaned on a regular basis, sometimes as often as after
each trip, the accumulation can be great enough to restrict air flow, cause coil icing, repetitive defrosts and loss of
unit capacity.
• Due to the “washing” action of normal defrost the • Clean the evaporator coil on a regular basis, not
fiber dust and particles may not be visible on the only to remove cardboard dust, but to remove
face of the coil but may accumulate deep within. any grease or oil film which sometimes coats the
fins and prevents water from draining into the
• After being wetted and dried several times, card-
drain pan.
board fiber particles can be very hard to remove.
Therefore, several washings may be necessary.
2. Remove rubber check valves (Kazoo) from drain lines of the evaporator to be cleaned.
3. Spray coil with a mild detergent solution such as Oakite 164 or 202) or any good commercial grade auto-
matic dish washer detergent such as Electrosol or Cascade and let the solution stand for a few minutes and
reverse flush (opposite normal air flow) with clean water at mild pressure. A garden hose with spray nozzle
is usually sufficient. Make sure drain lines are clean.
4. Re-install check valves.
5. Re-enable the starter and run unit until Defrost Mode can be initiated to check for proper draining from drain
pan.
8.9.2 Condenser Coil
8.9.2.1 Cleaning
NOTE
Only clean water should be used to wash the condenser. Do not use detergents to clean.
Remove all foreign material from the coil by reversing the normal air flow. (Air is pulled in through the front and dis-
charges over the engine.) Compressed air or water may be used as a cleaning agent. Take care so that the fins
aren’t bent during this procedure.
8.9.2.2 Condenser Replacement
NOTE
If the condenser coil (Figure 8.34) requires replacement, the entire condenser/radiator assembly must
be removed from the unit and disassembled/reassembled on the bench.
1. Remove the refrigerant charge. Refer to Section 8.7.2.

3. Drain coolant into a suitable container by removing coolant bottle cap and then the engine drain plug. Refer
to Figure 8.15.
4. Remove the surround with the grille attached. Refer to Section 8.4.3.
5. Remove remaining hoses from radiator connections.
! CAUTION
Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of inert gas brazing procedures is mandatory for all Car-
rier Transicold refrigeration units; otherwise compressor failure will occur. For more informa-
tion Refer to Technical Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert Gas Brazing.
62-11637 8–52
6. Unbraze refrigerant lines from condenser coil.
7. Disconnect the hail and bug screen sufficient to reach the ambient air temperature sensor (Figure 8.34) and
wiring. Remove sensor and wiring from front condenser frame.
8. Remove the condenser/radiator assembly mounting bolts securing the condenser/radiator assembly to the
unit.
9. Remove the condenser/radiator assembly from the unit.
10. Remove eight rear condenser frame mounting bolts securing the rear condenser frame to the front con-
denser frame and set rear frame aside.
11. Separate the radiator from the condenser/radiator assembly by removing the top radiator mounting brackets
and removing grommets in the bottom brackets. Set radiator aside.
12. Remove condenser coil by removing the condenser coil mounting brackets.
13. Reassemble condenser/radiator assembly in reverse order using new coil and new gaskets as required.
Torque all condenser/radiator bracket and frame mounting bolts 36 to 60 inch/lbs (4.1 to 6.8 Nm).
! CAUTION
Do not bend the copper tubing on the condenser coil when installing the new condenser. Bend
the unit tubing if tubes do not align correctly.
14. Reassemble condenser/radiator assembly into unit using new gaskets as required. Note the three upper
and lower curb side mounting holes are slotted for ease of alignment. Torque condenser/radiator assembly
mounting bolts 95 to 119 inch/lbs (10.7 to 13.4 Nm). Braze condenser coil refrigerant connections.
8.7.4.
16. Refill engine coolant. Refer to Section 8.5.14.
8–53 62-11637
Figure 8.34 Condenser/Radiator Assembly
2
3
11 4
5 6 7
5
9
10
1. Condenser/Radiator Assembly 7. Condenser Coil Mounting Brackets

2. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (ATT) 8. Radiator
3. Front Condenser Frame 9. Rear Condenser Frame
4. Gasket (Typical) 10. Rear Condenser Frame Mounting Bolts
5. Radiator Mounting Brackets 11. Condenser/Radiator Assembly Mounting
6. Condenser Coil Bolts
8.9.3 Filter Drier
8.9.3.1 Check Filter Drier

The unit must be running in cool for this test. Check for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feeling the liquid line
inlet and outlet connections of the drier cartridge. if the outlet side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the filter
drier should be replaced.
8.9.3.2 Replace Filter Drier

1. Pump down the low side. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
2. Remove bracket, loosen the inlet connection to relieve any remaining pressure then remove drier.
3. Procure new O-rings. Lubricate the O-rings, back side of sleeves and coupling nuts. Using a backup wrench
at each connection torque 30 to 38 ft/lbs (40.7 to 51.5 Nm).
8.7.4.
62-11637 8–54
8.9.4 Replacing Receiver Sight Glass Or Fusible Plug
2. Loosen the sight glass or fusible plug to relieve any remaining pressure. Remove and discard glass or plug.
3. Using new o-ring, install component. Torque the sight glass to 15 to 25 ft/lbs (20.3 to 33.9 Nm). Torque the
fusible plug to 48 to 96 inch/lbs (5.4 to 10.8 Nm).
8.7.4.
8.9.5 Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1)
Figure 8.35 Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1)
Lock Nut
Spacer Cup
Nameplate
Coil
Spacer
Enclosing Tube
Locknut
Enclosing Tube
Plunger
Gasket
Closing Spring
Seat Disc
Body
8–55 62-11637
8.9.5.1 Checkout Procedure
To obtain proper heating and defrost, the normally open SV1 must energize and close tightly during the heat and
defrost cycles. If the valve does not close tightly due to physical damage, foreign material or wear, refrigerant leak-
age through the valve can reduce heating capacity.
• During normal heat or defrost cycles the following conditions will be observed when the valve is oper-
ating properly:
1. Receiver refrigerant level will drop quickly at the initiation of heating or defrost.
2. Suction pressure will rise slowly to 90-100 PSIG (6.12 to 6.80 Bar).
3. Discharge pressure will drop quickly, but will begin to rise to a minimum of 250 PSIG (17.0 Bars) within 15 to
20 minutes.
• If suction and discharge pressures remain low and the receiver level does not drop, the valve may be
inoperative and can be checked by the following method.
1. Verify the solenoid coil has proper voltage and is energized in heating and defrosting.
2. Connect a discharge pressure gauge at the discharge service valve and connect a gauge to the liquid line
service valve.
3. With the refrigerated compartment temperature at 35°F (1.7°C) or lower, operate the unit in high speed cool
and disconnect the coil.
4. With a separate 12 VDC source, energize the coil with the unit in high speed cooling and observe the dis-
charge and receiver pressures. If the valve is closing properly, compressor discharge pressure will begin to
rise and the receiver pressure will remain the same or begin to drop slowly. If the valve is not seating prop-
erly, both discharge and receiver pressure will rise slowly or remain the same.
5. Operate the unit until discharge pressure reaches 200 PSIG (13.61 Bars) and disconnect the coil. Discharge
and receiver pressure should be within 5 to 15PSIG (0.34 to 1.02 Bars) of each other.
8.9.5.2 Replacing The Coil
NOTE
The coil may be replaced without removing the refrigerant or pumping the unit down.
2. Remove top lock nut, spacer cup and nameplate (Figure 8.35).
3. Disconnect wiring and remove coil. Ensure spacer is in place.
4. Replace coil by reversing the preceding steps. Torque coil lock nut 46 to 50 inch/lbs (5.2 to 5.7 Nm).
8.9.5.3 Replacing Internal Components
! CAUTION
or evacuating.

3. Remove top lock nut, spacer cup, nameplate, coil and spacer (see Figure 8.35).
4. Using a 12 point, 1-3/8 inch box wrench, loosen the enclosing tube locknut and bleed off any remaining
pressure.
5. Remove enclosing tube lock nut, enclosing tube with plunger, gasket, and closing spring.
62-11637 8–56
6. Remove seat disc from inside of body and check for obstructions and foreign material.
7. Procure kits (rebuild kit or metal gasket kit) for reassembly as required.
8. Place the seat disc into the valve body with the smaller diameter end facing up.
9. Install the closing spring, gasket, enclosing tube with plunger and the enclosing tube lock nut. Torque
enclosing tube locknut 30 to 40 ft-lb (40.7 to 54.2 Nm). If valve body has been replaced, torque mounting
screws 30 to 34 inch/lbs (3.4 to 3.9 Nm).
10. Install coil, refer to preceding step b.
8.7.4.
8.9.6 Liquid Line (SV2) / Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid Valves
Figure 8.36 SV-2 and SV-4
Retainer
Coil
Enclosing
Tube
Plunger
Spring
Plunger
Gasket
Piston
Body
8.9.6.1 Replacing the Coil
NOTE
The coil may be replaced without removing the refrigerant or pumping the unit down.
2. Remove the retainer (see Figure 8.36).
3. Disconnect wiring and remove coil.
4. Replace coil by reversing the preceding steps.
8–57 62-11637
8.9.6.2 Replacing Internal Components
! CAUTION
or evacuating.
1. To service the liquid line solenoid valve SV2, pump the unit down. (Refer to Section 8.7.2). To service the
hot gas solenoid valve SV4, remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to Section 8.7.2.)
3. Remove the retainer (Figure 8.36) disconnect wiring and remove coil.
4. Loosen the enclosing tube and bleed off any remaining pressure.
5. Remove enclosing tube, plunger spring, plunger and gasket.
6. Remove piston from inside of body and check for obstructions and foreign material.
7. Procure kits (rebuild kit or gasket kit) for reassembly as required. Gasket kit may contain more than one type
gasket, replace with same color gasket as originally installed in valve.
8. Place the piston into the valve body.
9. Install piston, gasket, plunger, plunger spring and enclosing tube. Torque enclosing tube 19 to 23 ft-lb (25.4
to 31.1 Nm).
10. Install coil and retainer.
8.7.4.
8.9.7 Stepper Test Harness

A stepper test harness (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00515) is available for testing the compressor suction
modulation valve (CSMV) and evaporator expansion valve (EVXV).
The test harness is installed by disconnecting the 2SVM connector at the SVM module and plugging the C1
connector (Figure 8.37) into the module and C2 connector into the unit harness. With the test harness in place, the
A1/A2 test harness connectors may be used to perform EVXV testing while the B1/B2 connectors may be used to
perform CSMV testing.
62-11637 8–58
Figure 8.37 Stepper Test Harness
A2
A1 A2
B1 B2
C2
C1
B2
8.9.8 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)

The purpose of the CSMV (Figure 8.38) is to maintain the compressor within its operating envelope and maximize
unit capacity and fuel economy.
If it is suspected that the CSMV is malfunctioning, the most efficient method of diagnosing the valve is to run a
Pretrip (refer to Section 3.6). The Pretrip steps will check the remainder of the system and the CSMV specific test
will check the valve. During the CSMV specific test the valve will be brought to a preset position, the unit started
and then the valve will be opened while the APX Control System monitors suction pressure.
If there is a problem with the valve internal motor/piston assembly or wiring to the valve, the test will fail.
Figure 8.38 Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)
Body Screws
From Coil To Compressor

[
8.9.8.1 Diagnostics - Control System or Wiring
1. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position and disconnect the starter motor wire at the weather
tight connector.
2. Disconnect the CSMV connector. The Stepper Test Harness can also be used, refer to Section 8.9.7
3. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/ RUN position, When the MessageCenter displays “SMV
CLOSING”, measure the AC voltage on the harness side of the connector between pins A and B and then
between C and D. A consistent voltage (10 to 16 VAC) should be read by the digital voltmeter for each pair
of wires. If the reading is present on all of the wire pairs there is a good signal coming from the SVM.
4. If the reading is not present on one or more of the wire pairs, check the wiring between the SVM and the
CSMV connector, or check the APX Control System for proper model number configuration.
8–59 62-11637
8.9.8.2 Diagnostics - Stepper Motor (CSMV)
The valve stepper motor may be tested using a stepper motor drive tester or ohmmeter.
1. To test with a stepper motor drive tester (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00375-00), connect the 4-pin
test cable supplied with the tester to the valve connector, refer to Figure 8.39, and the cable wires to the
tester in accordance with wire and terminal color.
2. Set the step rate to 150 steps per second and either open or close the valve. Each red LED should light
sequentially until all four are illuminated. Any LED failing to illuminate indicates an open on that leg and a
need to replace the piston and drive motor assembly.
3. To test with an ohmmeter, check the winding Figure 8.39 CSMV Coil
resistance between connector pin A and B and
then between C and D (Figure 8.39). In normal 1
A (BLACK) (WHITE) B
ambient, the resistance between the pins should
be 72 to 84 ohms. Also check each terminal to
the coil casing (ground). If an out of tolerance or
zero reading is observed, the piston and drive
motor assembly is to be replaced. D (GREEN) (RED) C
2
8.9.8.3 Diagnostics Valve
NOTE
If the valve failed pretest and passed the preceding diagnostic testing, this is an indication that the
valve mechanism is damaged and the internal motor/piston assembly is to be replaced.
1. To test the valve internal mechanism, install a manifold gauge set on the suction service valve and a stepper
motor drive tester.
2. Start the unit, set the step rate to 150 steps per second and close the valve while watching the suction pres-
sure. Within one minute the suction pressure should begin to fall. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the
OFF position before the reading enters a vacuum.
3. If the suction pressure does not change, this is an indication the valve is stuck and the internal motor/piston
assembly is to be replaced.
8.9.8.4 Replacing Internal Motor/Piston Assembly

2. Remove internal motor/piston assembly and replace with a new assembly and gasket. The motor/piston
assembly is set to 100% open when received from the warehouse. This is to ensure the Teflon valve seal is
not damaged when it is installed. Ensure the valve is fully open by using the stepper motor tester to manu-
ally open the valve to 100% before installation. Torque the body screws 80 to 97 inch/lbs (9 to 11 Nm).
8.7.4.
8.9.8.5 Emergency Repair Procedures

In the event that the CSMV system has a failure, and replacement components are not readily available in an
emergency, a LIMP-HOME procedure can be done as follows:
1. Install a manifold gauge set.
3. Remove the internal motor/piston assembly.
4. Loosen the Allen screw and remove the piston and screw.
5. Install the motor/piston assembly (without the piston). Torque the nut 35 to 40 ft/lb (47.5 to 54.2 Nm) or body
screws 80 to 97 inch/lbs (9 to 11 Nm) as applicable.
8.7.4.
7. Start the unit.
62-11637 8–60
8. Adjust the suction service valve so that the approximate temperature is maintained. For perishable loads, it
is recommended that the adjustment be made so that the available capacity is slightly larger than the load,
the unit will cycle OFF and ON.
9. Once repair parts become available, repair as required.
8.9.9 Evaporator Expansion Valve

The evaporator expansion valve (EVXV) (Figure 8.40) is a SVM driven device which meters the flow of refrigerant
into the coil. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires any maintenance.
The flow control provides:
• Response to match the evaporator load
• Prevention of liquid refrigerant return to the compressor.
NOTE
As a preliminary check, ensure the EVXV coil is snapped down fully, and the internal coil retention tab
is properly seated in one of the valve body dimples.
Figure 8.40 Evaporator Expansion Valve

Coil
Boot
A B
Coil
D E
C
Electronic
Expansion Five Pin
Valve Connector
FLOW
DIRECTION
Strainer
8–61 62-11637
8.9.9.1 Diagnostics - SVM or Wiring
At startup, the APX Control System moves the EVXV to a known position. During this time (about 6 seconds after
the PER is energized) the voltage being sent to the valve (from the SVM) can be measured.
The stepper test harness (Section 8.9.7) should be used to test the EVXV. If a test harness is not available, volt-
ages can be measured directly at the harness connector, however, voltage readings at the harness will be lower
(about half) as compared to using the test harness.
1. Disconnect the 2SVM connector and locate the Table 8–2 EVXV Connections
wires on the engine harness side labeled EXVA,
EXVB, EXVC, EXVD and EXVE. These will Connector Pin Wire Color Winding
correlate to the connector pins labeled A, B, C, A ORANGE A
D and E. Refer to Table 8–2.
B RED B
2. Set the voltmeter to the ACV scale. Place the
START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position C YELLOW A
and disconnect the starter motor wire at the D BLACK B
weather tight connector. Place the START/RUN-
OFF switch back in the START/RUN position. E GREY COM (+12V)
3. Perform the following test on the wiring coming from the SVM: Place the positive (+) voltmeter lead on pin E,
the negative (-) voltmeter lead on pin A and observe the meter for several seconds. The voltage reading will
be approximately 5 to 9 VAC depending on valve position.
4. Leave the positive (+) voltmeter lead on pin E and repeat for pins B, C and D. This procedure may have to
be repeated several times to ensure consistent readings due to the 6 second "home" time.
5. If there is no voltage reading, or if the voltage never rises to the 5 to 9 VAC level, it indicates a problem in the
wiring or the SVM. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position and reconnect the starter wire.
Test all wiring from the EVXV connector to the SVM and verify good continuity before replacing the SVM.
8.9.9.2 Diagnostics - Stepper Motor (EVXV)
The valve stepper motor may be tested using a stepper motor drive tester or ohmmeter.
1. To test with a stepper motor drive tester (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00375-00SV), connect the 5-pin
test cable to the valve connector (Figure 8.41) and the cable wires to the tester in accordance with wire and
terminal color. (if a 5-pin tester cable is required, order Carrier Transicold part number 07-00375-11.)
2. Set the step rate to 50 steps per second and either open or close the valve. Each red LED should light
sequentially until all four are illuminated. Any LED failing to illuminate indicates an open on that leg and a
need to replace the drive.
3. To test with an ohmmeter, check the winding resistance between connector pin A and E, B and E, C and E
and then between D and E. In normal ambient, the resistance between the pins should be 46 ohms. If an
infinite or zero reading is observed, the piston and drive motor assembly is to be replaced.
Figure 8.41 EVXV Connector
PIN A (ORANGE) PIN B (RED)
A B
COMMON
(+12VDC)
A B
PIN C (YELLOW) PIN D (BLACK)
PIN E (GRAY)
62-11637 8–62
8.9.9.3 Diagnostics - Valve
If the valve failed Pretrip and passed the preceding diagnostic testing, this is an indication that the valve internal
mechanism is damaged and the piston and motor assembly is to be replaced.
1. To test the valve internal mechanism, install a manifold gauge set on the suction service valve and a stepper
motor drive tester. Refer to Section 8.7.1.
2. Start the unit, set the step rate to 150 steps per second (refer to the preceding step b.) and close the valve
while watching the suction pressure. Within one minute the suction pressure should begin to fall.
3. If the suction pressure does not change, this is an indication the valve is stuck and the piston and drive
motor assembly is to be replaced.
8.9.9.4 Replacing Expansion Valve and Screen
1. Pump down the low side. (Refer to Section 8.7.2).
2. Remove coil and unbraze valve. Clean all tube stubs so new valve fits on easily.
3. Use a wet rag to keep the replacement valve cool and braze in place.
4. Leak check and evacuate the low side. Refer to Section 8.7.3 and 8.7.4.
8.9.10 Replacing Check Valve

A check valve allows flow in one direction only. Refer to Figure 8.42 Check Valves
Figure 8.42.
Discharge Check Valve
The function of the discharge check valve is to prevent
liquid refrigerant from migrating back the compressor
during the unit off cycle. Refer to Figure 2.10
NOTE
The function of the hot gas bypass check
valve is to raise the receiver pressure (when
the ambient temperature is low) so that
refrigerant can flow from the receiver to the
evaporator when the unit is in heating or
defrost. Refer to Figure 2.11.These check Hot Gas Check Valve
valves are not serviceable, and must be
removed and replaced as an assembly.
8–63 62-11637
NOTICE
2. Using a pipe cutter, cut the valve stub-outs and unbraze the remaining stub-out from the connecting copper.
3. Clean tube stubs so new valve fits easily. Position new valve.
4. Wrap valve with wet rags to keep cool when brazing.
5. Braze valve in place and cool connections with wet rag.
8.7.4.
8.9.11 High Pressure Switch

Figure 8.43 High Pressure Switch Testing
8.9.11.1 Checking High Pressure Switch
Cylinder Valve Pressure Gauge

! WARNING and Gauge 0 to 500 PSIG
(0 to 27.2 bar)
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is Pressure Bleed-Off
approximately 2350 PSIG (160 bar). Do Regulator Valve
not use oxygen in or near a refrigerant
system as an explosion may occur. Refer
to Figure 8.43. Nitrogen
Cylinder Switch
1. Remove switch as outlined in preceding section.
2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across

switch terminals. Ohmmeter will indicate resis-
tance and continuity light will be illuminated if
switch closed after relieving pressure.
3. Connect switch to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Refer to Figure 8.43.
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator higher than open setting for switch being tested. For pressure switch set-
tings, refer to Section 2.10.
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve and increase pressure until the switch opens. If light is used,
light will go out and if an ohmmeter is used, the meter will indicate open. Close cylinder valve. Slowly open
bleed-off valve (to decrease pressure) until switch closes (light will illuminate or ohmmeter will indicate open).
8.9.11.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch
2. Disconnect wiring from switch, and remove switch.
3. Install switch after verifying switch settings. (Refer to following step b.)
8.7.4.
62-11637 8–64
8.9.12 Pressure Transducers
The compressor discharge pressure transducer (CDP) has a range of 0 to 500 PSIG (0 to 34.0 bar) while the com-
pressor suction pressure transducer (CSP) and evaporator outlet pressure transducer (EVOP) have a range of -
14.7 to 100 PSIG (-1 to 6.8 bar). When comparing the transducer reading in Unit Data to the reading on a manifold
gauge, keep in mind the following:
• The compressor discharge pressure reading in Unit Data will never read less than 0 bar/psig, even if it is
exposed to a vacuum (such as when evacuating the system).
• If the compressor discharge pressure transducer has lost power or the signal is not returning to the module
the reading in Unit Data will default to 305 to 315 psig (20.75 to 21.43 bar). Comparisons in this pressure
range are not conclusive.
• The compressor suction pressure and evaporator pressure transducers will never read higher than 100 psig,
even if actual pressure is higher.
• If the compressor suction pressure or evaporator pressure transducer has lost power or the signal is not
returning to the module the reading in Unit Data will default to 55 to 60 psig (3.74 to 4.08 bar). Comparisons
in this pressure range are not conclusive.
8.9.12.1 Test transducer wiring:
1. Verify that the wiring to the transducer is correct.
NOTE
CDP connector is identified with a red tape band. The CSP connector is identified with a blue band.
2. If required, power the transducer circuit by placing the unit in PC Mode, refer to Section 5.3.2. Check volt-
age to transducer connector. Voltage reading between connector position 2 (positive) and position 1 (nega-
tive) should be 5.0 VDC.
3. To check the signal wiring, check continuity between the transducer connector position 3 and the following
connector: CDP = 2MM-10, CSP = 2MM-9, EVOP = 2MM-17
4. If voltage and signal wire are good, replace the transducer. The transducer may be removed by disconnect-
ing the connector and quickly backing it off the Schrader valve fitting. Torque replacement transducer 13 to
15 ft/lb (17.6 to 20.3 Nm).
8.9.13 Defrost Air Switch
Figure 8.44 Defrost Air Switch Test Setup
5
6 3
4
1
1. Ohmmeter or Continuity Device

2. Adjustment Screw (0.050” socket head size)
3. Low Side Connection
4. Pressure Line or Aspirator Bulb (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00177-01)
5. Magnehelic Gauge (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00177-00)
6. High Side Connection
NOTE
If the DTT temperature is above 40°F (4.4°C) defrost cannot be initiated and the Message- Center will
display “CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE”.
8–65 62-11637
1. Check air switch tubing. Red tube is to be connected to the high connection and routed below the coil. Clear
tube is to be connected to the low connection and routed above coil. Check condition and mounting of air
sensing fittings on coil end of both tubes. Refer to Figure 2.3
2. To check the defrost air switch, run unit in cooling and jumper across the air switch terminals. This will start
the defrost cycle as it simulates the action of the defrost air switch. Bypassing the switch in this manner
operates all components involved in defrost.
3. Unit should remain in defrost until the DTT and SAT both reach 55°F (12.8°C). At this point the defrost cycle
will terminate and the unit will resume automatic operation.
4. If the above test indicates satisfactory operation, test DAS settings using a Magnehelic gauge (Carrier Tran-
sicold part number 07-00177) or similar instrument as follows.
5. Ensure magnehelic gauge is in proper calibration.
NOTE
The magnehelic gauge may be used in any position, but must be re-zeroed if position of gauge is
changed from vertical to horizontal or vice versa. USE ONLY IN POSITION FOR WHICH IT IS
ZEROED.
6. With air switch in vertical position, connect high pressure side of magnehelic gauge, a tee and aspirator to
high side connection of air switch. Tee is to be placed approximately half-way between gauge and air switch
or an improper reading may result. Refer to Figure 8.44.
7. Attach an ohmmeter to the air switch electrical contacts to check switch action.
NOTE
Use a hand aspirator (Carrier Transicold part number 07-00177-01), since blowing into tube by mouth
may cause an incorrect reading.
8. With the gauge reading at zero, apply air pressure very slowly to the air switch. An ohmmeter will indicate
continuity when switch actuates. The switch contacts should close and the ohmmeter needle move rapidly
to 0. Any hesitation in the ohmmeter indicates a possible problem with the switch, and it should be replaced.
9. Refer to Section 2.10 for switch setting. If switch fails to actuate at correct gauge reading, adjust switch by
turning adjusting screw clockwise to increase setting or counterclockwise to decrease setting.
10. Repeat checkout procedure until switch actuates at correct gauge reading.
11. After switch is adjusted, place a small amount of paint or fingernail polish on the adjusting screw so that
vibration will not change switch setting.
8.9.14 Electrical System Components

Procedures for servicing or maintaining the electrical system components are provided in the following sub-para-
graphs.
8.9.15 Main Microprocessor Module (MM)

For complete Main Microprocessor Module replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
62-11637 8–66
8.9.16 Power Control Module (PCM) Figure 8.45 Power Control Module
1
position and removing the negative battery
cable.
2. Open PCM door. Loosen and remove stud-post

terminal nuts (brass) at terminals BAT+. Refer to
2
Figure 8.45, BAT–, ALT+ and EPH.
3. Remove nuts holding plastic bushings and leave

hanging on wire. 3
4. Lift the 4 cable terminals up and off stud-posts.
Remove loose nuts, slide plastic bushings and
cables/terminals out of mounting hole in box.
5. Unlock tab on 35-pin connector and remove

connector.
4
6. Remove the four mounting fasteners securing
the PCM to unit frame; remove module from unit
7. Follow steps above in reverse order to install 8

7 6 5
new PCM. Use the following torque values: 4
• Mounting fasteners 38 to 58 inch/lbs
(4.3 to 6.6 Nm). 1. Mounting Fasteners
• M6 terminal nuts (EPH and BAT+) to 30 to 40 2. 35-pin Connector
inch/lbs (3.4 to 4.5 Nm). 3. Engine Preheat Terminal (EPH)
4. Plastic Bushings
• M8 terminal nuts (ALT+ and BAT-) to 60 to 80
5. Alternator Positive Terminal (ALT +)
inch/lbs (6.8 to 9.0 Nm).
6. Battery Negative Terminal (BAT-)
7. Battery Positive Terminal (BAT +)
8. Door Mounted Legend Sticker
8. A component legend sticker is to be located inside the PCM door. Install the correct sticker (packaged with
the replacement PCM) for this unit inside the replacement PCM. The replacement PCM is populated at the
factory with the standard fuses and relays. Additional fuses and relays may be required for this application
(see Figure 2.7) transfer the required fuses and relays from the original PCM to the replacement PCM as
required.
9. Make sure the latest software has been loaded to ensure all modules are compatible. Refer to Section 5.3.4
NOTICE
8–67 62-11637
8.9.17 Stepper Valve Module (SVM)
2. Unlock the tabs and remove the 35-pin connector and 8-pin connector from the front of the module.
3. Replace module. Tighten mounting hardware to 96 inch/lbs (10.8 Nm).
4. Reinstall connectors ensuring tabs are fully locked in place.
5. Make sure the latest software has been loaded to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to Section 5.3.4
NOTICE
8.9.18 Display Module (DM)
2. Unlock the tabs and then remove the 14-pin connector from the back of the module.
3. Remove hardware at rear of module. Replace module. Tighten mounting hardware to 84 to 120 inch/lbs (9.5
to 13.6 Nm).
4. Reinstall connector ensuring tabs are fully locked in place.
5. Make sure the latest software has been loaded to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to Section 5.3.4.
NOTICE
8.9.19 Alternator
! CAUTION
Reverse polarity will destroy the rectifier diodes in alternator. As a precautionary measure, dis-
connect the negative and then the positive battery terminal when charging battery in unit.
8.9.19.1 Inspection
2. Verify condition and tightness of connections. Refer to Figure 8.46. Torque B+ terminal 62 to 80 inch/lbs (7
to 9 Nm) and B- terminal 38 to 52 inch/lbs (4.3 to 5.9 Nm). Check condition of belt,. Refer to Figure 8.16
62-11637 8–68
8.9.19.2 Brush Replacement
2. Remove screws holding the regulator/brush assembly.
3. Install new regulator/brush assembly. Torque mounting screws 35 to 40 inch/lbs (4 to 4.5 Nm).
Figure 8.46 Alternator
1
4
/
'
%‐
%
1. Positive Output Terminal (B+)

2. L (D+) Terminal
3. Ground Terminal (B-)
4. Regulator/Brush Assembly
8.9.19.3 Alternator Replacement
In the event the alternator is replaced, install the pulley on the alternator shaft with the “shoulder” side toward the
alternator. Torque left hand thread pulley nut 50 to 60 ft/lbs (68 to 88 Nm) while holding shaft using a six point Torx
T50 wrench. For instruction on tightening alternator mounting hardware and checking belt, refer to Section 8.5.15.
8–69 62-11637
8.9.20 Light Bar
The light bar may be tested using a 12 VDC source. To Figure 8.47 Light Bar Connections
test the light bar:
placing the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF Light Bar Side Control Box
position and removing the negative battery Side
cable. H A A H
2. Connect the ground (-) from the power source to

pin G on the light bar side of the connector.
G B B G
3. The green LED’s will illuminate when the 12 F C F
VDC side (+) of the power source is connected

to pin B. E D D E
4. With the connection as in the preceding steps (+

on pin B, and - on pin G), the amber LED’s will
illuminate when the power (+) from the power
source is also connected to pin H.
5. Reinstall the negative battery cable, start unit
and run Pretrip to check operation.
8.9.21 Sensor Checkout

An accurate ohmmeter must be used to check resistance values shown in Table 8–3 or Table 8–4.
Due to variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers or other test equipment, a reading within 2% of
the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is bad, the resistance reading will usually be much higher
or lower than the resistance values given in the tables.
Two preferred methods of determining the actual test temperature at the sensor, is an ice bath at 32°F (0°C) or a
calibrated temperature tester.
62-11637 8–70
Table 8–3 Sensor Resistance-22
Sensors AAT, RAT, SAT, ENCT, DTT, CST, EVOT, REMSN 1, 2
°C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms

-40 -40 336,500 18 -7.8 49,060 76 24.4 10,250 134 56.7 2,809
-38 -38.9 312,600 20 -6.7 46,230 78 25.6 9,760 136 57.8 2,697
-36 -37.8 290,600 22 -5.6 43,580 80 26.7 9,299 138 58.9 2,590
-34 -36.7 270,300 24 -4.4 41,100 82 27.8 8,862 140 60.0 2,488
-32 -35.6 251,500 26 -3.3 38,780 84 28.9 8,449 142 61.1 2,390
-30 -34.4 234,200 28 -2.2 36,600 86 30.0 8,057 144 62.2 2,297
-28 -33.3 218,200 30 -1.1 34,560 88 31.1 7,686 146 63.3 2,208
-26 -32.2 203,400 32 0 32,650 90 32.2 7,334 148 64.4 2,124
-24 -31.1 189,700 34 1.1 30,850 92 33.3 7,000 150 65.6 2,042
-22 -30 177,000 36 2.2 29,170 94 34.4 6,684 155 68.3 1,855
-20 -28.9 165,200 38 3.3 27,590 96 35.6 6,384 160 71.1 1,687
-18 -27.8 154,300 40 4.4 26,100 98 36.7 6,099 165 73.9 1,537
-16 -26.7 144,200 42 5.5 24,700 100 37.8 5,828 170 76.7 1,402
-14 -25.6 134,800 44 6.6 23,390 102 38.9 5,571 175 79.4 1,281
-12 -24.4 126,100 46 7.7 22,160 104 40.0 5,327 180 82.2 1,171
-10 -23.3 118,100 48 8.9 20,990 106 41.1 5,095 185 85.0 1,072
-8 -22.2 110,500 50 10 19,900 108 42.2 4,874 190 87.8 983
-6 -21.1 103,600 52 11.1 18,870 110 43.3 4,665 195 90.6 902
-4 -20 97,070 54 12.2 17,900 112 44.4 4,465 200 93.3 829
-2 -18.9 91,030 56 13.3 16,980 114 45.5 4,275 205 96.1 762
0 -17.8 85,400 58 14.4 16,120 116 46.7 4,095 210 98.9 702
2 -16.7 80,160 60 15.5 15,310 118 47.8 3,923 215 101.7 647
4 -15.6 75,270 62 16.6 14,540 120 48.9 3,759 220 104.4 598
6 -14.4 70,720 64 17.7 13,820 122 50.0 3,603 225 107.2 553
8 -13.3 66,460 66 18.9 13,130 124 51.1 3,454 230 110.0 511
10 -12.2 62,500 68 20.0 12,490 126 52.2 3,313 235 112.8 473
12 -11.1 58,790 70 21.1 11,880 128 53.3 3,177 240 115.6 438
14 -10.0 55,330 72 22.2 11,310 130 54.4 3,049 245 118.3 406
16 -8.9 52,090 74 23.3 10,760 132 55.6 2,926 250 121.1 378
8–71 62-11637
Table 8–4 Sensor Resistance (CDT)
°F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms

-40 -40 3,360,000 0 32 325,860 40 104 53,330 101.7 215 6,510
-38 -38 3,121,020 1.1 34 307,970 41.1 106 51,010 104.4 220 6,000
-37.8 -36 2,900,710 2.2 36 291,180 42.2 108 48,800 107.2 225 5,540
-36.7 -34 2,697,500 3.3 38 275,410 43.3 110 46,710 110.0 230 5,130
-35.6 -32 2,509.940 4.4 40 260,590 44.4 112 44,710 112.8 235 4,760
-34.4 -30 2,336,720 5.5 42 246,670 45.5 114 42,820 115.6 240 4,410
-33.3 -28 2,186,670 6.6 44 233,570 46.7 116 41,010 118.3 245 4,090
-32.2 -26 2,028,680 7.7 46 221,260 47.8 118 39,290 121.1 250 3,800
-31.1 -24 1,891,780 8.9 48 209,670 48.9 120 37,660 126.7 260 3,290
-30 -22 1,765,060 10 50 198,760 50.0 122 36,100 132.2 270 2,850
-28.9 -20 1,647,700 11.1 52 188,490 51.1 124 34,610 137.8 280 2,490
-27.8 -18 1,538,950 12.2 54 178,820 52.2 126 33,200 143.3 290 2,170
-26.7 -16 1,538,950 13.3 56 169,700 53.3 128 31,850 148.9 300 1,910
-25.6 -14 1,344,580 14.4 58 161,100 54.4 130 30,560 154.4 310 1,680
-24.4 -12 1,257,770 15.5 60 152,990 55.6 132 29,330 160.0 320 1,480
-23.3 -10 1,177,150 16.6 62 145,340 56.7 134 28,160 165.5 330 1,310
-22.2 -8 1,102,240 17.7 64 138,120 57.8 136 27,040 171.1 340 1,160
-21.1 -6 1,032,600 18.9 66 131,310 58.9 138 25,970 176.7 350 1,040
-20 -4 967,830 20.0 68 124,870 60.0 140 24,960 182.2 360 920
18.9 -2 907,560 21.1 70 118,790 61.1 142 23,980 187.8 370 830
-17.8 0 851,450 22.2 72 113,040 62.2 144 23,050 193.3 380 740
-16.7 2 799,180 23.3 74 107,600 63.3 146 22,160 198.9 390 670
-15.6 4 750,470 24.4 76 102,460 64.4 148 21,310 204.4 400 600
-14.4 6 705,060 25.6 78 97,600 65.6 150 20,5000 210.0 410 540
-13.1 -8 662,690 26.7 80 92,990 68.3 155 18,980 215.6 420 490
-12.2 10 623,150 27.8 82 88,630 71.1 160 16,940 231.1 430 450
-11.1 12 586,230 28.9 84 84,510 73.9 165 15,450 226.7 440 410
-10.0 14 551,740 30.0 86 80,6000 76.7 170 14,070 232.2 450 370
-8.9 16 519,5000 31.1 88 76,890 79.4 175 12,870 237.8 460 340
-7.8 18 489,690 32.2 90 73,380 82.2 180 11,750 243.3 470 310
-6.7 20 461,170 33.3 92 70,040 85.0 185 10,750 248.9 480 280
-5.6 22 434,790 34.4 94 66,880 87.8 190 9,870 254.4 490 260
-4.4 24 410,080 35.6 96 63,880 90.6 195 9,050 260.0 500 240
-3.3 26 386,940 36.7 98 61,040 93.3 200 8,320
-2.2 28 365,260 37.8 100 58,330 96.1 205 7,650
-1.1 30 344,930 38.9 102 55,770 98.9 210 7,050
62-11637 8–72
Table 8–5 R-404A Temperature Pressure Chart
Temperature Pressure Temperature Pressure
°C °F BAR PSIG °C °F BAR PSIG

-40 -40 0.3 4.5 0 32 5.0 72.5
-37 -35 0.5 7.1 1 34 5.2 75.6
-34 -30 0.7 9.9 2 36 5.4 78.8
-32 -25 0.9 12.9 3 38 5.7 82.1
-29 -20 1.1 16.3 4 40 5.9 85.5
-28 -18 1.2 17.7 6 42 6.1 89.0
-27 -16 1.3 19.2 7 44 6.4 92.5
-26 -14 1.4 20.7 8 46 6.6 96.2
-24 -12 1.5 22.3 9 48 6.9 99.9
-23 -10 1.7 23.9 10 50 7.2 103.7
-22 -8 1.8 25.6 13 55 8.0 115.4
-21 -6 1.88 27.3 16 60 8.7 126.1
-20 -4 2.0 29.1 18 65 9.5 137.4
-19 -2 2.1 30.9 21 70 10.3 149.4
-18 0 2.3 32.8 24 75 11.2 162.1
-17 2 2.4 34.8 27 80 12.1 175.5
-16 4 2.5 36.8 29 85 13.1 189.6
-14 6 2.7 38.9 32 90 14.1 204.5
-13 8 2.8 41.1 35 95 15.2 220.2
-12 10 3.0 43.3 38 100 16.3 236.8
-11 12 3.1 45.6 41 105 17.5 254.2
-10 14 3.3 48.0 43 110 18.8 272.4
-9 16 3.5 50.4 46 115 20.1 291.6
-8 18 3.7 52.9 49 120 21.5 311.8
-7 20 3.8 55.5 52 125 23.0 332.9
-6 22 4.0 58.1 54 130 24.5 355.0
-4 24 4.2 60.9 57 135 26.1 378.1
-3 26 4.4 63.7 60 140 27.7 402.3
-2 28 4.6 66.5 63 145 29.5 427.6
-1 30 4.8 69.5 66 150 31.3 454.0
8–73 62-11637
Table 8–6 R-452A Temperature Pressure Chart
Temperature Liquid Vapor Temperature Liquid Vapor
°F °C psig bar psig bar °F °C psig bar psig bar
-29.2 -34 10.4 0.72 6.5 0.45 68 20 144.6 9.97 128.6 8.87
-25.6 -32 12.7 0.87 8.5 0.58 71.6 22 153.5 10.59 136.9 9.44
-22 -30 15.1 1.04 10.6 0.73 75.2 24 162.8 11.23 145.6 10.04
-18.4 -28 17.6 1.21 12.8 0.88 78.8 26 172.4 11.89 154.7 10.67
-14.8 -26 20.3 1.40 15.2 1.05 82.4 28 182.4 12.58 164.1 11.32
-11.2 -24 23.2 1.60 17.7 1.22 86 30 192.8 13.29 174.0 12.00
-7.6 -22 26.2 1.81 20.4 1.41 89.6 32 203.6 14.04 184.2 12.71
-4 -20 29.5 2.03 23.3 1.61 93.2 34 214.8 14.81 194.9 13.44
-0.4 -18 32.9 2.27 26.3 1.82 96.8 36 226.4 15.61 206.0 14.21
3.2 -16 36.5 2.52 29.6 2.04 100.4 38 238.4 16.44 217.5 15.00
6.8 -14 40.4 2.78 33.0 2.28 104 40 250.9 17.30 229.5 15.83
10.4 -12 44.4 3.06 36.6 2.53 107.6 42 263.8 18.19 242.0 16.69
14 -10 48.7 3.36 40.5 2.79 111.2 44 277.1 19.11 255.0 17.59
17.6 -8 53.2 3.67 44.5 3.07 114.8 46 291.0 20.07 268.5 18.51
21.2 -6 57.9 3.99 48.8 3.36 118.4 48 305.3 21.06 282.5 19.48
24.8 -4 62.9 4.34 53.3 3.68 122 50 320.1 22.08 297.0 20.48
28.4 -2 68.1 4.70 58.0 4.00 125.6 52 335.4 23.13 312.1 21.52
32 0 73.6 5.08 63.0 4.35 129.2 54 351.2 24.22 327.7 22.60
35.6 2 79.4 5.48 68.3 4.71 132.8 56 367.6 25.35 344.0 23.72
39.2 4 85.4 5.89 73.8 5.09 136.4 58 384.4 26.51 360.9 24.89
42.8 6 91.7 6.33 79.6 5.49 140 60 401.8 27.71 378.4 26.10
46.4 8 98.4 6.78 85.7 5.91 143.6 62 419.8 28.95 396.7 27.36
50 10 105.3 7.26 92.1 6.35 147.2 64 438.4 30.23 415.7 28.67
53.6 12 112.5 7.76 98.7 6.81 150.8 66 457.5 31.55 435.4 30.03
57.2 14 120.0 8.28 105.7 7.29 154.4 68 477.2 32.91 456.1 31.45
60.8 16 127.9 8.82 113.0 7.79 158 70 487.4 34.30 477.6 32.94
64.4 18 136.1 9.39 120.6 8.32
62-11637 8–74
Table 8–7 Compressor Discharge Table 8–8 Compressor Suction
Pressure Transducer Pressure/Voltage Pressure Transducer Pressure/Voltage
PSIG Bar Voltage PSIG Bar Voltage

0 0 0.5 -10 -0.7 0.7
10 0.7 0.6 -5.0 -0.3 0.8
20 1.4 0.7 0.0 0.0 1.0
30 2.0 0.7 5.0 0.3 1.2
40 2.7 0.8 10.0 0.7 1.4
50 3.4 0.9 15.0 1.0 1.5
60 4.1 1.0 20.0 1.4 1.7
70 4.8 1.1 25.0 1.7 1.9
80 5.4 1.1 30 2.0 2.1
90 6.1 1.2 35 2.4 2.2
100 6.8 1.3 40 2.7 2.4
125 8.5 1.5 45 3.1 2.6
150 10.2 1.7 50 3.4 2.8
175 11.9 1.9 55 3.7 3.7
200 13.6 2.1 60 4.1 3.1
225 15.3 2.3 65 4.4 3.3
250 17.0 2.5 70 4.8 3.5
275 18.7 2.7 75 5.1 3.6
300 20.4 2.9 80 5.4 3.8
325 22.1 3.1 85 5.8 5.8
350 23.8 3.3 90 6.1 4.1
375 25.5 3.5 95 6.5 4.3
400 27.2 3.7 100 6.8 4.5
450 30.6 4.1
8–75 62-11637
62-11637 8–76
SECTION 9 - UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING
9.1 ENGINE .................................................................... 9–1

9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start ...................................................... 9–1
9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops .................................................. 9–2
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off ................................................... 9–2
9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.5 Malfunction in the Engine Starting Circuit ...................................... 9–2
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9.2 ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9.3 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.1 Unit Will Not Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling ........................................ 9–4
9.3.3 System Will Not Pump Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.4 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling ................................. 9–4
9.3.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.6 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.7 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.8 Defrost Cycle Malfunction .................................................. 9–5
9.3.9 Abnormal Pressure Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9.3.10 Abnormal Pressure Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9.3.11 Abnormal Noise .......................................................... 9–7
9.3.12 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow .................................. 9–7
9.3.13 Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction ......................................... 9–7
9.3.14 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.15 Solenoid Valve Malfunction ................................................. 9–7
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 9
Unit Troubleshooting
NOTICE
NOTE
Run a Pretrip (Section 3.6) and check all active alarms before continuing with troubleshooting.
9.1 Engine
Indication/Trouble Possible Causes Action / Reference

9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start
Battery insufficiently charged 9.2
Battery cable connections loose or corroded Check
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at starter Check/Repair
Starter motor malfunction 9.1.4
Starter motor will not crank or low
Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
cranking speed
Open starting circuit 9.1.5
Incorrect grade of lubricating oil 2.8
Compressor not unloaded 8.8.5.5
High suction pressure 8.9.8
No fuel in tank Check
Air in fuel system 8.5.2
Water in fuel system Drain Sump & 8.5.5
Plugged fuel filter 8.5.5
Starter motor cranks but engine
Plugged inlet screen to mechanical pump. 8.5.3
fails to start
Plugged inlet screen to electric pump. 8.5.4
Plugged fuel lines to injector(s) Check
ENCU defective Replace
Engine preheat defective 8.5.11
Starter cranks, engages, but dies
Voltage drop in battery cable(s) Check
after a few seconds
9–1 62-11637
9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops
Fuel supply restricted Check
No fuel in tank Check
Leak in fuel system Check
Faulty fuel control operation Engine Manual
Plugged fuel filter 8.5.5
Plugged inlet screen to mechanical pump 8.5.3
Engine stops after several rota- Plugged inlet screen to electric pump 8.5.4
tions Injector nozzle(s) defective Engine Manual
Injection pump defective Engine Manual
Air cleaner or hose restricted 8.5.10
Electric fuel pump malfunction 8.5.4
Mechanical fuel pump malfunction Engine Manual
Oil pressure switch defective Replace
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off
Engine will not shut off ENCU operation defective Replace
9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction
Battery insufficiently charged 9.2
Battery cable connections loose or corroded Check
Starter motor will not crank or Battery cables defective Replace

turns slowly Excessively worn, open or defective starter brushes Engine Manual
Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
Pinion or ring gear obstructed or worn Clean both,
Starter motor turns but pinion
remove burrs,
does not engage
or replace
Starter motor does not disengage Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
after engine starts Defective starter Engine Manual
9.1.5 Malfunction in the Engine Starting Circuit
Battery condition Load Test
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at starter Check/Repair
No power to starter solenoid (SS)
No power from 3MM-12 to Starter Solenoid connector Check/Repair
62-11637 9–2
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting
Air in fuel system 8.5.2
Air vent restricted in fuel tank cap Clean
Restricted fuel lines Engine Manual
Loss of power Defective fuel injection pump Engine Manual
Defective injector(s) or incorrect type Engine Manual
Incorrect fuel injection pump timing Engine Manual
Incorrect valve timing Engine Manual
Poor compression Engine Manual
Engine shockmounts defective Replace
Vibration
Poor compression Engine Manual
Exhaust pipe restriction Remove
Restriction in water jacket Engine Manual
Restriction in radiator 8.5.14
Overheating
Coolant level too low 8.5.14
Loose water pump Engine Manual
Defective thermostat Engine Manual
Alternator/Water pump belt loose/broken 8.5.16
Excessive crankcase pressure Plugged crankcase breather 8.5.16
9.2 Alternator

Limited charging system operating time Check
Battery condition Load Test
Alternator belt loose/broken Figure 8.15
Alternator fails to charge Damaged or corroded electrical connections Check./Repair
Excessively worn, open or defective brushes 8.10.5
Regulator faulty 8.10.5
Open rotor field coil Check/Replace
Alternator belt loose/broken Figure 8.15
Damaged or corroded electrical connections Check/Repair
Excessively worn, sticky or defective brushes 8.10.5
Low or unsteady charging rate
Regulator faulty 8.10.5
Grounded or shorted turns in rotor Check/Replace
Open rotor field coil Check/Replace
9–3 62-11637
Excessive charging rate (evi- Regulator faulty 8.10.5
denced by need for frequent filling
or constant high charging amper-
age)
Alternator belt loose/broken/misaligned Figure 8.15
Alternator noisy Loose pulley 8.10.5
Worn bearings 8.10.5
9.3 Refrigeration / Temperature Control

9.3.1 Unit Will Not Cool
Compressor drive defective 8.6.1
Compressor malfunction
Compressor defective 8.8.1
A defrost cycle did not terminate. Check DTT 8.10.7
Abnormal pressure 9.3.9
Refrigeration system
Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Clutch failure 8.6.4
9.3.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Compressor internal damage 8.8.1
Compressor
Unloader malfunction 8.8.5.5
Unloader malfunction 8.8.5.5
Expansion valve malfunction 9.3.13
Refrigeration system No or restricted evaporator airflow 9.3.12
Suction Modulation Valve malfunction 8.9.8
Check system for noncondensibles 8.7.2
9.3.3 System Will Not Pump Down
SV2 or SV4 not closing 8.9.6
Valve malfunction Check valve not closing 8.9.10
Liquid line service valve defective Replace
Compressor Compressor internal damage 8.8.1
9.3.4 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling
Hot Load Allow time to pull
down
Refrigerated Compartment
Defective or insufficient refrigerated compartment insula- Correct
tion or air leak
Refrigeration system Temperature sensor malfunction 8.10.7
62-11637 9–4
9.3.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling
Temperature sensor malfunction 8.10.7
Unit fails to stop cooling Incorrect temperature scale, check whether microproces- Check
sor is set for °C or °F
9.3.6 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating
Main microprocessor malfunction 5.5.2
Refrigeration system Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Bypass check valve malfunction 8.9.10
9.3.7 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating
Temperature sensor malfunction 8.10.7
Unit fails to stop heating Incorrect temperature scale, check whether microproces- Check
sor is set for °C or °F
9.3.8 Defrost Cycle Malfunction
Defrost timer has not expired Check/Reset
Will not initiate defrost automati- Defrost air switch (DAS) malfunction 8.9.13
cally DTT is above 40°F (4.4°C) Cool Down
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at DTT Check/Repair
Display key defective 8.10.4
Will not initiate defrost manually DTT is above 40°F (4.4°C) Cool Down
Unit has been running less than 15 seconds Try again
Low refrigerant charge 8.7.2
Initiates but does not defrost Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Defrost air switch (DAS) out of adjustment 8.9.13
Frequent defrost
Wet load Normal
Does not terminate or Defrost air switch (DAS) out of adjustment 8.9.13
cycles on defrost DTT malfunction 8.10.7
Hot Load Allow time to pull
down
Refrigerated Compartment
Defective or insufficient refrigerated compartment insula- Correct
tion or air leak
9–5 62-11637
9.3.9 Abnormal Pressure Cooling
Condenser coil dirty 8.9.2
Condenser fan/upper belt defective 8.6.3
High discharge pressure Discharge check valve restricted 8.9.10
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 8.7.2
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
SV4 leaking 8.9.6
Compressor valve(s) worn or broken 8.8.1
Low discharge pressure
Suction modulation valve malfunction 8.9.8
Filter drier partially plugged 8.9.3
Expansion valve malfunction 9.3.13
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 9.3.12
Low suction pressure Excessive frost on evaporator coil 9.3.8
SV2 defective 8.9.6
Suction modulation valve malfunction 8.9.8
Liquid or suction line service valve partially closed Open
SV4 leaking 8.9.6
High suction pressure Compressor valves(s) worn or broken 8.8.1
Compressor gasket(s) defective 8.8.1
Suction and discharge pressures Compressor valves defective 8.8.1
tend to equalize when unit is oper-
Compressor gasket(s) defective 8.8.1
ating
9.3.10 Abnormal Pressure Heating
Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
High discharge pressure Condenser fan/upper belt defective 8.6.3
Compressor valves defective 8.8.1
Low discharge pressure SV1 leaking 8.9.5
Low suction pressure
SV1 leaking 8.9.5
62-11637 9–6
9.3.11 Abnormal Noise
Loose mounting bolts Tighten
Worn bearings 8.8.1
Compressor Worn or broken valves 8.8.1
Liquid slugging 9.3.13
Insufficient oil 8.8.5
Condenser fan 8.6.3
Condenser or evaporator fan Evaporator fan 8.6.5
Fan shaft 8.6.6
Alternator/Water pump belt Alternator belt loose/broken Figure 8.15
9.3.12 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow
Frost on coil 8.9.13
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 8.9.1
Upper belt loose or broken 8.6.2
No or partial evaporator air flow Evaporator fan loose or defective 8.6.5
Evaporator air flow blocked Check
9.3.13 Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction
EVOT defective 8.10.7
Coil not seated properly on valve 8.9.12
EVXV not controlling correctly EVOP defective Check
EVXV inlet screen plugged Check/Replace
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at valve or Check/Repair
SVM
9.3.14 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction
Coil not seated properly Check
Coil defective 8.9.8
CSP defective 8.9.12
CSMV not controlling correctly
CST defective 8.10.7
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at valve or Check/Repair
SVM
9.3.15 Solenoid Valve Malfunction
No power to valve Check alarms
Damaged or corroded electrical connections Check/Repair
Valve does not function properly Coil defective or improperly assembled 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Valve improperly assembled 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Foreign material in valve or valve worn 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Valve closes but refrigerant con- Foreign material in valve or valve worn 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
tinues to flow
9–7 62-11637
62-11637 9–8
SECTION 10 - WIRING
10.1 HARNESS CONNECTOR WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1

10.2 SPLICE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
10.3 WIRING SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6
TOC 62-11637
62-11637
SECTION 10
Wiring
10.1 Harness Connector Wiring
All illustrations provided in this Section are looking at the connector connection end (with the wires in the back).
Table 10–1 PCM Table 10–2 1MM
PCM ï :KLWH
1MM ï %ODFN
12 1
3 1
35 24
Component Terminal 8 6
SP-8 3 (14)
SATPWR-A 6
LB-B 7 Component Terminal
3MM-34 8
PCM-19 1
3MM-23 9
SP-1 2
ES-E (EES power if equipped) 11
1SVM-1 3
1RP-B 12
PCM-35 13 (35) SP-4 4
SP-8 14 (3) PCM-32 6

SP-5 15 1SVM-6 8
3MM-18 16 Unused Terminals: 5, 7
3MM-17 (FHR) 17
2SVM-11 /
18
and 1RP-A (If equipped)
1MM-1 19
FLS-A 22
3MM-15 23
AFAS (F6-A) 24
3MM-13 26
3MM-14 27
3MM-28 28
2MM-12 29
2MM-23 30
2MM-29 31
1MM-6 32
SP-6 34
PCM-13 35 (13)
Unused Terminals: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 21, 25
10–1 62-11637
Table 10–3 2MM Table 10–4 3MM
2MM ï %ODFN
3MM ï *UD\
12 1
12 1
35 24
AAT-A 1
AAT-B 2
Component Terminal
RAT-A 3
SV1-A (+) 1
RAT-B 4
SAT-A 5 SV2-A (+) 2
SAT-B 6 SV4-A (+) 3
EVOT-A 7 UL1-A (+) 6
CDT-A 8 LB-H 7
CSP-3 9
UL2-A (+) 8
CDP-3 10
ENCU-44 9
DTT-B 11
PCM-29 12 FP (+) 10
FLS-C 13 CLH-A (+) 11
REM-E 14 SS-A 12
IAT-A (If equipped) PCM-26 (AFAR) 13
15
REM-H (If not)
PCM-27 14
CST-A 16
PCM-23 15
EVOP-3 17
EVOT-B 18 SP-5 16
CDT-B 19 PCM-17 (FHR) 17
CSP-1 20 PCM-16 18
CDP-1 21 DAS (+) 19
DTT-A 22
PCM-9 23
PCM-30 23
PCM-28 28
FLS-B 24
REM-F 25 DAS (-) 29
IAT-B (If equipped) PCM-8 34
26
REM-G (If not) Unused Terminals: 4, 5, 20-22, 24-27, 30-33, 35
CST-B 27
EVOP-1 28
PCM-31 29
SP-7 30
SP-9 35
Unused Terminals: 31-34
62-11637 10–2
Table 10–5 1SVM
2SVM ï %OXH
1SVM ï %ODFN
12 1
3 1
35 24
8 6
Component Terminal
CSMV-B 3
Component Terminal CSMV-C 4
1MM-3 1 CSMV-D 5
DM-2 (CAN-HI) 2 EVXV-E 6
DM-1 (LOGIC GND) 3 EVXV-A 7
DM-6 (CAN-LO) 4 EVXV-B 8
SP-1 5 EVXV-C 9
1MM-8 6 EVXV-D 10
SP-4 7 PCM-18 11
DM-10 (LOGIC PWR) 8 Units With DS Connector = DS-A
14
Unused Terminals: None Without DS Connector = REM-A
Table 10–6 2SVM Units With DS Connector = REM-A

15
Without DS Connector = REM-C
SP-6 22
2SVM ï %OXH Units With DS Connector = DS-B
25
Without DS Connector = REB-B
12 1
Units With DS Connector = REM-B
26
Without DS Connector = REM-D
Unused Terminals: 1, 12, 13, 16-21, 23, 24, 27-35.
Units with DS Connector; 14, 25
35 24
Component Terminal
CSMV-A 2
10–3 62-11637
Table 10–7 DM Table 10–8 ENCU
1 23
DM ï %ODFN
5 1
14 10
1SVM-3 1
1SVM-2 2
Component Terminal
SATCOM-B 3 ENCT-B 1
1SVM-4 6 ENSSN-2 2
J1-A 7 ENCT-A 6
SATCOM-C 8 RPS-3 7
1SVM-8 10 ENOPS-A 15
ENOPS-B 18
SATCOM-A 12
ENCU GND A 19
Unused Terminals: 4, 5, 9, 11, 13, 14
ENSSN-1 20
SM 21
SP-6 22
SP-1 23
SP-4 24
SP-27
(If equipped with MAP) 27
RPS-2 (If not)
MAP-3
28
(If equipped with MAP)
SP-28
(If equipped with MAP) 29
RPS-1 (If not)
FSA-1 36
FSA-2 41
ENSSN-3 43
3MM-9 44
Unused Terminals: 3-5, 8-14, 16, 17, 25, 26, 30-35,
37-40, 42
62-11637 10–4
Table 10–9 REM
REM
REM
K F
K F
A E
A E Harness Connector Shown
Harness Connector Shown
2SVM-14 A DS
UNITS WITH DS CONNECTOR 2SVM-25 B DS
From Terminal To 2SVM-15 C REMS1
(Component)
2SVM-26 D REMS1
2SVM-15 A REMS1
2MM-14 E REMSN1
2SVM-26 B REMS1
2MM-25 F REMSN1
2MM-14 E REMSN1
Unused Terminals: G, H, J, K
2MM-25 F REMSN1
2MM-15 H REMSN2
2MM-26 G REMSN2
Unused Terminals: C, D, J, K
UNITS WITHOUT DS CONNECTOR
From Terminal To
(Component)
10–5 62-11637
10.2 Splice Points
Table 10–10 Splice Points Splice Pint # Component
Splice Pint # Component FH1-A (FHTS to FH to FH1-B)
1MM-2 FH2-A (FHTS to FH to FH2-B)
SP-8
SP-1 (CAN High) 1SVM-5 (Power from FHR) PCM-3
ENCU-23 PCM-14
SATPWR-A 2MM-35
UL1-(negative) SP-9
HPS-A
(Power from SROS)
UL2-(negative) J1-B
SP-2 (Ground)
FP-(negative) ENCU-27
GND1-RING1* SP-27**
MAP-1
(Sensor ground)
LB-G RPS-2
AFAS-B (negative)
CLH- B (negative) ENCU-29
GND1-RING1* SP-28**
MAP-2
(Sensor power)
SV1-B (negative) RPS-1
SP-3 (Ground)
SV2-B (negative) ESEIT-1
SV4-B (negative) ESFIT-1
SP-30
FH1-B (FH to FHTS to FH1-A) (If EES equipped) ESFOT-1
FH2-B (FH to FHTS to FH2-A) ECM-22
1MM-4 ESACV-5
SP-4
1SVM-7 ESACV-3
(CAN low)
ENCU-24 ECM-29
3MM-16 SP-31
ES-A (GRD)
SP-5 (If EES equipped)
HPS-B ESFP-1 (-)
(Power to K1)
PCM-15 ESFI-1 (-)
2SVM-22 AP-5
SP-6 ENCU-22 ECM-16
(Power from “RR”) PCM-34 SP-32
ES-C
(If EES equipped)
ES-F (If EES equipped) ES-G
CDP-2 ECM-30
SP-7 EVOP-2 SP-33
ES-H
(+ 5V power) (If EES equipped)
CSP-2 ES-D
2MM-30 * Wire runs from splice point to battery ground wire.
** If equipped with MAP sensor only.
10.3 Wiring Schematic

The wiring schematic is provided on the following page.
62-11637 10–6
INDEX
A Display Module 8–8

Display Module (DM) 8–63
Advanced User 3–19
Display Module Keys 2–15
Air Cleaner 8–14
Display Screens 3–2
Air Flow 4–17
Door Latch Maintenance and Replacement 8–7
Alternator 2–7, 8–63
Downloading Data Files 5–11
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) 2–10
AutoFresh Air Exchange 2–10, 4–10
E
AutoFresh Fresh Air Exchange 8–5
Electric Fuel Pump 2–16
C Electric Fuel Pump Screen 8–10
Electrical System Components 8–62
Cargo Protect Mode 4–18
Engine 2–6
Caution Statements 1–2
Engine Air System 2–6
Changing Setpoint 3–11
Engine and Engine Related Systems Service 8–8
Clutch 8–24
Engine and Temp Control, Introduction 4–1
Component Test Mode 5–6
Engine Control 4–2
Compressor and Unloader Service 8–41
Engine Control System 8–15
Compressor Oil Level 8–45
Engine Controls 2–6
Compressor Suction Mod Valve (CSMV) 2–11, 8–55
Engine Oil And Oil Filter 8–13
Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors 2–9
Engine Preheater 8–14
Condenser Coil 2–10, 8–49
Engine Speed Overrides 4–18
Condenser Fan 8–24
Engine Start-Up Sequence 4–2
Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1) 8–52
Evacuation and Dehydration 8–34
Condensing Section 2–6
Evaporator Coil 2–11, 8–49
Configuration Settings 5–5
Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) 2–11, 8–57
Connecting Computer and Control System 5–15
Evaporator Fan 8–25
Continuous Operation 3–13, 4–9
Evaporator Section 2–10
Control System Information 3–14
Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors 2–11
Cooling 4–4
External Surface Service 8–5
Cooling System 8–17
Crankcase Breather 8–19
F
CSMV Control Overrides 4–20
Cylinder Head and Valve Plate Service 8–43 Fanshaft 8–25
Filter Drier 2–10, 8–51
D Fuel Heater 2–16, 8–13
Fuel Level Sensor 2–16
Data Downloading 3–15
Fuel Level Sensor (FLS) 8–12
Data Recording 3–14
Fuel System 8–8
Data Transfer USB Memory Device 5–9
Functional Parameters 3–24
Data, Component Resistance & Current Draw 2–18
Functional Parameters Via Display Mounted Keys 5–19
Data, Compressor 2–17
Data, Electrical 2–18
G
Data, Engine 2–17
Data, Refrigeration System 2–18 Gearbox 8–26
DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up 3–15 General Equipment Description 2–1
DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech 5–19 Grille Insert Removal 8–6
Defrost 4–5, 4–11
Defrost Air Switch 8–60 H
Defrost Initiation And Start 4–11 Heat Exchanger 2–10
Display 3–1
Index–1 62-11637
Heating 4–4 Pre-Replacement Steps 5–17
High Ambient Defrost Operation 4–12 Pressure Transducers 8–60
High Ambient Defrost Termination Sequence 4–13 Pre-Trip Inspection 3–7, 8–2
High Pressure Switch 8–59 Priming the Fuel System 8–9
ProductShield 4–15
I Pull Down/Pull-Up 4–3
Inactive Alarms 5–3

Installing Software 5–12
R
Interface Methods 5–1 Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Calibration 8–16
Introduction 2–1 Receiver 2–10
Refrigerant System Component Service 8–49
L Refrigerant System Service 8–27
Refrigerant System Service Connections 8–28
Language Selection 3–18
Refrigeration Circuit During Cooling 2–19
Leak Checking 8–31
Remote Panel 2–16, 3–33, 3–34
LED indications 2–14
Remote Switches 2–15
Light Bar 2–15, 8–64
Remote Temperature Sensor 2–17
Liquid Line (SV2)/Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid Valves 8–54
Remote Temperature Sensors 2–16
Lower Belt 8–21
Removal and Replacement of Compressor 8–41
Repair or Replacement Determination 8–41
M
Replacing Check Valve 8–58
Main Microprocessor Module (MM) 8–62 Replacing Receiver Sight Glass Or Fusible Plug 8–52
Main Microprocessor Module Replacement 5–17 Re-Start Parameters 4–7
Main Microprocessor Replacement & Setup 5–16
Main Microprocessor Setup 5–18 S
Manual Defrost 3–17
Safety Decals 1–8
Mechanical Fuel Pump Screen 8–10
Safety Devices 2–18
MessageCenter Messages 6–1
Safety Precautions 1–1
Microprocessor Status LED 2–14
Scheduled Maintenance 8–2
Modes of Operation 4–3
Sensor Checkout 8–65
Sequence of Operation - Electrical 4–1
N
Service Mode 5–8
Normal Defrost Termination 4–12 Servicing the Refrigerant Charge 8–28
Normal Defrost Termination Sequence 4–12 Sleep Mode 3–28, 3–29
Notice Statements 1–2 Solenoid Valves 2–10
Specific Warning, Caution, and Notice Statements 1–2
O Spin-On Fuel Filter Replacement 8–11
Oil Pump and Bearing Head 8–44 Starting 3–3
Options 2–15 Start-Stop Configuration 4–6
Options, Light Bar 2–15 Start-Stop Operating Sequence 4–8
Options, Remote Switches 2–15 Start-Stop Operation 3–12
Options, Remote Temperature Sensor 2–17 Stepper Test Harness 8–55
Overrides 4–5 Stepper Valve Module (SVM) 8–63
Stop Parameters 4–7
P Stopping Unit 3–30
Suction Side Fuel Filter Replacement 8–11
PC Mode 5–9 System Final Checkout 5–19
Perishable and Frozen Setpoint Ranges 4–6
Power Train 2–7 T
Power Train Service 8–20
Preprogrammed Software Overrides 4–18 Technician Hour Meters 5–2
62-11637 Index–2
Technician Mode 5–1 Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Cool 9–4
Temperature Control 4–6 Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Heat 9–5
Temperature Determination 4–6 Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Stop Heating 9–5
Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2 4–13 Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling 9–5
Transferring Configuration Files 5–14 TRU-Tech 5–15
Transition To High Speed 4–3 TRU-Tech & TRU-View 5–15
Troubleshooting, Abnormal Noise 9–7 TRU–View 5–15
Troubleshooting, Abnormal Pressure Cooling 9–6
Troubleshooting, Abnormal Pressure Heating 9–6 U
Troubleshooting, Alternator 9–3
UltraFreeze Temperature Control 4–5
Troubleshooting, Compressor Suction Modulation Valve
UltraFresh Temperature Control 4–4
(CSMV) Malfunction 9–7
Unit Data 3–20
Troubleshooting, Defrost Cycle Malfunction 9–5
Unloader Control Overrides 4–19
Troubleshooting, Engine 9–1
Unloaders 2–7, 8–47
Troubleshooting, Engine Starts Then Stops 9–2
Upper Belt Replacement 8–23
Troubleshooting, Engine Will Not Shut Off 9–2
USB Memory Devices 5–9
Troubleshooting, Engine Will Not Start 9–1
User Selected Override Operation 4–13
Troubleshooting, Exp Valve (EVXV) Malfunction 9–7
Troubleshooting, Malfunction Engine Starting Circuit 9–2
Troubleshooting, Misc Engine Troubleshooting 9–3
V
Troubleshooting, Refrig / Temp Control 9–4 View Active Alarms 3–22
Troubleshooting, Restricted Evaporator Air Flow 9–7 View Hour Meters 3–23
Troubleshooting, Solenoid Valve Malfunction 9–7
Troubleshooting, Starter Motor Malfunction 9–2 W
Troubleshooting, System Will Not Pump Down 9–4
Warning Statements 1–2
Troubleshooting, Unit Operates Too Long In Cooling 9–4
Water Pump/Alternator Belt 8–19
Troubleshooting, Unit Runs But Insufficient Cooling 9–4
Index–3 62-11637
North America Central America and Mexico
Carrier Transicold Carrier Transicold
700 Olympic Drive Ejercito Nacional 253−A Piso 5
Athens, GA 30601 USA Colonia Anahuac
11320 Mexico, D.F.
Carrier Transicold
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA
A member of the United Technologies Corporation. Stock symbol UTX. www.carrier.transicold.com

X4 Ops and SVC PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

X4 Ops and SVC PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

X4 Ops and SVC PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

Operation and Service Manual

X4 7300 & 7500

X4 7300 & 7500

© Carrier Corporation, 2018 Printed in U. S. A. May 2018

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2.2 Refrigerant Types Used

2.3 General Description

Table 2–1 Model Chart

X4 7500 NDW276 R-452A 16 7.26

Table 2–2 Additional Support Manuals

1. Coolant Bottle 19. Engine Oil Fill and Dipstick

MOUNT DTT AS SHOWN

1. Evaporator Air Nozzle 9. Low Pressure Air Switch Fitting (location)

2.4.2 Engine Air System

2.4.3 Engine Controls

2.4.3.1 Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA)

2.4.3.2 Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)

2.4.3.3 Rack Position Sensor (RPS)

2.4.3.4 Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)

2.4.3.5 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)

2.4.4.1 Alternator Operation

2.4.4.2 Voltage Regulator Operation

2.4.5 Power Train

Figure 2.5 Compressor Cylinder Head Unloaded

Solenoid Valve Stem

Cylinder Suction Valve

2.4.7.2 Unloaded Operation

Cylinder Suction Valve

2.4.7.3 Loaded Operation

2.4.8 Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors

2.4.8.1 Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (CDP)

2.5.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)

2.5.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)

2.5.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors

2.5.4.1 Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)

2.5.4.2 Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT)

2.5.4.3 Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT)

2.5.4.4 Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT / RAT2)

2.5.4.5 Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT)

2.6.1 Multiple Languages

2.6.2 Automatic Start-Stop

2.6.3 Special Features

2.6.4 Component Description And Location

Figure 2.8 Display Module

START/STOP DIESEL COOL

BOX TEMPERATURE oF SETPOINT oF

1. Display Screen 7. Arrow Keys

2.6.4.5 Engine Control Unit (ENCU)

2.6.4.7 Display Module Keys - See Figure 2.8.

2.7.1 Light Bar Figure 2.9 Light Bar

The Light Bar is an external indicator light which can be

2.7.2 Remote Switch(es)

2.7.3 Remote Temperature Sensors

2.7.4 Fuel Level Sensor

2.7.5 Fuel Heater

2.7.6 Electric Fuel Pump

2.7.7 Remote Panel